JP2019081100A5 - - Google Patents

Description

Amusement machine

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed . Furthermore, there is shall be reported that easily draw is performed after the award game execution game state is set.

JP2012-217766A

However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the player.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 displays a first determination means capable of executing a first determination and a first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means. 1 display means, a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. First dynamic display period determining means for determining, second determining means capable of executing the second determination, and second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determining means. A second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means, and a second dynamic display means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. When the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the dynamic display period determination means and the first display means, the first privilege game is executed and the second display means is displayed. A privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second judgment result is displayed, and the second judgment is performed more than the first judgment. a first game condition for easily performed, and the second game condition to facilitate the first determination is performed than the second determination, the game state setting means capable of setting, the first by the player state setting means When the game state is set, the notification timing for notifying a notification mode for indicating to the player that the first game state has been set is determined based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. a notification timing determining unit is configured to have a.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, first determining means capable of executing the first determination, and first display means for displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determining means, First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means, and a first operation for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. Display period determination means, second determination means capable of executing the second determination, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and second display thereof. Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on a means, and second dynamic display period determination for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. Means and the first display means, when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed, a first privilege game is executed, and a second determination specific to the second display means A privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a result is displayed, and the second judgment is more easily executed than the first judgment. 1 and game state, and the second game condition to facilitate the first determination is performed than the second determination, the game state setting means capable of setting, the first game condition is set by the player state setting means And a notification timing determination means for determining a notification timing for notifying a notification mode for indicating to the player that the first game state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. , it is intended to have a.

Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content of the ending of the jackpot game in 1st Embodiment, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display content during probability change in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is non-fluctuation after the start of variation of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, and (b) is the first embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol is a small hit during RUSH in the form. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is changing after the start of the variation of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, and (b) is the first embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol stops changing during hit variation of the 1st special symbol in a form. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit A during RUSH in the first embodiment, and (b) is RUSH in the first embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the state where the result of the variable display of the 1st special symbol was big hit C, or big hit D inside. (A) is a diagram showing a card forgetting caution screen in the first embodiment, and (b) to (d) are timing charts showing timings of displaying the card forgetting caution screen in the first embodiment. is there. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a counter and the like provided in a RAM 203 of main controller 110. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram that schematically shows the contents of the small hit random number table, and (c) is It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd random number table typically. (A) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of a big hit classification selection table, and (b) is a mimetic diagram showing the contents of a small hit classification selection table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the structure of the fluctuation pattern selection table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the table for normal use typically. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving/probability change table, and (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the latent confirmation table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the universal figure fluctuation pattern table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of a stop display mode selection table, and (b) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of an additional production selection table. It is a block diagram of an electrical configuration of a display control device in the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power activation. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining back surface BD. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface E. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judgment processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game state update process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judgment processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation change process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol variation execution process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 2 disengagement stop processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot termination processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows a small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit operation setting process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the start-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a stop type command reception process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a hit related process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting related processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number update process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation restart process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process for special figure 1 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for special maps 2 performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the various counter renewal processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. 7 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a rush rush command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an additional effect command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 9 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 6 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of winning the jackpot C in the probability variation state in the second embodiment. It is a relationship diagram of the game content of the special figure 1 game and the granted privilege after the probability variation state in the second embodiment is set. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents when the second special symbol is changing at the time of stopping the winning symbol of the first special symbol in the second embodiment, and (b) is the second embodiment It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when the 2nd special symbol stopped while the winning symbol stop of the 1st special symbol in a form. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot type selection 2 table. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection 2 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the detachment type selection table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the time saving/probability change 2 table. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fixed period setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the fixed time performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol motion stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fixed period setting processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the remaining number update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the temporary stop related process 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the restart process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the symbol decision related processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the various counter update processing 2 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a relationship diagram of the game content of the special figure 1 game and the granted privilege after the probability variation state is set in the third embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the jackpot end in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the 1st fluctuation after the jackpot. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the 3rd variation after the big hit in a 3rd embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display content of the 4th variation after the big hit. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the 3rd variation after the big hit when the 3rd variation after the big hit is a big hit in the third embodiment, and (b) is between 1st and 3rd variation after the big hit. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the second variation after the big hit when the special figure 1 small hit is won. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st random number 3 table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit random number 3 table. (A) is a mimetic diagram showing typically the contents of the big hit classification selection 3 table, and (b) is a mimetic diagram showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection 3 table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the probability variation 3 table typically, (c) is, It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the probability variation A table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the probability variation B table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the probability variation C table typically, (c) is the probability variation D table It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 3 tables for latent accuracy. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the probability variation production selection table typically. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judgment processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 deviation|variation process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 disengagement stop process performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning information related processing which is executed by the MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot end time process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 3 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting process for probability changes performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won during the probability changing state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows the flow when the time is shortened during the probability changing state. It is the timing chart shown. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of RUSH rush due to reaching the time saving number in the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows that it is RUSH in the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation in the fourth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content notified. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of winning the falling lottery in the latent state in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a special figure in the latent state in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure showing a display screen when a big hit is won in 2. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content in Super RUSH in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the counter etc. which are provided in RAM203 of the main controller 110 in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the jackpot classification selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a schematic diagram of the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fall lottery table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the latent probability mode selection table typically, (c) is the fall It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the notification selection table typically. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows game state update processing 4 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit judging processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the latent accuracy mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fall production setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control device in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit related process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fall alerting|reporting process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 4 for special figures 1 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 4 for special figures 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device for small hits. It is an exploded front perspective view of a small winning variable winning device. It is an operation view of the small hitting variable winning device as viewed from the back side. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of winning the special figure 1 jackpot during the probability change state in 5th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the game at the time of short-time digestion during the probability change state in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents at the time of a small hit in a 5th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display contents during a small hit game. (A) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball passes through a falling gate during a small hit game in the fifth embodiment, and (b) shows a falling gate during a small hit game. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content when not passing. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of small hit end, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display contents in a latent state (invincible mode). It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection 5 table, (b) is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the operation scenario storage area typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the small hit entrance passage processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fall gate passage process performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the state command process 5 performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hit related process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the sphere passage related process performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 87, one embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape and an outer frame 11 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (gaming ball) flows down on the front surface of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported openably and closably on the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses 16a is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface protruding to the front, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change the light emission mode by lighting or blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and during a jackpot or reach effect, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by turning on or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front face frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right-side illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

A ball rental operating unit 40 is arranged below the window 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the balance as a number as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on the information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not needed in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central part of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is provided.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the player turns the operation handle 51 clockwise, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the turning operation amount. The ball is fired with the strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with the jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, there is provided a ball removing lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball pulling lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 opens, The sphere falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a “thousand box”) placed below the lower plate 50 for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general prizes. The mouth 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the outlet 66, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 ( (See FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood made by laminating thin plate materials, and is formed so that the player cannot visually see various structures arranged from the front side to the back side of the base plate 60. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board. It is fixed from the front side of 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen from the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front surface of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed by partitioning two rails 61 and 62 on the front surface of the game board 13 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. At the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2), a return rubber 69 is attached at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center.

The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37A, 37A, 37A, including a plurality of LEDs that are light emitting means and a 7-segment display along the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 62 is provided on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 37B) is provided. The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. Be seen. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B), whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (upper first ball entrance 64b1, lower first ball entrance 64b2), It is configured to be used properly depending on whether or not the player has entered the second entrance 640. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, an upper first entrance 64b1 and a lower first entrance 64b2 are provided as a trigger for the lottery of the first special symbol. In the following description, when both the upper first ball entrance 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are shown, the term of the first ball entrance 64 is simply used.

Specifically, when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, by the LED, indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the positive change state, the time saving state, or the normal state by the lighting state, or the lighting state whether or not it is changing. By showing, the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot or a detached symbol, or a small hit symbol is indicated by a lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by a lighting state The 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds that have been hit and the error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured such that the respective LEDs have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the player enters a ball in either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is a big hit, also makes a determination of the big hit type. As the types of jackpots to be determined here, 15R certainty variation jackpots, 2R certainty variation jackpots, 15R hour short jackpots, and 2R hour shorter jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown. ..

Here, "15R probability variation jackpot", the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 15 rounds, high probability state of the special symbol, the transition to the probability variation state that is a high probability state of normal symbols (set) jackpot Yes, the “2R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to (sets) a probability variation state in which the maximum round number shifts to the high-probability state after the jackpot of two rounds. In addition, "15R short-time jackpot" is a low-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol, after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds, during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times). ) It is a jackpot to be set, and the "2R hour/hour jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum round number is set after the jackpot of two rounds and the hour-shortening state is set for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times). ..

Further, the "high probability state of the special symbol" is a state where the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, in other words, a state of the game in which it is easy to shift to the special game state. "High probability state of the ordinary symbol" is a state in which the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is increased, in other words, a state of the game in which the electric accessory 64a is easily opened.

In addition, the gaming state (probability change state, time saving state) in which the "normal probability state of the normal symbol" is set, not only the probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) increases, but also the lower first entrance 64b2. As the time for which the electric accessory 64a associated with is released, a long time is set as compared with the gaming state (latent probability state, normal state) in which the "normal symbol low probability state" is set. When the electric accessory 64a is in an open state (open state), a ball is moved to the lower first ball inlet 64b2 as compared to when the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to win the prize. Therefore, during the probability changing state or the time saving state, it becomes easier for a ball to win the lower first ball entrance 64b2, and the number of jackpot lottery operations can be increased.

Note that, during the probability changing state or the time saving state, the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first lower entrance 64b2 is not changed, or once in addition to changing the opening time. A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 64a opens due to a hit, compared to that in the normal state. Also, during the probability changing state or the time saving state, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory at the time and once when the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened At least one of the number of times 64a is opened may be changed. Further, during the probability changing state or the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened, and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened per hit are not changed, Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed so as to be higher than in the normal state.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the entry (starting prize) of the ball into either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. While synchronizing with the variable display, a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol), and a ball to the through gate 67 There is provided a second symbol display device (not shown) which is composed of LEDs for variably displaying the regular symbol (second symbol) by using passage as a trigger.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12 ), for example, upper, middle and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) is performed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first A decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the decorative third symbol is dynamically displayed so as to correspond to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and the dynamic of the third symbol. By configuring to notify the player of the display mode, the display mode during the dynamic display period is unified with respect to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) whose operation is controlled by the main controller 110 ( For example, even if the processing load of the main control device 110 is reduced by changing the blinking display mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated in units of 0.1 seconds, the movement of the third symbol set by the voice lamp control device 113. By dynamically setting the dynamic display mode based on the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol), it is possible to suggest to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (the first It is possible to display an effect mode using three symbols) on the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the regular symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. Moreover, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped with a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2 is attached. It is configured to be in an operating state (operating to an open state) for a predetermined time.

The time required for variable display of the second symbol is shorter in the high-probability state (probability change state, time saving state) of the normal symbol than in the low probability state (normal state, latent state) of the normal symbol as the game state. Is set. Thereby, during the high probability state of the normal symbol, since the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more than the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player more opportunities to open the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first entrance 64b2.

Therefore, during the probability changing state and the time saving state, it is possible to set a game state in which the ball is likely to win the lower first ball inlet 64b2. In the present embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 depending on whether the probability variation state is set as the game state or the time saving state is set. The same display mode is set as the background mode to be displayed in, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the current game state. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with enjoyment of inferring the current game situation.

Further, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of game states in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the same as the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display mode is set. Therefore, when the display modes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily ascertaining what the current game state is depending on the operating state of the electric accessory 64a. be able to.

In addition, during the probability changing state or the time saving state, by increasing the hit probability, by increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 64a per hit, by other methods, the lower second during the probability changing state or the time saving state. When it is in a state where the ball easily enters the 1 ball entrance 64b2, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is set to be shorter than the normal state during the probability changing state or the time saving state, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 64a per hit may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is attached to the game board in the right area (right area) of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured to allow a part of the balls flowing down the game board to pass through, out of the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second design holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are symmetrically arranged below the third design display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of retained balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, it is possible not to perform the lighting display by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be briefly described. In the first embodiment, normal state (low probability state of special symbol, and normal state of normal symbol), probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, and high probability state of normal symbol), time saving state (special Low probability state of the symbol, and high probability state of the normal symbol) and latent probability state (high-probability state of the special symbol, and normal state of the normal symbol) are provided four game states. The latent state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player.

That is, when the latent state is set, the variation time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol that tends to be a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is set to another game state. By prescribing it so that it is shorter than the case in which the lottery is performed, the lottery that is advantageous to the player can be most efficiently executed.

In the first embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, so in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first variable in a part of the deviation. The first specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (1.5 seconds×1 time, 0.2 seconds×6 times, or 0.06 seconds×8 times). Therefore, in the lottery for the second special symbol, even if the jackpot is not won, there are many opportunities to get the ball by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a, so that the first special symbol It has an advantage over the lottery. Hereinafter, for simplification of description, the missed lottery result in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened is referred to as a “small hit”.

In addition to the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened even when it is a small hit, so that the prize ball is in a latent state in which the variation time of the second special symbol is short. Can continue to increase. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be in the latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probability variation state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is more advantageous than the probability variation state, so that it is possible to provide a novel game property.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called, simultaneous). The variable method is adopted). As a result, even when the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing simultaneously, when one of them stops fluctuating with a big hit or a small hit stop symbol, the other fluctuation display shows the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with a stop pattern that is off. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the problem that the other variable display is confirmed and displayed as a hit or a small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the big hit and the small hit are overlapped and started.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2, various configurations provided in the game area in the first embodiment and the flow of the ball shot toward the game area will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the present embodiment is configured to divide the game area into a left side area and a right side area by the variable display device unit 80 arranged at the center of the game area. ..

In this embodiment, the fired ball does not pass through the foul ball prevention valve 68 until the operation handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (clockwise) from the initial position (the state where the player is not rotating). A sphere is fired at a firing strength of the order of magnitude. Therefore, the fired ball finally flows backward through the firing flow path formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 to become a foul ball. The foul ball that flows backward and flows down passes through the start position of the launch flow path (the lower left end portion of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2) and communicates with the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 1). (Not shown) is flowed down, and is refluxed to the upper plate 17. With this configuration, even if a foul ball occurs when the player operates the operation handle 51 in order to fire the ball with a desired firing strength, the foul ball remains in the launch path and the game is played. It is possible to prevent the trouble.

Next, when the operation amount (rotation amount) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (the state in which the player is not rotating), the ball is fired with a firing intensity that flows down the above-mentioned left side region. Then, in the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (81 degrees to 120 degrees which is the maximum rotation amount of the operation handle 51), the sphere is fired with a firing strength that allows it to flow down the above-mentioned right side region.

That is, the present embodiment is configured so that the region in which the ball flows down can be different based on the operation amount of the operation handle 51, that is, based on the operation of the player. Further, as will be described in detail later, in the first embodiment, when the game state that is advantageous to the player is set as the game state, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is set so that the ball flows down the left side area. Rather than a game performed by adjusting (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), a game performed by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right side region (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) is performed. Is configured as follows. With such a configuration, the player may keep the operation handle 51 rotated up to the upper limit (the state rotated by 120 degrees) while the game state that is advantageous to the player is set. Therefore, the player can easily play an appropriate game.

Next, the left side area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. Although the details will be described later, in the first embodiment, a normal state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol low probability state) as a game state, a time saving state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol high probability state), a probability variation state (Special symbol high probability state: normal symbol high probability state), latent probability state (special symbol high probability state: normal symbol low probability state) is configured to be set. Also, the jackpot gaming state that is executed when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and the small jackpot gaming state that is executed when the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, so that It is configured.

Among them, when the normal state, the time saving state, and the probability variation state are set as the game state, the variable display device unit 80 is caused to perform a left-handed game in which the ball flows down to the left side area of the game board 13. Using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 provided, the player is informed of the game method, and when the latent state is set, the right-handed game in which the ball flows down to the left side area of the game board 13. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player how to play the game. Further, during the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is configured to guide the player's game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) according to the game state before winning the hit.

As a guide method for each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, the game method suitable for the current game state is configured to be constantly displayed, or only after the game method is switched. It may be configured to display the game method. Further, of the left-handed game and the right-handed game, when a game method (left-handed game in the present embodiment) that is easily set for a long period is set as a normal game, and a game method other than the normal game (right-handed game) is performed It may be configured such that the game method is always displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the guide display is not displayed when the left-handed game is performed.

As in the present embodiment, when there are two types of game methods to be selected by the player, the other game method can be guided by not displaying the display mode for guiding one game method. That is, it is possible to guide a plurality of game methods depending on whether or not to display one display mode. In the present embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the game method to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. As described above, by not displaying the specific display mode, the player may be informed of the game method, or the player may be informed by using a voice or a lamp.

In the left side area of the game board 13, a through gate 67 and a general winning opening 63 are arranged. An upper first ball entrance 64b1 is provided below the variable display device unit 80 so that a ball that has flowed down the left side area can enter. A lower first ball inlet 64b2 provided with the electric accessory 64a is provided below the upper first ball inlet 64b1. This electric accessory 64a, when the ball is won in the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the ball enters the lower first inlet 64b2. It is configured to variably move from a closed state (first state) in which the ball is difficult (impossible) to an open state (second state) in which the ball can easily (possibly) enter the lower first ball inlet 64b2. ing.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) can be executed (the fluctuation of special figure 1 is not executed, and the big hit game and the small hit game are executed) When the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 in a state where it is not played), the lottery of the special figure 1 is executed. That is, the ball entering the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is a trigger for executing the lottery for the first special symbol.

In a state where the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1) cannot be newly executed (a variation in special figure 1 has already been executed, or a big jackpot game or a small jackpot game is being executed) When a ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2, it has a storage means for storing the right of the ball to enter, up to a predetermined number (four). ing.

Therefore, while the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is being executed, the player can continue to play the game, and thus the operation of the game can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, it is provided only in the storage unit and the first special symbol that stores the right that the ball enters.

About 80% of the balls flowing down the left side area by the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% of the balls that have been launched (8 balls per 100 balls) enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1. A spherical flow path is formed by a structure such as a plurality of nails and a windmill so as to be spherical. When the electric accessory 64a is closed, about 0% of the balls enter the lower first entrance 64b2, and when the electric accessory 64a is open, the lower first entrance The sphere flow path is formed so that the spheres entering 64b2 are about 25%. That is, it becomes difficult for the balls to enter in the order of the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (electrical accessory 64a open state), the upper first ball entrance 64b1, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (electrical accessory 64a closed state). It is configured to be.

As described above, the upper first entrance 64b1 and the lower first entrance 64b2 are configured to give a bonus ball to the player in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery for the first special symbol. Each time one ball is entered, four prize balls are paid out to the player. In the present embodiment, the same number (4) of prize balls is provided regardless of whether a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 or a lower first entrance 64b2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different number of prize balls may be set for each.

On the other hand, in the right area of the game board 13, a second ball entrance 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided. The second entry slot 640 is configured so that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by the entry of a ball, and a plurality of balls are provided so that about 50% of the balls flowing down the right side area enter. A ball passage is formed by the nail. Here, the balls that have not entered the second entrance 640 flow down toward the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right side area.

Although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, it is long as the time (variation time) from when the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed until the lottery result is displayed. A variation time of time (10 minutes) is set, and a short variation time (1 second) is set when the latent state is set.

In other words, when the normal state is set as the game state, the right-handed game is played rather than entering the ball into the first entrance 64 to execute the left-handed game and execute the lottery for the first special symbol. Performing the lottery for the second special symbol is easier to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 to execute the lottery, but since the variable time of a long time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is improved. It gets very bad. Therefore, the player will perform a left-handed game in a normal state and execute a lottery for the first special symbol.

In addition, since the second ball entrance 640 has one prize ball set, a right-handed game is performed in a state where the normal state is set, and a ball shot by the right-handed game at a rate of about 50%. Even if the ball is inserted into the second ball inlet 640, the number of balls does not increase.

Furthermore, when the time saving state or the probability variation state is set as the game state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the electric accessory 64a is easily opened. However, since the through gate 67, which is a trigger for the lottery of the ordinary symbol for opening the electric accessory 64a, is provided only in the left side area, the lower first entrance 64b2 in which the ball is easier to enter than in the normal state. The player is configured to play a left-handed game in order to enter the ball.

On the other hand, in the state in which the latent state is set as the game state, the normal symbol becomes a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a becomes difficult to open, and as described above, the variation time of the second special symbol is short. Since the variable time of (1 second) is set, it becomes an appropriate game to execute the right-handed game and execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to win the small hit (winning probability of about 1/2). When the small hit is won, the first variable winning device 65 is opened as a small hit game for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and 10 balls are paid for each ball entered in the first variable winning device 65. It is configured so that individual prize balls are awarded.

That is, when the latent state is set as the game state, by continuously executing the right-handed game to the player, the lottery of the second special symbol aiming to win the small hit, and the small hit game, Can be performed continuously.

As shown in FIG. 2, a second variable winning device 650 is arranged at the bottom of the game area. This second variable winning device 650, when the jackpot is won by the special symbol lottery, the swinging door 650f operates toward the front side, and the opening operation is performed so that the ball can be won in the second specific winning port 650a. Is done. The second variable winning device 650 is configured so that a ball that flows down in the left side area by a left-handed game and a ball that flows down in the right side area by a right-handed game can be evenly entered. Therefore, when the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, the game method before the jackpot game is executed may be continuously executed, and the game method for the player. Can be suppressed from being complicatedly changed.

When a ball enters the above-described first entrance 64 (upper first entrance 64b1, lower first entrance 64b2), a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 ) Is turned on, a jackpot lottery is made in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) due to the turning on of the first entrance opening switch, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A. Be done.

On the other hand, when a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which results from the turning on of the second entrance switch. In the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12), a big hit lottery is performed, and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Further, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize hole in which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and the second ball entrance 640 is a ball when a ball enters. It is one of the winning holes paid out as a prize ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the upper first entrance 64b1 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64. The same number (both four), and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (1), but the ball enters the upper first ball entrance 64b1. The number of prize balls to be paid out in this case may be different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

In this case, for example, the number of prize balls of the upper first entrance 64b1 is set to 4 and the number of prize balls of the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 2, and a normal state in which the balls are difficult to enter is set. In the case of being in the upper first ball entrance 64b1 to increase the privilege for entering the ball, if the specific game state (probability change state, time saving state) is set The player may not be allowed to excessively win the prize balls even if the balls frequently enter the first entrance port 64b2, or the number of prize balls in the upper first entrance port 64b1 is four and the lower first The number of prize balls in the ball entrance 64b2 may be set to five, and a large privilege may be given to the player when a particular game state (probably changed state, time saving state) is set.

In addition, the same number as the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second entrance 640 (for example, 5 Individual).

An electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first entrance 64b2. The electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (restricted state) so that a ball is difficult to enter the lower first entrance 64b2. There is. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol (lottery of the ordinary symbol) which is performed by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 64a is in an open state (allowable state), and the ball is in a state of easily entering the lower first ball inlet 64b2.

As described above, during the probability change state and the time saving state, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal state, and since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, the variable display of the second symbol is displayed. In, the symbol "○" is easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (permissible state) increases. Further, during the probability changing state or the time saving state, the time for which the electric accessory 64a is opened is longer than that during the normal state. Therefore, during the probability changing state or the time saving state, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily enter the lower first ball inlet 64b2 as compared with the normal state.

As described above, the lower first ball inlet 64b2, that is, the ball inlet associated with the electric accessory 64a is in a state (first state) in which the ball easily enters according to the set game state, It is possible to set a state in which the ball is difficult to enter (second state). That is, from the viewpoint of ease of ball entry, the first state is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state is a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player (disadvantageous than the first state). Becomes

Here, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed) and when the ball enters the second entrance 640 (lottery for the second special symbol) , And the probability of being a big jackpot is the same, and if the low probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery that is a big jackpot is executed with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280). If the high probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery that is a big hit with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to hit than the low probability state is executed. However, the type of jackpot that is selected (set) when it becomes a jackpot is set to be different between the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines to the player how to shoot a ball (playing method) according to the playing state of the pachinko machine, "left hitting (left hitting)" and "right hitting". Strike (right-handed game)" can be changed. Therefore, the player can be changed in how to hit the ball, and the game can be enjoyed.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The gaming board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won (win) balls in any of the winning openings (winning openings) 63, 64b1, 64b2, 65a, 640, 650a are shown through the out opening 66. Not guided to the ball discharge path. The outlet 66 is arranged below the lower first inlet 64b2. In the first embodiment, the game area has one outlet 66, but other configurations may be used, and two or more outlets 66 may be provided.

By providing a plurality of outlets 66 in this way, it is necessary to form a ball passage for finally concentrating the balls fired in the game area into one location (where the outlet 66 is provided). Since it disappears, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of arrangement of various devices that form the game area. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to provide an outlet for exclusive use of a ball flowing down in the left side region and an outlet for exclusive use of a ball flowing down in the right side region. Further, in the case of providing a plurality of outlets, it is preferable to provide a notifying means for notifying the player that the inlet is the outlet. As a result, it is possible to prevent the privilege from being given to the player even though the ball has entered the entrance (actually the exit) provided in the game area, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. be able to.

In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

In the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) in an unopenable manner (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, extending over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclines toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out the balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with the balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately dispensed by the dispensing device 133. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen.

The third design (decorative design dynamically displayed corresponding to the dynamic display of the first design) is composed of nine types of main designs with numbers "1" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers "1" to "9" on the rear symbol imitating various animals. Specifically, for example, a number "1" is attached to a rear pattern imitating an elephant, and a number "2" is attached to a rear pattern imitating a lion. In this way, by making the third symbol a display mode in which the rear symbols and the numbers are associated with each other, the display pattern of the rear symbols is displayed to the player even during the dynamic display of the third symbols ( Color, outline, size, etc.) is used to roughly grasp the type of the third symbol, and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the type of the third symbol is surely identified by identifying the number attached to the rear symbol. Can be grasped.

In the first embodiment, the combination of the rear symbol and the number forming the third symbol is not changed, but the combination of the rear symbol, the display mode and the number may be changed. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to display a lottery result different from the lottery result (type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed, and to the player. On the other hand, it is possible to provide a game that does not get tired. Further, the combination pattern of the rear symbol and the number as the third symbol, for example, by setting to be changed regularly according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the game state that is set, as the third symbol It is possible to improve the prediction accuracy of the game content based on the display mode (combination of the rear symbol and the numbers) displayed in a stopped state, and it is possible to provide the player with enjoyment to predict.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display ends. The jackpot is configured to occur later. On the other hand, in the case where the special symbol lottery result is out of alignment, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to win a small hit as a lottery result of the special symbol, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, the main symbol is a specific combination (for example, "341"). Will be stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the combination of the main symbols that are stopped and displayed is made different according to the lottery result of the special symbol so that the player can easily understand the lottery result, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, for example, the same main symbol may be stopped and displayed in the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit and in the case of a small hit.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and about 3/4 on the upper side is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. About 1/4 of the lower side is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, the upper, middle, and lower three symbol rows L1, L2, L3 are displayed. In each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol columns L1 to L3, and the symbol columns L1 to L3 are cyclically scrolled in the left-right direction (usually from right to left direction) and displayed in a variable manner. Is done. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and the lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in three rows of left, middle, and right for each of the symbol columns L1 to L3. The left vertical line, the middle vertical line, and the right vertical line of the main display area Dm are set as valid lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, a diagonal line to the lower right and a diagonal line to the upper right in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, the third symbol is stopped (fixed display) on the effective lines V1 to V5 in the order of the upper symbol row L1, the lower symbol row L3, and the middle symbol row L2. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period (1 second or more), whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot). It is possible to suppress oversight. If a combination of big hit symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is aligned on the activated lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a big hit.

In addition, when the combination of the stopped third symbols is a combination corresponding to the disengagement, and there is a holding ball, after a stop display for 1 second (fixed display), a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the holding ball. Is started. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, in the state where there is no holding ball, if the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second (confirmed display), the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. .. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), a demonstration effect (customer waiting demo screen) indicating that the game is not executed is displayed. ..

It is rare for a player to shoot a ball continuously for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), but there is no ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. Yes, in many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the player quits the game, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, when a new ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new entrance. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm. The sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64. In the present embodiment, the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37). In this case, the number of entered balls is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. The number of holding symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds allows the player to clearly recognize the number of holding balls whose variable display is currently held. In the present embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol is configured to be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not held and stored. Therefore, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 4A, the sub display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and the third display is dynamically displayed (variable display) in the main display area Dm. 4 (a) is executed during all game states, though the effect (variation effect) including is executed and the notice effect, the character and the number of reserved balls are displayed in the sub display area Ds. It is not necessary to form each area indicated by, for example, when the player is gazing at the effect for suggesting whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the display area of the sub display area Ds It may be configured to perform a powerful effect by reducing (erasing) and enlarging the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when the effect of changing the display mode of the pending symbols and the game guidance for explaining the game contents in the future are emphasized in the sub display area Ds and executed, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced, The display area Ds may be enlarged to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, an area for displaying the number of reserved symbols in the main display area Dm, or an area for executing a notice effect may be formed in accordance with a set game state or an effect mode being executed, or a sub effect. An area for executing the variable display of the third symbol may be provided in the display area Ds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4B, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of 9 main symbols and sub symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. Further, on the right side and the left side of the display area Dm, three main symbols and a part of the sub symbols are displayed in groups of three. These have shown the lottery result of the 1st special symbol in a normal state. Further, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper center portion of the main display region Dm. In this small area Dm1, variable display of three third symbols in a simple mode configured by only the numbers of "1" to "9" is executed. Even in this small area Dm1, the big hit is started by stopping and displaying the three third symbols composed of the same numbers. In addition, the third symbol showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler mode than the third symbol showing the lottery result of the first special symbol, which is basically in the normal state or the probability variation state. This is because the first special symbol lottery is executed, and the second special symbol lottery has almost no chance to be executed.

Therefore, the variation of the first special symbol that is mainly executed is configured to be displayed in a larger display area, thereby more clearly displaying the game result. In the following description, the variation display of the special symbol that is mainly executed in each gaming state (in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display of the first special symbol corresponds) is referred to as the main variation, and in each gaming state. The variation display of the special symbol that is rarely executed when the regular game method is performed (in the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation display of the second special symbol corresponds) is called a sub-variation.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the state where the probability variation state is set, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the long-term (maximum 10 minutes) The variation display (dynamic display) is executed, and the game state is changed from the probability variation state to the latent probability state at the timing when the variation display is started. Then, during the period in which the latent state is set (the period from the execution of the variation display that is a big hit to the end of the variation display and the start of the big hit game), the lottery for the second special symbol is performed. It is configured to execute a game aiming for a small hit. Therefore, when the latent state is set as the game state, the variable display of the second special symbol is the main variation, and the variable display of the first special symbol is the sub-variation.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the same number of reserve symbols as the bird's face is displayed as the number of reserve balls in the first symbol. At the start of the variable display based on the holding balls corresponding to each of the reserved symbols, an effect of entering the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1 is executed. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved ball has started. In the small area Ds1, the reserved design sometimes performs a special action or another character appears to give a notice effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and three times is reserved. It may be set to the number below or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, it may be configured such that the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can be held. Also, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the variable display effect of the third symbol in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the content of the variable display effect executed corresponding to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation situation of each special symbol. Here, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display) for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. ), and can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

And, in the state where the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols) is set, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, the high probability state of ordinary symbols Is shifted to a low probability state, and the game state is configured to shift from the probability changing state to the latent probability state. While this latent probability state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to be short, and therefore a lot of second special symbol lottery can be executed. It will be a possible period (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

In this embodiment, since it is configured to win the small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, during the period when the latent state is set as the game state, the small hit The small hit game that is executed when the player wins is frequently executed, and the game state is advantageous for the player who can obtain many prize balls (special state 2 advantageous state).

As described above, the period in which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 variation advantageous period) is during the variation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that is won in the probability variation state. Since it is (special map 1 jackpot variation), when the special map 2 advantageous state ends, the jackpot game is executed. In this way, since a plurality of states that are advantageous to the player (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot gaming state) are continuously set, various benefits can be continuously given to the player. You can

Further, in the present embodiment, if one of the special symbols (special map 2) is won as a small hit and the small hit game is executed, the variation of the other special symbol (special map 1) is interrupted (variation display period). Measurement is suspended), and when the small hit game is finished, the measurement of the suspended variable display period is restarted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variation advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hit game, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 variation advantageous period. It is possible to provide the player with a fixed special figure 2 variation advantageous period.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special symbol 1), the other special symbol (special symbol 2) which is changing, a stop display mode indicating a deviation It is configured to force stop. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where the small hit game is executed during the big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the variation of the other special symbol is changed according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (lottery result that can give the first benefit to the player), the variation of the other special symbol is that the lottery result is out. Stop display in the display mode shown, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (lottery result that can give a second privilege different from the first privilege to the player), fluctuation of the other special symbol Is stopped until the second bonus is given (until the small hit game is finished), and is restarted after the second bonus is given. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is out of alignment, the variation of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

With such a configuration, based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the lottery content of the other special symbol (lottery result, period until the lottery result is displayed) can be changed, and the player's A variety of game play can be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the control content for the other special symbol fluctuation is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of the lottery result which gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result which gives the privilege. Even if it does, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result will be out of order, the excessive privilege is suppressed from being given to the player, and the lottery result with less privilege than the jackpot game (small hit) In the case of, in order to prevent the bonus based on the lottery of the other special symbol from being given during the small hitting game, without changing the lottery result corresponding to the variation of the other special symbol being executed, the variable display It is possible to suspend only the measurement of the period.

Therefore, in a state in which a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2) are changing at the same time, the player is given the least advantageous bonus, and the most advantageous bonus given later is given. It is possible to suppress the situation that the player is not allowed to do so, and it is possible to prevent the situation that the player feels uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the game state, the short period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), It is configured so that a small hit game can be frequently executed. Then, the condition that the latent probability state is set as the game state, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the condition that the latent probability state ends is the first special symbol In the case where the big hit game is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the big hit, the big hit game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. The second game period is set. Therefore, the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period, which are advantageous to the player, can be continuously set, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9, display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot game state is set as the game state, the contents of the jackpot game are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, for example, the round of the jackpot game currently being executed. Round number display mode to show the number, acquisition amount display mode to show the number of balls acquired, type to suggest the type of jackpot game in execution (round number, game state set after the jackpot game) Suggestion display mode, the number of jackpots won in a period in which the normal state is not set as the game state (probably variable state, latent state, time saving state) is continuously set (so-called number of consecutive chan ) Etc. are displayed, the jackpot game display mode is displayed.

Then, at the timing when the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 5A), when the jackpot type this time is the jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) in which the probability variation state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, As shown in 6(a), an effect mode (chance zone mode) aiming at setting a latent probability state advantageous to the player is displayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6A, the display content of the jackpot game end screen (ending screen) will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the jackpot game end screen (ending screen). As shown in FIG. 6A, on the ending screen of the big hit game, a comment of “chance zone entry!!” indicating that the probability variation state is set after the end of the big hit game is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 displayed during the period in which the probability variation state or the latent probability state is set is displayed. This character 811 is configured so as not to appear (is not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the player plays the period during which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The game state is advantageous to (the game state more advantageous than the normal state).

With this configuration, the player can grasp the outline of the currently set game state by grasping whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen, so that the player can easily understand the game. Can be provided.

Further, a comment "Aim for RUSH!!" for the purpose of setting the latent state in the main display area Dm is displayed. Further, in the guide display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, the character "left hit" is displayed as a guide display mode for allowing the player to play a left hit game. This allows the player to easily understand that the left side game is aimed at the left side area when the probability variation state is set. In the present embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 that is opened during the jackpot game, both the ball launched by the left-handed game (the ball that has flowed down the left side area) and the ball launched by the right-handed game. , Which are arranged at the winning positions (downstream position of the game area (see FIG. 2)) and displayed in the guide display area Dm3 during the big hit game (“left hit”, “right hit”), that is, The game method to be guided during the big hit game is configured to be variable according to the game state before the big hit game is executed.

Specifically, if you determine the game state when you win the jackpot, if it is determined that the left-handed game is the game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state), as a big hit guidance display When "left hit" is displayed and it is determined that the right hit game is being guided (latent state), "right hit" is displayed as a big hit guide display. Thereby, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to save the player from having to change the game method.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the special symbol 1 display area Dm1 for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, the special symbol 2 display area for displaying the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Dm2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6A, "777" is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (the ending screen is displayed). It is displayed. In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, "-" is displayed as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not variably displayed.

In the present embodiment, when the special symbol has not been variably displayed even after the power is turned on, the non-variable display mode described above is displayed. By displaying this non-fluctuation display mode, it becomes possible for the player to predict the past game history (variation history of special symbols).

Although the present embodiment is configured to display the above-described non-variable display mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and is configured to display a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) indicating a deviation. Alternatively, when it is determined that the elapsed time since the previous variable display was executed exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes), the display displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 The mode may be changed and displayed in the initial display mode and the non-variable display mode.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In the state where the probability variation state is set as the game state (see FIG. 5(b)), it becomes a game state in which the lottery for the first special symbol is easily executed by the left-handed game. In other words, the probability variation state is a state in which the high probability state of a normal symbol is set, so that the electric accessory 64a is easily opened, and a ball is easily entered into the lower first entrance 64b2.

The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the probability changing state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content of the display screen during the probability change state. As shown in FIG. 6B, a comment “in the chance zone” indicating that the current game state is the probability change state is displayed in the sub display area Ds so as to scroll horizontally (from right to left). It

Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect of moving (running) the character 811 in the lateral direction (from left to right) is displayed. Then, "left hitting" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3, and a changing display indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. At this point in time, the second special symbol is not newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 6(a) (because the ball is not inserted into the second ball entrance 640 by the right-handed game). The non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

Although a detailed description is omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a plurality of motion display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the probability changing state, and the lottery result (winning/absence determination result) of the first special symbol in the probability changing state is stored. Accordingly, the motion display pattern of the character 811 is set differently. As a result, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of allowing the player to predict whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol will win the jackpot during the probability changing state.

After the display screen shown in FIG. 6(b) is displayed, when the variable display for showing that the lottery result of the first special symbol is won in the jackpot is executed, the display shown in FIG. 7(a) is displayed. The screen is displayed. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram showing the display content displayed when the variation display in which the jackpot is won in the probability variation state is started. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state transitions from the probability variation state to the latent probability state at the timing when the variation display indicating that the first special symbol is won in the probability variation state is started. Is configured as follows.

Therefore, at the timing when the variation of the first special symbol starts, the game state shifts to a state advantageous to the player (latent probability state), and thus the variation of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen. In the state where the variable display mode indicating that the display is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect design 813 (the display mode of "333") for indicating to the player that the game state has shifted is stopped and displayed. To be done. As a result, the player can be made to think that the game state has shifted from the probability changing state to the latent probability state because the effect symbol 813 is stopped and displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, since the same display mode as the display mode of the third symbol is used as the effect symbol display mode, the effect symbol display mode stopped and displayed is a display for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be thought of as an aspect.

The present embodiment is configured such that a large number of small hit games can be executed by frequently performing the variable display of the second special symbol during the period when the latent probability state is set. Therefore, at least during the period when the latent probability state is set, “right hit” for showing the player a right hit game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "RUSH rush!! Right hit right" is displayed to show that the latent state is set as the game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect symbol displayed in the main display area Dm is stopped and displayed without changing the effect mode of the special figure 1 display area Dm1 at the start of the variation of the first special symbol that is won in the jackpot. Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to make the player think that the game state has shifted according to the lottery result of the effect design.

Then, during the latent probability state that the right-handed game is continuously executed (during the big hit of the first special symbol), if the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is shown in FIG. 7(b). As described above, an effect mode for displaying that the small hit has been won is displayed. Here, the display content when the latent state is set will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content of the display screen during the latent state.

According to FIG. 7(b), in the state where the latent state is set (during RUSH), if the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first special symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. The variable display mode for suggesting that is being changed (the big hit is being changed) is displayed, and the display mode “341” indicating that the small hit is won is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. ..

Then, the treasure box 812 displayed as an effect mode during RUSH is opened, and "V" for indicating a small hit is displayed as an effect symbol 813 for indicating the game result from the inside. This allows the player to win the small hit in the second special symbol during the latent state (during RUSH) and notify the player that the small hit game is executed.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 that is rotated when a small win is won is provided in the right side area, and a game can be played by the same game method (right hitting) as in the latent probability state. Is configured as follows. With such a configuration, even if the small hitting game is frequently executed during the latent state, the player only needs to continue the right-handed game, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. it can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent state is set from the time of the jackpot variation start, and the latent state In the state in which is set, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time when the latent probability state is set (based on the set latent potential state), the player is informed of the period during which the latent probability state is set (FIG. 7(a)). ))reference.

However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the first special symbol is also the second symbol. Both special symbols may change.

In such a case, even if a display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set is displayed at the timing when the latent state is set (see FIG. 7A), the second currently changing Until the special symbol stops changing, the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed during the latent state, and the problem that the small hit game is not executed irrespective of the RUSH state occurs. I was afraid.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability variation state), the variation situation of the second special symbol (whether or not there is variation, The remaining fluctuation period) is discriminated, and the timing of notifying that the RUSH state has been set is varied based on the discrimination result.

Here, with reference to FIG. 5 and FIG. 8, when the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability variation state), the second special symbol ( The effect contents when the special figure 2) changes will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, when the second special symbol is changing at the time when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started in the state where the probability variation state is set (see (c) of FIG. 5), the certain variation A "super chance zone" with a higher degree of expectation that the RUSH state is set is displayed rather than the "chance zone" for indicating the state.

Here, the display content of the display screen in the “super chance zone” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8(a) is a diagram in the case where the variation winning the big hit in the first special symbol is executed during the second special symbol variation in the probability variation state. That is, this "super chance zone" is a state in which the latent state is set as the game state, but the variable display of the second special symbol executed before the latent state is set is displayed. It is a display mode showing a state where it has not ended.

When the "super chance zone" is set, a comment indicating that the "super chance zone is in progress" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. Then, the character 811 is displayed in the main display area Dm in a mode in which the character 811 is moving faster than in FIG. 6B, and the character 811 moving at a high speed is configured to easily find the treasure box 812.

Then, in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, the "variable display mode" for indicating that the first special symbol is changing is displayed, and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the latent state is set. The “variable display mode” that is changing from a time point earlier than that is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The display screen of the "super chance zone" shown in FIG. 8(a) is displayed until the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation executed across the timing of shifting the game state from the probability changing state to the latent probability state ends. When the change in the special figure 2 ends (see FIG. 5D), a “RUSH” rush screen is displayed to inform the player that the player has rushed into “RUSH” (see FIG. 8B).

Here, with reference to FIG. 8B, the contents of the screen that enters the “RUSH” via the “super chance zone” will be described. FIG. 8B is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen that enters “RUSH” via the “super chance zone”. As shown in FIG. 8B, in the main display area Dm, the effect symbol 813 is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a display mode is displayed to notify the player that the player has entered “RUSH”. Then, "right hit" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to guide the game method during the rush game. At this point, the special display 1 display area Dm1 displays a variation display mode for suggesting that the first special symbol is changing (big hit variation), and the special drawing 2 display area Dm2 indicates a deviation. The display mode "346" is stopped and displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. During the rush game (during RUSH), that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, a game in which a lottery for the second special symbol in which a variation pattern with a short variation time is set by performing a right-handing game is frequently performed is performed. Is executed. In addition, although a detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, in a state where one of the special symbols has been won as a jackpot (including during a jackpot variation), the jackpot can be won by a lottery of the other special symbol. It is configured to not exist. Therefore, in the lottery for the second special symbol during the rush game, the lottery result is either a small hit or a miss. Then, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to win the small hit with a high probability (about 1/2).

Therefore, during the rush game, the small hit is won with a probability of 1/2, and the game of winning the prize ball by the small hit game continues until the big hit variation of the first special symbol ends. That is, even if the lottery for the second special symbol is frequently executed during the rush game, the jackpot is not won by the lottery for the second special symbol, so the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol is fully used. Rush games can be provided.

Then, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is finished (see FIG. 5(f)), a screen corresponding to the jackpot type selected this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9(a) and (b)). Here, the display screen at the end of the rush game (when the special jackpot jackpot fluctuation stop) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9(a) and 9(b).

FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing the display content when a big hit (big hit A (see FIG. 16A)) that is advantageous to the player is set, and FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing display contents when a jackpot (jackpot D (see FIG. 16A)) that is disadvantageous to the player is won.

As shown in FIG. 9A, at the timing when the third symbol (“777”) for indicating that the jackpot A (see FIG. 16A) is won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, an effect symbol 813 (“super V”) indicating that the jackpot advantageous to the player has been won from the treasure box 812 is displayed, and a comment of “Congratulations” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this case, in the guidance display area Dm3, the character "Right hit", which is the same playing method as in the latent probability state, is displayed.

On the other hand, in FIG. 9(b), at the timing when the third symbol (“666”) for indicating that the jackpot D (see FIG. 16(a)) has been won is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol "346" indicating the deviation is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, the effect design 813 (“End?”) indicating that the player has been awarded a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player from the treasure box 812 is displayed, and the comment “Please return to the left” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. To be done. In this case, in order to suggest to the player that the rush game has ended, the guide display area Dm3 displays the characters "left hit" which is the same game method as in the normal state.

In addition, in FIG. 9B, the display screen when the jackpot D (see FIG. 16A) is won is shown, but when the jackpot C (see FIG. 16A) is won, that is, the jackpot D The same jackpot game is executed, but if the gaming state set after the jackpot win is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot D, a similar display screen is displayed, and when the jackpot game ends, it is restored. As an effect, it is configured to execute an effect that causes a right-handed game. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a card forgetting alert screen displayed to the player will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (value medium) into a card unit installed along with the pachinko machine 10 in order to rent a ball used for a game. In such a pachinko machine 10, when a player wins a large number of prize balls through a game, he or she forgets that the card is inserted in the card unit and sometimes forgets to take the card at the end of the game. There was something to do.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting attention screen (see FIG. 10A) is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, during a jackpot game in which a prize ball can be obtained). This can prevent the player from forgetting to take the card. Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set a jackpot which is easy to win a prize ball as a jackpot game and a jackpot which is hard to win a prize ball. Furthermore, it is possible to set a gaming state in which a jackpot game can be frequently executed in a short period of time. Therefore, the timing for displaying the card forgetting attention screen can be set according to the game result (accumulation of the number of prize balls in a predetermined period).

Here, the display content of the card forgetting alert screen will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content of the card forgetting alert screen. In this way, the operation of removing the card from the card unit is displayed using the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10, and the comment "Please be careful not to remove the card" is displayed. ..

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10B to 10D, the display timing of the card forgetting attention screen will be described. FIG. 10(b) shows that the first big hit is "big hit A (see FIG. 16(a))", that is, the big hit that can give many prize balls to the player in one big hit game. FIG. 10C is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting alert display). In FIG. 10C and FIG. 10D, the first big hit is “big hit A (see FIG. 16A)”. That is, it is a timing chart showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting caution display) when the player wins the jackpot which can give a lot of prize balls to the player in one jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), when the first big hit (the big hit won when the normal state is set as the game state) is the big hit A, a sufficient number of award balls is given in the big hit. Since it is given, the card display is executed during the ending period (ED) of the jackpot.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10(c) and 10(d), when the first big hit is the big hit C, it is not possible to give a sufficient number of prize balls in the big hit, and the player is Since there is a possibility of continuing to rent a ball using a card, the card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first big hit (big hit C).

In such a state, in the present embodiment, the period from the first big hit until the normal state is set again is the advantageous continuation period, the number of prize balls obtained during the advantageous continuation period is accumulated, and the accumulated result is The card display is executed under the condition that a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) is reached, as the card display execution condition.

In other words, when the small hit game occurs continuously after the big hit C ends and the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, the card is displayed on the ending screen of the small hit game. (See FIG. 10(c)) When the jackpot C is repeatedly executed and the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuation period exceeds a predetermined amount, a card is displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. (See FIG. 10D).

<Regarding the transition of the game state in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of shifting from one gaming state to another gaming state for the four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment.

First, a method of transitioning to the gaming state when staying in the normal state will be described. As described above, in the normal state, the frequency of special symbol lottery tends to be higher in the case of playing the game left-handed than in the game right-handed, and thus left-handed is more advantageous to the player. This is because when left-handed hitting, it becomes easier to enter the upper first entrance 64b1. In addition, as described above, in the lottery of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64, since the small hit is not drawn, the held ball is endless unless it becomes a big hit. It is in a disadvantageous state where it continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state only when a big hit is achieved. Four types of jackpots A to D are provided as jackpot types that can be won in the first special symbol lottery. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG.

As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, when the jackpots A and C are determined at a total of 65% when the jackpot is the jackpot in the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, after the jackpot is over, the center of FIG. The state changes to the probability change state ST2 shown in. In addition, when the jackpot D is determined at a rate of 10% when the jackpot in the first special symbol in the normal state ST1 is a jackpot, after the jackpot, it shifts to the time saving state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. 11. .. On the other hand, when the jackpot B is determined at a rate of 25% when the jackpot is the jackpot in the first special symbol, the normal state is set again as the game state after the jackpot is over (the normal state is looped. To).

In the normal state, it is normal to play the game by aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by left-handing, but the player intentionally hits right and the ball enters the second entrance 640. Or, as a result of a part of the ball left-handed entering the second ball entrance 640, there is a possibility that it will be a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, there are three kinds of jackpot types (jackets E to G) as jackpot types set when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is won in the normal state. When the jackpots E and F determined by the total of 65% of the cases become the jackpot change state ST2 after the jackpot ends, when the jackpot G is determined by the ratio of 35%, the normal state as the game state after the jackpot ends. Is set again (looping the normal state).

In this way, in the normal state, when a big hit by lottery of the first special symbol, there is a possibility of shifting to a time saving state which is more advantageous than the normal state at a rate of 10% (big hit D), In the normal state, if the big prize is drawn by the second special symbol lottery, the possibility of shifting to the time saving state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit in the case of performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by performing the right strike in the normal state, so that the irregular game can be suppressed. Also, in the lottery of the second special symbol executed in the normal state, because the variation pattern having a long time (10 minutes) variation time is configured, when the gaming efficiency is left-handed game Since it is significantly reduced compared to, it is possible to further increase the demerit in the case of performing an irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by performing a right hit in the normal state.

Next, a method of transitioning to the gaming state when staying in the probability changing state will be described. As described above, in the probability change state, as in the normal state, the left-handed game is more advantageous to the player because the left-handed game is easier to play than the right-handed game. Becomes In the probability variation state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is higher than in the normal state, which is advantageous as compared with the normal state, but disadvantageous as compared with the latent state. When the probability variation state ST2 is set, the transition to the latent probability state SP1 is triggered by the fact that the big hit of the first special symbol is won (the special figure 1 big hit variation starts).

In the probability changing state, while aiming at the upper first entrance 64b1 by left-handing as in the normal state, the game is aimed at the lower first entrance 64b2 provided below the upper first entrance 64b1. Will be done. That is, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set during the probability variation state, the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is easily opened. Therefore, the game state becomes easier to execute the first special symbol lottery than the normal state.

In the probability variation state configured in this way, usually, the left-handed game is performed and the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, but the ball enters the second entrance 640 to enter the second special symbol. There is also the possibility of a big win in the lottery. In this case, when the jackpots E and F, which are determined at a total of 65% in the case of winning the jackpot of the second special symbol, are set, the probability variation state ST2 is set again after the jackpot is finished, and it is determined at a percentage of 35%. When the big hit G is reached, a time saving state is set as the game state after the big hit ends.

That is, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in the probability changing state, it is possible to shift to the latent probability state that is most advantageous to the player, while the second special symbol lottery is executed. In that case, the possibility of shifting to the latent state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the demerit in the case of performing the irregular game method of executing the lottery of the second special symbol by performing a right-handed strike in the probability variation state, so that the irregular game can be suppressed.

Next, a method of transitioning to the gaming state when staying in the latent state will be described. As described above, in the latent probability state, unlike the normal state and the probability variation state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so by performing a game by right-handing, the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently performed. .. Therefore, the right hitting is more advantageous to the player than the left hitting.

In the present embodiment, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is won in the state where the probability variation state is set (first transition condition), and if the jackpot C is won in the state where the probability variation state and the time saving state are set There are two transition conditions (second transition condition), and when the first transition condition is satisfied, the pre-stage when the jackpot game is started, that is, the latent state during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol If the second transition condition is set, the latent state is set after the jackpot game is over.

With this configuration, the timing at which the gaming state (latent probability state) that is most advantageous to the player is set can be set before or after the jackpot game, so that the player can play various games. Sex can be provided.

Furthermore, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the period in which the latent probability state is set becomes the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, so the period in which the latent probability state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily create an effect to be executed during the latent probability state in advance (at the time of setting the latent probability state) according to the period in which the latent state is set.

In addition, when the jackpot C is won by the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state can be set both before and after the jackpot game, so to the player It is possible to provide a surprising gameplay.

Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device by the MPU 201. To execute.

Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer when the power is cut off (including the occurrence of a power failure; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65 are provided. As a shaft, a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the right side, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, etc. is connected, and the MPU 201 inputs various commands to these via an input/output port 205. Send a control signal.

The input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including the slide position detecting sensor S and the rotational position detecting sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a computing device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O, and the like are stored in a work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. .. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and a ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225. The other device 228 includes drive motors 420, 530, and 630.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.) is used to notify the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the contents of the effect at that time. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image according to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, a voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the displayed contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, such as a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 V supplied from the outside, and a voltage of 12 V for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout controller 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power cut, power cut) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 21. First, the details of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

In the main controller 110, main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device (not shown). To execute. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are jackpot lottery, setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device, etc. in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. used.

To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery, and the selection of the jackpot type (jackpot symbol) There are used a first hit type counter C2 used for, a change type counter CS1 used for selecting a change pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first hit random number counter C1. The second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second random number counter C4. The small hit type counter C5 is used to select the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31 ), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52 ). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and a counter for entering a ball for the second ball entrance 640. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which a value is stored is provided. In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 is provided with up to four holding balls. Therefore, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable display, or when the special symbol can be drawn by lottery for the special symbol such as when the special symbol jackpot is not being played, each counter value is entered when the ball enters the first entrance 64. It is stored in the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a, and when the sphere enters the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. Then, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic. Various settings for display) and control processing are executed. In addition, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

On the other hand, during the period during which the lottery of the first special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball wins the first ball entrance 64. Moreover, when the number of reserved balls of the first ball entrance 64 is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. To be done. Further, when the number of holdings for the first ball entrance 64 is equal to or more than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment), each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (four in the present embodiment) Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player. In addition, during the period during which the lottery of the second special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the ball enters the second entrance 640. In this case, only the prize balls (two prize balls in this embodiment) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player without acquiring the respective counter values.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is four with respect to the first ball inlet 64, but is not limited to this, and may be less than four (for example, three), There may be more than four (eg, eight). Further, the upper limit may not be set. Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the entry (variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) to the second entry port 640 is not held, but it is possible to hold the storage as in the case of the first entry port 64. You may comprise.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 479). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is stored in the first special symbol storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing. Then, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the first per random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the per first random number counter C1. When the value matches the value of the random number which is the big hit defined in the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as the big hit of the special symbol. In addition, the value of the random number that is a small hit for the special symbol is defined in the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), in the case of a low probability state of a special symbol as a game state (normal state, time saving state), in the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol. Then, it is determined whether the obtained value of the first random number counter C1 is "7, 8", and if it is "7, 8", it is determined that it is a big hit.

Also, in the case of a high probability state of the special symbol as the game state (probability change state, latent probability state), the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is determined whether or not it is in the range of "0 to 5", and if it is in the range of "0 to 5," it is determined that it is a big hit. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, out of the total of 480 random number counters, in the low probability state of the special symbol, two values are defined as the value for determining the big hit, so the low probability state of the special symbol. The jackpot probability at time is 1/240. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/80.

Next, the small hit random number table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit is set in a lottery for special symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(b), in the lottery for the first special symbol, the random number value for the small win is not defined. That is, the first special symbol lottery does not result in a small hit. On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is within the range of “212 to 432” regardless of the game state, and the range of “212 to 432”. If it is within the range, it is determined to be a small hit.

Here, the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, or the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that is a small hit, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the time of the small hit of the special symbol.

On the other hand, the execution area of the first special symbol reservation sphere storage area 203a, or the value of the first per random number counter C1 stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b, if the random number to be a jackpot of the special symbol, the The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the 1 symbol display device 37 is the special symbol big hit time. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values for the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit for the special symbol, and the random number value “7, 8” is the first hit as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. In this way, while the total number of random number values is 480, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 2, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is “1/240”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol is 4, and the random number value "0 to 5" is the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. In this way, while the total number of random number values is 480, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 6, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/80".

Further, as described above, there are 221 values for the first winning random number counter C1 that is a small hit in the lottery for the second special symbol, and the random number values “212 to 432” are stored in the small hit random number table 202b. ing. In this way, while the total number of random number values is 480, the total number of random number values to be a small hit is 221, so the probability of being a small prize to a special symbol is "221/480" (about 46%).

Returning to FIG. 13, the description will be continued. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A). Becomes Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the special symbol lottery result is a small hit, based on the value of the small hit type counter and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)), the small hit type (small hit A ~C) will be selected. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided inside.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 202f defines a plurality of data tables for selecting fluctuation patterns (see FIGS. 17 to 19). In this variation pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variation pattern selection tables according to the gaming state are set, and a variation pattern selection table is set for each win/no determination result for each. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 232, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 232). In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting opening (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of storing and is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the design is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number defined as the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined as a normal symbol (second symbol). Details of the second random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 15C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In this second random number table 202c, in the low probability state of the normal symbol as a game state (during the normal state, during the latent state), there are 11 random number values for the normal symbol, and the range is "0-10. It has become. Since the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random number values to be won is 11, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is “11/233”.

On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (probability change state, during the time saving state), there are 232 random number values that are the hits of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". Since the total number of random number values that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random number values to be won is 232, so the probability of winning a normal symbol is “232/233”. As described above, in the present embodiment, the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is configured so that a difference of about 20 times is provided between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol. There is. In addition, the variation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 in the case of hitting the ordinary symbol are also high with respect to the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. It is configured such that the probability state is more advantageous (a ball can be easily inserted into the lower first ball entrance 64b2).

When the ball passes through the normal starting opening 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the obtained second hit random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 10", it is determined to be a hit, and the variable display on the second symbol display device is ended. After that, as a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened only for “1 second×2 times”. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, if the value of the acquired second hit random number counter C4 is in the range of “0 to 231”, it is determined to be a hit, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. After that, as a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the lower first entrance 64b2 is opened only for “1 second×2 times”. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary electric accessory opening time and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed within a range that does not impair the playability.

The universal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 198 in sequence and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Ordinary symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, when the sphere passes, based on the value of this universal symbol variation type counter CS2, the general pattern variation pattern table 202g for selecting the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol (see FIG. 20) ) Is defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Details of the universal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 198), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 20. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to this embodiment. In addition to the first random number table 202a, the small hit random number table 202b, and the second random number table 202c already described above, the ROM 202 has a big hit type selection table 202d, a small hit type selection table 202e, and a variation pattern selection. At least a table 202f and a universal figure variation pattern table 202g are provided.

First, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is , Is defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the big hit type selection table 202d, and the first hit. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 16A, with respect to the first special symbol (special diagram 1), "big hit A" is associated with the range of the value 0 to 24 of the first hit type counter C2. It is regulated by This "big hit A" has 15 rounds, and a big hit game for opening the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit A" is 25, so "big hit A" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

When "big hit A" is selected, the probability variation state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the gaming state when the jackpot is won. It is set (the value of 10000 is set in the hour/hour counter 203f). That is, after the "big hit A" ends, the probability variation state is set until the next big hit is won.

Since "big hit A" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Moreover, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, a gaming state in which a more advantageous game can be performed than in the normal state is achieved. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is more likely to be given a more advantageous privilege to the player than the probability changed state. The game state is advantageous to.

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “25 to 49”, “big hit B” is associated and defined. This “big hit B” is the same big hit game as the above “big hit A” is executed, the number of rounds is 15, and the big hit that opens the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650). The game is set. After the "big hit B" ends, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF, and the time saving counter 203f is set to a different value according to the gaming state at the time of winning.

When the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is a normal state, a value of “0” is set to the hour/hour counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the hour/short state or the probability variation state, the hour/hour counter 203f is displayed. A value of "100" is set. That is, when the "big hit B" is won in the state where the normal state is set, the normal state is set after the big hit ends, whereas when the "big hit B" is won during the time saving state , After the big hit, the time saving state (100 times) is set. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit B” is 25, so when the big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol, the “big hit B” is determined. The ratio is 25% (25/100).

Like “big hit A”, “big hit B” is one of the biggest hit types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won, but the high probability state of special symbols is not set after the big hit ends. , Is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "jackpot A".

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 89”, “big hit C” is associated and defined. This "big hit C" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is also opened in the small hit game executed when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is configured such that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the case where the "big hit C" is won and the case where the "small win" is won.

With this configuration, when the hit game in which the first attacker is released is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the big hit game or the small hit game has been executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, during the jackpot variation period of the first special symbol, it is configured such that it is in the latent probability state (RUSH state) in which the small hit game can be executed frequently, so the player is One attacker will be released while expecting that the winning game is a small hitting game. That is, by providing a game period in which the player does not desire the situation in which the jackpot game that the player most desires is executed, it is possible to provide a novel game property.

After the "big hit C" is finished, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, and the time saving counter 203f is set to a different value according to the gaming state at the time of winning. When the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal state, a value of "10000" is set in the hour/hour counter 203f, and when the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the hour/short state or the probability variation state, the hour/hour counter 203f is displayed. A value of "0" is set. In other words, if you win "big jackpot C" while the normal state is set, you can win "big jackpot C" while the jackpot is set after the big hit ends In this case, the latent state is set after the jackpot is over.

In this way, in the gaming state when the jackpot is won, even if the jackpots of the same type are configured, the gaming state set after the jackpot is different, so that the player simply aims to win the jackpot. It is possible not only to pay attention to the game state that has been set, but also to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in this embodiment, when the latent probability state is set as the game state, it is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player, and the probability change state is set as the condition for setting the latent state. There are two first setting conditions that the big hit variation of the special symbol starts in the state where is set, and the second setting condition that wins the big jackpot C in the state where the probability variation state and the time saving state are set. doing. That is, the expectation (probability) of setting the latent probability state is made different according to the game state when the jackpot is won. With this configuration, it is possible to gradually increase the degree of expectation that the player will set a game state that is advantageous to the player according to the progress of the game (according to the set game state). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit C" is 40, so "big hit C" is determined when it is a big hit in the lottery for the first special symbol. The ratio is 40% (40/100). The “big hit C” is one of the big hit types that has a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the “big hit A” and “big hit B” described above, and thus is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. However, depending on the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, it is the only jackpot type that can set the latent state that is most advantageous to the player as the game state set after the jackpot is set, so it is set after the jackpot In terms of gaming, it is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, “big hit D” is associated and defined. This "big hit D" has two rounds, and a big hit game (same as "big hit C") for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set.

After the “big hit D” ends, the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF and the time saving counter 203f is set to the value “0”. That is, when the "big hit C" is won, the normal state is set after the big hit ends. Since this "big hit D" has the same big hit game content as the above "big hit C", the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same opening operation as the small hit game. ing.

Since the normal state is set as described above after the "big hit D" is ended, the fluctuation display (big hit change) won in the "big hit D" is set in the state where the probability variation state is set. When it is executed, after the small hit game is frequently played during the big hit change, the big hit game is executed, and then the normal state is set.

In other words, in the latent probability state (RUSH state) when the "big hit D" is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the normal state is set after the "big hit D" in which the same opening operation as the small hit game is set. Is set, it is possible to make the player think that the latent state in which the jackpot game is executed has ended.

Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit D" is 10, so "big hit D" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery for the first special symbol. The ratio is 10% (10/100). The “big hit D” is one of the big hit types that has a smaller number of rounds and a shorter opening operation period than the “big hit A” and “big hit B” described above, and thus is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Becomes And, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the normal state is set after the jackpot, which is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state set after the jackpot. That is, it is the most unfavorable jackpot type.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has four jackpot types (“jackpot A” to “jackpot D”) as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). There is. Among them, in the two jackpot types (“jackpot A” and “jackpot B”), a jackpot game in which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) that is opened only during the jackpot game is opened is executed, In the other two jackpot types (“jackpot C” and “jackpot D”), a jackpot game is executed in which the same first attacker (first variable winning device 65) as the jackpot game is opened.

That is, in the first embodiment, as a jackpot of a special symbol, a main jackpot game (“jackpot A”, “jackpot B”) for the purpose of causing a player to win a prize ball, and varying the gaming state. And a big jackpot game (“big jackpot C”) for the purpose of making it difficult to know whether or not the player has won the jackpot (it is difficult to determine whether the jackpot game is a jackpot game) "Big hit D") and are configured to be executable.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to win a large amount of prize balls during the big hit game because the game is a game that allows the player to win prize balls not by the big hit game but by the small hit game. Also, depending on the type of jackpot, even if a jackpot game that only a small amount of prize balls can be played is executed, a jackpot game aiming to change the gaming state while suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable Can be set.

On the other hand, as a type of big hit by lottery of the second special symbol, "big hit E" is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being "0 to 4". The number of rounds of this "big hit E" is 15, and the big hit game for opening the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is a "big hit E" is 5, so "big hit E" is determined when a big hit is made in the lottery for the second special symbol. The ratio is 5% (5/100).

When "big hit E" is selected, the probability variation state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the gaming state when the jackpot is won. It is set (the value of 10000 is set in the hour/hour counter 203f). That is, after the "big hit E" ends, the probability variation state is set until the next big hit is won.

Since “big hit E” is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Moreover, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, a gaming state in which a more advantageous game can be performed than in the normal state is achieved. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is more likely to be given a more advantageous privilege to the player than the probability changed state. The game state is advantageous to.

In the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "5 to 64", "big hit F" is associated and defined. This "big hit F" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Among the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the “big hit F” is 60, so when the big hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, the “big hit F” is determined. The ratio is 60% (60/100).

When "big hit F" is selected, the probability variation state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON) regardless of the gaming state when the jackpot is won. It is set (the value of 10000 is set in the hour/hour counter 203f). That is, after the "big hit F" ends, the probability variation state is set until the next big hit is won.

Since "big hit F" is one of the big hit types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Moreover, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol are set to be higher than in the normal state, a gaming state in which a more advantageous game can be performed than in the normal state is achieved. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the latent state is more likely to be given a more advantageous privilege to the player than the probability changed state. The game state is advantageous to.

"Big hit G" is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "65 to 99". This "big hit G" has two rounds, and a big hit game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit G" is 35, so "big hit G" is determined when it is a big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. The ratio is 35% (35/100).

When "big hit G" is selected, the normal state is set at the end of the big hit (the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF) regardless of the gaming state when the big hit is won, and the number of times of saving 0 times is reduced. It is set (a value of 0 is set in the time saving counter 203f).

Since "big hit G" is one of the big hit types with the smallest number of rounds, it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained. Further, since the gaming state set after the jackpot is the normal state, it is also disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state set after the jackpot. That is, it is the most unfavorable jackpot type.

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) and when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2). And, the point that the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot is 65% (65/100) is the same, but 15 rounds are set as a jackpot game (50% for special figure 1) , Toku-zu 2 is 5%), the rate at which the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is selected as the opening target (Toku-zu 1 is 50%, Toku-zu 2 is 5%), the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning Is a time saving state, a probability change state (that is, a high probability state of a normal symbol), the rate at which the value of 10000 is set to the hour saving counter 203f after the jackpot is finished (25% for Toku-zu 1 and 65% for Toku-zu 2) Are configured to be different.

In this way, by changing the jackpot game content and the game state after the jackpot is finished according to the type of the special symbol that is won for the jackpot, it is possible to provide various game characteristics to the player, The interest can be improved.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the above-described contents are configured to be different depending on the type of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of the above-described contents may be configured to be different. Good, other than the contents described above, for example, the number of rounds of jackpot games can be set differently by setting the number of rounds (for example, 7 rounds) that can be set only for the jackpot type corresponding to special figure 1. Alternatively, the probability variation flag 203g may be set to be turned on at different rates.

Also, on the condition that the ball has passed a specific area (for example, an area where the ball won in the second variable winning device 650 can pass) during the jackpot game, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot is over. In the gaming machine configured as described above, the jackpot type corresponding to Toku-zu 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to Toku-zu 2 may be configured to have different probabilities of a ball passing through a specific region. Further, the data table for selecting the variation pattern for indicating the lottery result in each game state set after the jackpot may be configured to be different according to the jackpot type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, in the present embodiment, both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) can win in one round game. Although the upper limit value is set to "10", the upper limit value may be different between the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit value of the opening operation in the round game may be configured to be different according to the jackpot type that has been won (or the type of the special symbol that has been won as the jackpot).

Next, details of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. This small hit type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to for determining the type of small hits when a small hit occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2). In the small hit type selection table 202e, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each value range of the small hit type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 16B, “small hit A” is defined in association with the range of the small hit type counter C5 of “0 to 93”. This "small hit A" is a small hit type that sets the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) to the open state only for 1.5 seconds x 1 time during the small hit game.

Of the 100 random number values that can be obtained by the small hit type counter C5, there are 94 random number values that are "small hit A". Is 94% (94/100).

Further, "small hit B" is defined in association with the range of the small hit type counter C5 of "94 to 98". This "small hit B" is a small hit type that sets an open state for 0.2 seconds x 6 times during a small hit game. Of the 100 random number values that can be obtained by the small hit type counter C5, since there are five random number values that are “small hits B”, when a small hit is made in the lottery of the second special symbol, “small hits B” Is determined to be 5% (5/100).

Furthermore, the value “99” of the small hit type counter C5 is defined in association with “small hit C”. This “small hit C” is a small hit type that sets an open state of 0.06 seconds×8 times during a small hit game. Of the 100 possible random number values of the small hit type counter C5, since there is only one random number value that becomes "small hit C", if the small prize is obtained in the special symbol lottery, it becomes "small hit C" The ratio is 1% (1/100).

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, the variation pattern selection table 202f defines random number values that determine the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 17, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f includes a normal table 202f1 for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in a normal state, a time saving/probability changing table for determining a fluctuation pattern in a time saving state, and a probability changing state. At least a table 202f2 and a latent probability table 202f3 for determining the variation pattern in the latent state are included. Specific contents of these tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. Note that, in each of the tables shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following description, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal table 202f1 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal table 202f1 is a table referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 is a random number value (variation type) for determining the type (variation time) of the variation pattern for each special symbol type and each special symbol stop type (property determination result). The counter value of the counter value CS1) is defined.

Specifically, as the variation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery is a big hit, the reach of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50" and the normal reach (20 seconds) is associated, Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "51-100", super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "101-150", and super reach is reached with the range of "151-198". C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, if it is missed in the lottery of the first special symbol, and this normal table 202f1 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) Accordingly, the correspondence between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the selected fluctuation pattern is changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is within the range of 0 or 1, it is long in the range of “0 to 70” as the value of the variation type counter CS1. The variation pattern of deviation (12 seconds) is associated, and the deviation of normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of “71 to 150”. Further, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the outlying super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "151 to 170", and the outlying super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 198". Has been.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is two or three, the variation pattern of the short deviation (8 seconds) corresponds to the range of "0 to 70" as the value of the variation type counter CS1. As the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern of long deviation (12 seconds) is associated with the range of “71 to 130”, and the normal reach (20 seconds) is associated with the range of “131 to 170”. ing. Further, as the value of the variation type counter CS1, the outlying super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "171 to 185", and the outlying super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range of "185 to 198". Has been.

The process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol by referring to the normal table 202f1 (see S505 of FIG. 35) is the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 of FIG. 33). Is also executed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is not referred to when there are four reserved balls.

As described above, when the number of retained balls is small (0 or 1), the variation pattern having a longer variation time is more likely to be selected than when the number of retained balls is large (2 or 3). With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure a time for accumulating the reserved balls and make it difficult for the variable display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting tired of the game. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is difficult to store the reservation due to the short fluctuation time. Can be prevented (suppressed) from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the loss.

On the other hand, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of alignment, the outlying long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when a right-handed stroke is performed in the normal state, and a variation time of 600 seconds is set each time when the second special symbol lottery is executed, the gaming efficiency becomes extremely worse than when a left-handed stroke is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player hits the ball right at normal times.

Next, the details of the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 will be described with reference to FIG. This time reduction/probability change table 202f2 is a table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when a high probability state of a normal symbol is set as a game state (that is, a time reduction state or a probability variation state).

As shown in FIG. 19(a), this time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is for determining the type of the variation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol, and for each stop type of the special symbol (result determination result). A random number value (counter value of fluctuation type counter value CS1) is defined. Note that the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is different from the normal table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18, and is configured so that a different variation pattern is not selected depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. doing.

That is, when the normal state is set as the game state, it is difficult to always secure the reserved ball of the first special symbol because the game is aimed at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 while performing the left-handed game, There is a possibility that a period in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol is not changed) occurs. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the normal table 202f1 is configured so that a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is easily selected. Thereby, in the normal state, the state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time, and the problem that the player gets tired of the game can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 shown in FIG. 19(a) performs a left-handed game and a time saving state or a probability variation state in which a game in which the ball enters the lower first ball inlet 64b2 is performed. It is a referenced data table. At this time, in the shortened state and the probability changing state, the electric accessory 64a is frequently opened, so that the game state can easily store the reserved balls of the first special symbol.

In this way, in the case where the game state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored is set, the fluctuation occurs when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small like the normal table 202f1 described above. If you add a configuration that makes it easy to select a variation pattern that takes a long time, break the game, and execute the first special symbol (special symbol 1) variation when the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol decreases. It takes a long time to fluctuate, and it becomes difficult to play the game efficiently during the time saving state and the probability changing state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a game state in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored (time saving state, probability variation state), that is, a variation pattern table referred to in a high probability state of a normal symbol (time reduction, Probability change table 202f2), so that the variation pattern selected by the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol does not differ (so that the variation pattern with a long variation time is not selected when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small) ) Make up. As a result, it is possible to efficiently execute the game in the time saving state and the probability changing state.

Further, as will be described later in detail, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in a state where the probability variation state is set, the probability variation state is changed to the latent state at the timing when the jackpot variation is started. It is configured to move to. Specifically, when the probability variation state is set, a lottery for the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is performed, and when the result of the lottery (winning/absence determination result) is a big hit, the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is set. If the winning special variation (600 seconds) is selected, the gaming state becomes a latent state while the winning special variation (600 seconds) is being executed, and when the winning special variation ends, the special figure 1 Special combination 1 is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating that the lottery result is a big hit, and the big hit game is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to perform lottery and variable display at the same time, so that the latent state is set (the special variation of the special symbol 1). While (is executed), it is possible to make the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable display period (variation time) for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is defined as a short period (1 second) only in the latent state, and only the second special symbol. It is configured to win the small hit. With such a configuration, while the latent state is set (while the special variation of the special map 1 is being executed), the lottery for the second special symbol is frequently performed, so that the player Can get a lot of prize balls.

As described above with reference to FIG. 19A, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot of special figure 1 is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, 60 seconds to 600 seconds depending on the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1. The fluctuation time of seconds is set, and this fluctuation time directly becomes the duration of the latent state. Therefore, as the special symbol lottery result, not only the result of whether or not the jackpot is won (the result of the determination), but also the player can pay attention to the selected variation pattern (variation time). The interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed and the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is referred to, 60 seconds (1 minute) is set as the variation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a big hit, the long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the variation type counter CS1. When the lottery result of the 2 special symbols is a small hit, the small hit long fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of alignment, the outlying long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. As a result, when the player makes a right hit in the time saving state and the probability change state, and when the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set each time, so that the gaming efficiency is extremely higher than that of the left hit. Getting worse. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which the player strikes to the right in the time saving state or the probability variation state.

Next, details of the latent confirmation table 202f3 will be described with reference to FIG. The latent probability table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set as the game state.

As shown in FIG. 19B, the latent probability table 202f3 is a random pattern for determining the type (variation time) of the variation pattern for each special symbol type and each special symbol stop type (result determination result). A numerical value (counter value of fluctuation type counter value CS1) is defined. Note that the latent probability table 202f3 is configured so that different variation patterns are not selected according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, as in the case of the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 described above.

The latent probability table 202f3 is used when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the period when the jackpot variation of the special figure 1 is executed during the probable variation state, the time saving state, and the probable variation state. At the time of winning the jackpot which is a jackpot type of "jackpot C", when selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed after the jackpot game is over. Referenced.

This latent probability table 202f3 is selected when the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery is selected with respect to the contents defined in the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. 19A. Differs in that the value of the variation type counter CS1 defined for each variation pattern is changed, and that the variation time of each variation pattern selected in the lottery of the second special symbol is changed, Otherwise it is the same. Detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), as the variation pattern determined when the jackpot in the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 39" and the normal variation (60 Second) is associated, the super variation (180 seconds) is associated with the range of “40 to 119”, and the special variation (600 seconds) is associated with the range of “120 to 198”.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol is missed in the lottery and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d) ), and the deviation middle fluctuation (30 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed and the latent probability table 202f3 is referred to, 1 second is set as the variation time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the short-short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the 2 special symbols is a small hit, the small hit short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of the value that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take, and the second When the lottery result of the special symbol is out of alignment, the out-of-range short variation (1 second) is associated with the value of the entire range (0 to 198) of possible values of the variation type counter CS1. Thereby, a lot of lottery (variation) of the second special symbol can be executed in the latent probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, details of the universal figure fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described. As described above, the general pattern variation pattern table 202g is a table that is referred to when selecting a regular pattern variation pattern when the normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 20, in the universal figure variation pattern table 202g, the range of the value of the universal figure variation type counter CS2 and the variation pattern (variation time) for each gaming state when the lottery for the ordinary symbols is executed. And are defined in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, the game state is a normal state, a latent state, that is, in the case of a low probability state of a normal symbol, the entire range of values that the general figure variation type counter CS2 can take ( 0 to 198) is associated with a variation pattern having a variation time of 10 seconds. Similarly, when the gaming state is the probability variation state, a variation pattern having a variation time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of values that the universal figure variation type counter CS2 can take.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is a time saving state, a probability variation state, that is, in the case of a high probability state of a normal symbol, the variation time of 3 seconds varies within the range of the universal symbol variation type counter CS2 of "0-198" The patterns are associated.

In the first embodiment, a plurality of variation pattern variations are provided only in the latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the normal state or the probability variation state, the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol may have variations, and when the ordinary symbol lottery is executed in the latent state, the variation time is 1 second or 2 seconds. Any one of the types may be set. The variation time is not limited to two types, and more variation times may be selectable. The more variation the variation time has, the more difficult it is for the player to predict the variation time. Therefore, the player can be more surely allowed to continuously right-stroke during the latent state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is set based on the gaming state and the value of the acquired universal symbol variation type counter CS2, but other than that, based on the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol A configuration for changing the variation time, a configuration for changing the variation time based on the number of times of special symbol lottery, or a configuration for setting the variation time for a normal symbol by a method combining the various configurations described above may be used. Specifically, from the transition of the game state to the latent state until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), 1 second is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, and thereafter (for example, , 51 times to 100 times) may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal symbol.

In this way, by measuring the number of special symbol fluctuations (first special symbol, second special symbol) from the end of the previous jackpot, the variation time corresponding to the measurement result is selected and configured to be executed. , During the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to let the player perform the game while having a feeling of expectation so that a more advantageous fluctuation time (for example, a short fluctuation time) is executed. it can.

In addition, while the game state shifts to the latent state, while the special symbol lottery for the even number of times is being executed, 1 second is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, and other than that (the odd number of times), You may comprise so that 3 seconds may be set as the variation time of a normal symbol. In this way, by changing the variation time of the normal symbol based on the number of times the special symbol is drawn, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the variation time, so it is more certain during the latent state. It is possible to make right-hand striking continuously. In this case, in the state where the special symbol lottery is not executed, the variation time of the normal symbol becomes longer (becomes longer than when the special symbol lottery is executed), or the special symbol It is preferable that the smaller the number of lottery items stored in suspension, the longer the variation time of the normal symbols.

In addition, when setting the variation time of the normal symbol based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol, it is preferable that the longer the variation time of the normal symbol, the easier it is for the long variation time to be selected. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted so that the number of reserved balls for ordinary symbols is less likely to accumulate and the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted for the number of retained balls for ordinary symbols that are easily accumulated It is possible to make the number of ordinary symbol lottery uniform.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 is a first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol holding sphere storing area 203c, a first special symbol holding sphere number counter 203d, a normal symbol holding sphere. Number counter 203e, time saving counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, special figure 1 big hit flag 203h, special figure 1 big hit flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small hit flag 203k, special figure 1 variation time counter 203m, special figure 2 variation Time counter 203n, big hit medium flag 203o, small hit medium flag 203p, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203r, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, general figure short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v, It also has at least the other memory area 203z.

The first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), each of these In the area, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the small hit type counter C5, and the variable type counter CS1 are stored.

More specifically, the value of each counter is acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area ~ Among the vacant areas of the reserved fourth area), the areas having smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all of the four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a are execution areas. Is shifted (moved) to, and based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for a special symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the holding first area to the execution area, the holding first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data is shifted only for the holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) in which winning data is stored.

In the second special symbol execution area 203b, similarly to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a, the determination value (counter value) for executing the lottery of special symbols is stored. In the second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the start winning to the second entrance 640 is detected is stored.

The normal symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c, like the first special symbol reserve sphere storage area 203a, one execution area (normal symbol reserve sphere execution area) and four reserve areas (reserve first area to reserve fourth area) ) And have. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). ), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, like the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. When data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when a lottery for a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area is in an empty state, and thus is stored in another reserved area as in the case of the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a. A shift process is performed in which winning data is packed in a holding area having a smaller area number by one. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d, the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol display device 37, which is performed on the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entrance 64 (starting winning)) It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of holding balls for variable display increases. Is incremented by 1 (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display of special symbols is executed (see S303 of FIG. 33).

The value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d (the number of times N1 of variable display holding in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S304 of FIG. 33, FIG. 47). See S1705). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 203d is changed, of the variable display held in the main control device 110. The value of the number of reserved balls itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of balls for variable display managed by the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp controller 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. Even if it deviates from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next command of the number of reserved balls received.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 each time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved number of balls command.

The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is a maximum of four times the number of holding balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67. Is a counter that counts up to. The value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is set to an initial value of zero, and the sphere passes through the through gate 67 to increase the number of spheres for the variable display. Each time, the maximum value 4 is incremented by 1 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1805 in FIG. 48).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the sphere passes through the 2 through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S1903 of FIG. 49: (See No).

The time saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. At this time, the value corresponding to the jackpot type that has been won is set to the time saving counter 203f after the jackpot. Then, the time saving counter 203f is decremented by 1 in the game state update process executed immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set (see S308 of FIG. 36). When performing a lottery for normal symbols, if the value of this time saving counter 203f is 1 or more, it is determined to be the time saving state of the normal symbol, and whether or not the symbol is normal is determined by referring to the high probability table. .. On the other hand, if the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol is determined, and whether or not the normal symbol is determined is determined by referring to the low probability table.

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and when set to ON, indicates that the special symbol is in the high probability state. That is, if the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, as a game state, probability variation state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state), or latent probability state (special symbol: high probability state, One of the normal pattern: low probability state) is set.

This probability variation flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot if the jackpot type that is won is a jackpot that sets the probability variation state or the latent probability state after the jackpot is over (S2402: Yes in FIG. 54) (FIG. 54). 54, S2403). Then, when the symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a big hit is stopped and displayed, it is set to OFF (see S806 in FIG. 38).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the special symbol jackpot winning, and the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won. However, without being limited to this, for example, as a special figure high probability end condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol (special state high probability state) after the special symbol is set The probability variation flag 203g may be set to OFF when the number of fluctuations (number of fluctuations in special figure) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). In this case, in order to set a timing for setting the probability variation flag 203g to OFF, a storage unit that stores in advance the number of times of variation of the special figure as the special figure high accuracy end condition and a state after the special figure high accuracy state is set. Measuring means for measuring the number of special figure fluctuations, and end judgment for judging whether the number of special figure fluctuations measured by the measuring means satisfies the number of special figure fluctuations (special figure high accuracy end condition) stored in the storage means Means and may be provided.

Further, a plurality of special figure high-probability end conditions are prepared, for example, special figure 1 high-probability end conditions and second special symbol fluctuations that can be established based only on the number of times the first special symbol changes in the special figure high-probability state. Various special drawing 2 high-probability end conditions that can be established based only on the number of times, and lottery end conditions that can be established when the lottery result for special symbols is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result for winning a small prize). It may be configured such that the special figure high probability end condition is facilitated and the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF when any of the special figure high accuracy end conditions is satisfied.

The special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on having entered the first entrance 64 is equal to the big hit judgment value at the start of fluctuation. Is a flag set to (see S407 of FIG. 34). The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S806 of FIG. 38).

When the variation time of the variable display of the first special symbol ends when the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is turned on, the process of forcibly stopping the second special symbol with the symbol is executed (see S804 in FIG. 38). .. Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that one of the big hits is executed while the other is a big hit or a small hit.

Special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on entering the second entrance 640 is determined to match the jackpot judgment value at the start of fluctuation. Is a flag set to (see S1007 in FIG. 40). This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1506 in FIG. 45).

When the variation time of the variable display of the second special symbol ends with the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i turned on, the process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol with the symbol is executed (see S1004 in FIG. 40). .. Thereby, with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to prevent a problem that one of the big hits is executed while the other is a big hit or a small hit.

The winning state storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (when the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is off), the normal state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. “00H” is stored as information indicating On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the probable state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more and the probable variation flag 203g is on), the probable state is shown in the winning state storage area 203j. “01H” is stored as information. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the latent state (when the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability variation flag 203g is on), the latent state is stored in the winning state storage area 203j. “02H” is stored as the indicated information.

The information stored in the winning state storage area 203j is held until the end of the big hit, and is referred to when setting the game state after the end of the big hit (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

The small hit flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired based on having entered the second entrance 640 is equal to the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag that is set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). This small hit flag 203k is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit (see S1605 in FIG. 46). When the small hit flag 203k is turned on and the variation time of the variation display of the second special symbol ends, the variation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (the counter for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is subtracted. The process of stopping) is executed (see S1603 in FIG. 46). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem in which a big hit is started during the small hit of the first special symbol during the small hit of the second special symbol and the big hit is started during the small hit. it can.

Special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, and special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n, respectively, the 1st special design, and the counter in order to count the fluctuation time of the 2nd special design, 1st special design, and 2nd special When the variation pattern of the symbol is selected, the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol is ended according to the timing results of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n.

The big hit medium flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not the big hit is in progress. If the big hitting flag 203o is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit, and if it is off, it is not a big hit. The big hit medium flag 203o is set to ON when the big hit start is set. On the other hand, it is set to OFF in the jackpot ending process executed at the end of the jackpot.

The small hitting flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not the small hit is in progress. If the small hit medium flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a small hit, and if it is off, it is not a small hit. The small hitting flag 203p is set to ON when the small hit start is set (see S1406 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, it is turned off when the small hit ends (see S2512 in FIG. 232).

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to win the small hit only for the second special symbol, and when winning the small hit (when the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON), It is configured to suspend the variable display of the 1 special symbol. That is, among the special symbols of the plurality of types (first special symbol, second special symbol), one special symbol (second special symbol) is selected by lottery, and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON. In the state, the variable display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) does not end, so that the player can play the game by paying attention to the small hit game. Also, during the small hit game, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from ending and the large hit game being started.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag indicating that it is a period from when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the big hit stop design until the big hit is started. When the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON, even when there is a new ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is avoided. (See S901: Yes in FIG. 39). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped by the symbol (see S802 in FIG. 38), and avoids the process for executing the variable display of the second special symbol. If it does, it is turned off (S902 in FIG. 39).

The normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is a flag for indicating that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) was a short fluctuation (fluctuation for 3 seconds), and by being set to ON, the normal symbol (second symbol) It shows that a short change of (pattern) was executed. This general symbol short fluctuation flag 203t, it is determined that the timing for setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) is in the time saving state (time saving) (S1811: Yes in FIG. 48). ) When the fluctuation time of 3 seconds (short fluctuation) is set to ON (S1814 of FIG. 48), it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S1816 of FIG. 48: Yes), if it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol (second symbol) is a win (S1818: Yes in FIG. 48), it is referred to (S1819 in FIG. 48).

Here, when it is determined that the universal figure shortage variation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819: Yes in FIG. 48), it is determined whether or not the present time is in the time saving state (time saving) (S1821 in FIG. 48). ), when it is determined that the time saving state is in progress (time saving) (S1821: Yes in FIG. 48), the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a (FIG. 48 S1822). The general symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is set to OFF (S1820 in FIG. 48) after it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation process (S106 in FIG. 48) is set to ON.

Thus, the game state at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) (when the fluctuation time is set) and the electric accessory 64a opening operation setting after the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed A plurality of game states (normal state) are set because the game player is configured to set the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a only when both the gaming state and the time saving state. Due to the variation (lottery) of the ordinary symbol executed across the (and the time saving state), it is possible to reliably prevent the electric accessory 64a from being opened long, and a privilege advantageous to the player (long electric accessory 64a). It is possible to prevent the player from being provided with "open" excessively.

The winning counter 203u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (won) the first specific winning opening 65a in the small hitting game round. When the value of the winning counter 203u reaches the upper limit value of 10, it is determined that the condition for ending the round is satisfied, and the round is ended (see S2706 in FIG. 57). In addition, in each round of the big hit, even when the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10, when the round period set for the round is reached, the round is finished. The prize winning counter 203u is incremented by 1 each time a win is detected in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small-sized round valid period. The value is reset to 0 at the end of each round.

Although detailed description is omitted, the above-described winning counter 203u is not limited to the small hit game, and also counts the number of balls winning the second specific winning opening 650a in each round during the big hit game. It is also used for.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game content of the small hit game is set such that the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for 1.5 seconds, and the condition for ending the round established by the winning number is 10 doing. That is, the valid period (1.5 seconds) of the round game elapses until 10 balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a during the small hit game (until the round end condition for the winning number is satisfied). It will be. Therefore, because the period of the small hit game can be made constant, the production across the small hit game (the period from the start of fluctuation of one special symbol to the end of fluctuation of other special symbols via the small hit game) The effect period of a series of effects) can be set in advance. Therefore, the change timing of the special symbol and the execution timing of the effect can be easily synchronized, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is a flag indicating a period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special figure 1 is stopped, and when it is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, When the state of being set to ON is set to being OFF, the updating (subtraction) of the stopped variable time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when stopping the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in which the lottery result is a small hit (S1602 of FIG. 46), and the special symbol fluctuation process (figure 32)) (S202 of FIG. 32). As a result of the reference, if it is set to ON, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device corresponding to the special figure 1 is executed in the same manner as during the change (S203 of FIG. 32). In other words, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the change time update (subtraction) is stopped, but the first symbol display device is in a state in which the variable display is continuously executed. Become. As a result, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is not forcibly stopped because the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is turned on. Then, when it is determined that it is set to ON in the first special symbol variation execution process (see FIG. 37) (S701 of FIG. 37: Yes), it is set to OFF (S703 of FIG. 37).

In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured such that only the lottery of the second special symbol can be won in the small hit, the special symbol in which the variable display is temporarily stopped based on the fact that the small prize is won is the first special symbol. Although it is only a symbol, if it is configured to be able to win the small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, even if the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag is provided to temporarily stop the variable display of the second special symbol. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a big hit, based on the fact that one of the special symbols is stopped in the combination indicating the big hit (based on that the big hit game is executed ), the process of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol at the disengagement, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit, one special symbol stopped with a combination showing a small hit. Based on that, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small hit game is finished).

That is, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed into various modes according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. With such a configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes a game result that is most advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit), and while the variable display for showing the game result is being executed, the other It is possible to prevent the special symbol (the lottery result is a small hit) from being stopped and displayed, and deleting the big hit due to the small hit.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 11 can be realized.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described in detail. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 22A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is based on the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, deviation, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command. ), it is used to determine the details of the detailed variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by main controller 110.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19A, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the variation time is 60 seconds per normal variation, the variation. The main controller 110 outputs a variation pattern command corresponding to either a super variation for a time of 180 seconds or a special variation for a variation time of 600 seconds, and the audio lamp controller 113 receives the variation pattern command (variation time). Change information corresponding to (information indicating).

Here, as a variation effect corresponding to the special variation (600 seconds), a first-stage effect mode (for example, an effect of defeating the first enemy) is executed for the first 60 seconds, and the second is performed for a period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A staged production mode (for example, production of defeating a second enemy) is executed, and a variable production of performing a production stage of a third stage (production of defeating a third enemy) in a period of 180 seconds to 600 seconds is set. As a fluctuating effect corresponding to a change (180 seconds), the first 60 seconds executes a first-stage effect mode (for example, an effect of defeating the first enemy), and a second-stage effect mode in a period of 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A variation effect that executes (for example, an effect that is defeated by a second enemy) is set, and as the variation effect corresponding to the normal fluctuation (60 seconds), the first 60 seconds is a first-stage effect mode (for example, for the first enemy). The variable effect for executing the effect (defeated effect) is set.

In this way, the variation mode set this time for the player is set by setting the production mode so as to divide the variation production executed corresponding to the stage of the variation time that can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol. It is possible to entertain the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while predicting which type it is, and to enhance the effect.

In the case of executing the above-described variable effect, the remaining time display mode for allowing the player to understand the remaining time for the effect period set as each stage (for example, the timing when the effect mode can shift to the next stage It may be configured to display an effect mode in which the remaining time until is displayed as a countdown. This allows the player to know in advance at least the period in which the variable effect is continuously executed (the period in which the latent state is continuously set), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. it can.

In addition, a plurality of types of enemies appearing during the variable effect are provided, and the degree of expectation that the variable effect shifts to the next stage (the rate at which the effect mode that wins the enemy is selected), depending on the type of the enemy that appears. The content of the big hit game executed after the current variable display is finished, and the game state set after the big hit game is finished may be suggested.

In addition, in this case, for example, when the enemy A is displayed as the enemy type, if the variation pattern set this time is a winning super variation (180 seconds), the jackpot type most advantageous to the player is It may be configured to indicate that it has been selected, and if the variation pattern is a winning special variation (600 seconds), it indicates that a jackpot type other than the one most advantageous to the player has been selected. With this configuration, it is possible to determine the effect mode (type of enemy) of the variable effect by combining a plurality of elements that determine whether or not to give the advantageous privilege to the player. The effect can be enhanced.

In the stop display mode selection table 222b, the latent state is set as the game state, and the period during which the small hit game can be frequently executed by the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the rush period) is set. It is a data table referred to when selecting the stop display mode (refer to FIG. 7A and FIG. 8B) of the effect design for notifying the person. The stop display mode selection table 222b is configured such that different stop display modes are selected according to the jackpot type won in the first special symbol lottery and the length of the rush period to be executed.

Here, the contents of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23A, the stop display mode selection table 222b allows the player to predict the degree of advantage of each jackpot type (the number of rounds, the gaming state set after the jackpot game) and the length of the rush period. It is regulated that the stop display mode of the effect design is set so as to be possible.

Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special map 1), the jackpot “A” which is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period is set). When the information stored in the area for storing the information shown) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, when the rush period is 60 seconds or less, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39". The stop display mode "111" is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". ..

In addition, when the “big hit A” is won and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. In the case of within ~300 seconds, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of the acquired effect counter 223h of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode "333" in the range of "40 to 79". Is defined, the stop display mode “333” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is In the case of “301 seconds to”, that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode “777” is defined in the range of the obtained effect counter 223h of “0 to 39”, and “40 to 79”. The stop display mode "777" is defined in the range "", and the stop display mode "VVV" is defined in the range "80 to 99".

Then, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special map 1), the "bonus B", which is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (information indicating the length of the rush period is stored. When the information stored in the area) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, when the rush period is 60 seconds or less, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39" and the stop display mode. “222” is defined, the stop display mode “444” is defined in the range of “40 to 79”, and the stop display mode “666” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”.

In addition, when the “big hit B” is won, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. In the case of within ~300 seconds, the stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of the obtained effect counter 223h of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode "666" in the range of "40 to 79". Is defined, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is In the case of “301 seconds to”, that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of the acquired effect counter 223h of “0 to 39”, and “40 to 79”. The stop display mode “333” is defined in the range “”, and the stop display mode “333” is defined in the range “80 to 99”.

Finally, of the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the second most advantageous jackpot type "big jackpot C", or the most disadvantageous jackpot type "big jackpot D" wins, When the information stored in the time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, when the rush period is within 60 seconds, the obtained effect counter 223h In the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "444" is defined, in the range of "40 to 79", the stop display mode "666" is defined, and in the range of "80 to 99". The stop display mode “444” is defined.

In addition, the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (the area for storing the information indicating the length of the rush period) that wins the “big hit C” and the “big hit D” is “61 seconds to 300 seconds”, that is, If the rush period is within 61 to 300 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is set to the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined, and the range of "40 to 79" is set. The stop display mode “111” is defined, and the stop display mode “111” is defined in the range of “80 to 99” and is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period). When the displayed information is "301 seconds to", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of the obtained effect counter 223h of "0 to 39". , "40-99", the stop display mode "777" is defined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by the stop display mode of the effect symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the rush period starts, the length of the rush period, and after the rush period ends The contents of the jackpot to be executed (jackpot type) are configured to be suggested to the player. With this, by grasping the stop display mode of the effect symbol, the player can predict the game content in the future.

Further, in the present embodiment, the stop display mode of the effect design is defined to have a predetermined law, and specifically, the stop display mode of the effect design is “even number pattern”, “odd number pattern”, It is stipulated that the benefits given to the player increase in the order of "777" and "VVV" (longer rush period, better jackpot type). In this way, by giving a predetermined law to the stop display mode of the effect design, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Further, since it is configured to select the stop display mode of the effect symbol by combining the jackpot type and the length of the rush period, for example, the stop display mode of the effect symbol "111" is most advantageous to the player. Only when the big hit type “big hit A” is set, it is specified that the rush period is selected even if it is within 60 seconds. Therefore, when “111” is displayed, the player is On the other hand, for the novel game property that the rush period is desired to end in 60 seconds, that is, for the game property that normally requires a longer rush period, the jackpot type and the length of the rush period are combined. By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a game characteristic in which a game result (short rush period) opposite to the normal one is desired.

In addition, when "VVV" is displayed as the stop display mode of the effect symbol, it indicates that both the jackpot type and the length of the rush period have been selected to be the most advantageous to the player. On the other hand, you can play the game with peace of mind.

In the present embodiment, the timing of selecting the stop display mode of the effect symbol by referring to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the game state (the timing of stopping and displaying the effect symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) is set. It is configured to be different. Specifically, at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the probability variation state is set, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts), whether the second special symbol is varying or not. If, it is determined that the second special symbol has not changed, that is, if the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent state is set, the jackpot variation of the first special symbol It is configured to stop and display the effect design based on the start.

On the other hand, at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the probability variation state is set, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts), if it is determined that the second special symbol is varying, That is, unless the variation display of the second special symbol currently being executed ends, if the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed in the state in which the latent state is set, the variable display of the second special symbol in execution The effect design is configured to be stopped and displayed based on the timing when the process ends.

With this configuration, since the production symbols can be stopped and displayed, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed in a state where the latent state is set immediately after the rush period is started, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to perform a game in the latent state without giving.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, at the time when the latent probability state is set (when the probability variation state is set, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts), the second special symbol is changed. When it is determined, the length of the rush period from the timing when the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed is finished is determined, and when the determination result is within a predetermined time, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is configured not to execute (the effect indicating that the rush period has started). As a result, even if the effect symbol is stopped and displayed and the rush period has started (the rush game has started), if the small hit game is executed, the rush period will end. Can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the fact that the rush period (rush game) has been started is configured to be displayed as an effect symbol similar to the third symbol, so it is as if the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol. It is possible to make it seem as if the rush game is executed based on the symbols being stopped and displayed. Further, even when the length of the rush period is within a predetermined time and the effect design is not stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress a great sense of discomfort to the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, as the timing to stop and display the effect symbols, the timing when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started, or the second special that is being executed at the timing when the latent probability state is set The timing at which the variable display of the symbols is stopped is used, but the effect symbols may be configured to be stopped and displayed at a timing other than this, for example, stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. By analyzing the prize information command indicating the prize information and determining in advance that the jackpot variation will be executed in the next variation, immediately before the jackpot variation is executed (the third symbol in the variation before the jackpot variation) The effect design may be stopped and displayed at a timing (when is displayed). With this configuration, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the latent state is set.

In this way, when using a configuration in which the effect symbol is stopped and displayed before the jackpot change is executed and the rush game is started, the second winning is entered from the timing when the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. When a game aiming at the ball opening 640 (right hitting game) is performed, it is preferable that the lottery for the second special symbol is not executed before the next big hit variation starts. Thereby, as a result of performing a right-handed game based on the stop display of the effect design, before the latent probability state is set (before the big hit variation starts), that is, the second during the probability variation state. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the special symbol lottery is executed and the period during which the rush game is executed is shortened.

The additional effect selection table 222c is used when selecting an effect mode (additional effect mode) when resuming the variable display of the first special symbol which has been temporarily stopped by winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. It is a data table to be referred to, and is configured so that a different additional effect mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7B)) is selected according to the remaining variation time of the first special symbol after restart. Here, the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23B, in the additional effect selection table 222c, different additional effect types are selected based on the period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o and the additional effect counter 223i. The data content is defined so that the player predicts the remaining change time (the remaining period of the rush period) of the first special symbol by executing the additional production mode corresponding to the selected additional production type. Configured to get.

Specifically, when the remaining change time (period information stored in the remaining change time information storage area 223o) is the period A (less than 5 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99." The additional effect type “none” is defined in the range “”, and the additional effect A is defined in the range “100 to 198”. When the remaining change time (the period information stored in the remaining change time information storage area 223o) is the period B (5 seconds to 60 seconds), the acquired value of the additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". The additional effect type "additional effect A" is defined in the range of, and the "additional effect B" is defined in the range of "100 to 198". When the remaining change time (the period information stored in the remaining change time information storage area 223o) is the period C (60 seconds or more), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is in the range of "0 to 99". The additional effect type “additional effect B” is defined, and “additional effect C” is defined in the range of “100 to 198”.

Here, when the “additional effect A” is set, the display mode of the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) displayed during the rush period is changed to the tattered display mode. By grasping the tattered display mode, the player can predict that the rush period is very short. Further, when the "additional effect B" is set, the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7B) in the normal display mode is displayed, and when the "additional effect C" is set, the treasure box 812 is set in the normal display mode. Also, a gorgeous display mode is set. Further, when “none” is selected, an effect of not displaying the treasure box 812 during the remaining rush period is set.

In addition, in the additional effect selection table 222c (FIG. 23(b)) shown in the present embodiment, an example in which the remaining variation time of the rush period and the additional effect type are completely associated is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. With a small probability, for example, “additional effect C” is set in the period B, and “additional effect A” or “none” is set in the period C. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect for the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the composite game information that combines the rush period and the jackpot type is played in the stop display mode of the effect design that is displayed at the timing when the rush game is started in the latent state. It is configured to provide the player with game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period by the additional effect during the rush period. As a result, the player comprehensively determines the stop display mode of the effect symbol executed as the composite game information and the effect mode of the additional effect, thereby making it possible to predict a more detailed game content.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a special figure 1 variation start flag 223d, a special figure 2 variation start flag 223e, and a special figure 1 stop. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, effect counter 223h, additional effect counter 223i, state setting area 223j, remaining short time count area 223k, special figure 1 variable time counter 223m, special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n, remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notification completed flag 223q, card notification possible flag 223s, rush displayed flag 223t, prize ball number counter 223u, power supply At least the disconnection flag 223y and the other memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until a process for the command is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is executed. , The command is analyzed, and the process according to the command is performed.

The prize information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and prize information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects a start winning for the first ball entrance 64, a first random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter C2 acquired according to the starting prize. From each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, various information (whether the hit, big hit type in case of big hit, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning is drawn The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and various predicted information is notified from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 by a prize information command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, various information notified by the winning information command (whether winning, jackpot type in case of big hit, variation pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is obtained. Is stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area having the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the four areas (first area to fourth area) which are vacant. To be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (variation display) of the first special symbol performed in the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is held in the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variation effect of the first special symbol that is performed up to four times for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c special symbol for the holding ball number. Is managed for each type.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of holding balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command. , And stores it in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c (see S4212 in FIG. 60). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110. The value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c is used to display the holding ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also holds the first special symbol after storing. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the sphere number counter 223c, a display reserved sphere number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding of the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the sphere count symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol holding sphere counter 223c is changed in value in synchronization with the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere numbers displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere number counter 203d of the main controller 110. it can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

Special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d, and special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e, respectively when the fluctuation pattern command of the 1st special design and the fluctuation pattern command of the 2nd special design which are transmitted from main controller 110 are received It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60), and is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e are turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f, and special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, when the stop type command of the first special symbol and the stop type command of the second special symbol transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. Are turned on (see S4301 in FIG. 61), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command. It is determined.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed, the value is incremented by 1 and updated. To be done.

The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern and selecting various effects. The additional effect counter 223i is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, the value is incremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed. Will be updated.

The state setting area 223j is a storage area in which information according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Every time a status command output from the main controller 110 is received, information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command is stored in the status setting area 223j (see S4405 in FIG. 62). .. More specifically, the state setting area 223j is assigned with a 2-bit storage area, and whether or not it is a high probability state of a special symbol, or is a high probability state of a normal symbol, in order from the upper bits. A value indicating that is stored. For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is "11B", it means that the probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, and high probability state of normal symbols), if "10B", latent It means that it is a certain state (high probability state of special symbol, and low probability state of normal symbol). On the other hand, if it is "00H", it means that it is a normal state (low probability state of special symbol, and low probability state of normal symbol).

By updating the state setting area 223j according to the state command output from the main controller 110, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped in the voice lamp controller 113.

The remaining short time count area 223k is a storage area for storing the number of remaining times in a high probability state of a normal symbol. This remaining short time count area 223k is updated to the number of times notified by the remaining short time count command output every time the value of the time saving counter 203f is updated in the main control device 110 (see S4802 in FIG. 66). As a result, the value stored in the remaining hour/hour count area 223k can be updated in synchronization with the value of the hour/hour counter 203f of the main controller 110, so that the remaining hour/hour count grasped by the voice lamp controller 113 can be changed to It is possible to match the actual number of times saved by the main controller 110.

The special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m and the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n indicate corresponding fluctuation times when respective fluctuation displays are set (executed) in the fluctuation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69). Each time a value is set and various counter updating processing (see S4111 in FIG. 72) is executed, 1 is subtracted from each value (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). The period from the reception of the special figure 1 temporary stop command to the reception of the special figure 1 restart command from the main control device 110 is the case where various counter update processing (see S4111 in FIG. 72) is executed. Also, it is configured so that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not subtracted by 1.

Then, in the temporary stop related process (see S4220 of FIG. 67) executed when the command determination process (see S4112 of FIG. 60) determines that the temporary stop related command is received, Reference is made (see S4903 in FIG. 67).

The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing the remaining period of the rush period, that is, information indicating the remaining time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. In the remaining variation time information storage area 223o, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol variation display is set, and the temporarily stopped first special The remaining period information stored when setting the additional effect when restarting the variable display of the symbols is referred to.

The card notification completion flag 223q is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) is displayed (notifying), and is turned on when the card forgetting warning screen is displayed. Is set.

The card notification possible flag 223s is a flag for indicating whether or not the card forgetting warning screen (see FIG. 10A) can be displayed (notified), and the card forgetting warning screen can be displayed. It is set to ON when the following conditions are met.

The rush display completion flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not the rush game has been started in the state where the latent probability state is set, and is a rush rush screen (FIG. 7) showing that the rush game has been started. It is set to ON when (a) and FIG. 8(b) are displayed.

The prize ball number counter 223u is a counter for continuously measuring the number of prize balls after the jackpot game is started, and is a prize ball during a period in which a game state advantageous for the player is continuously set. It is configured to accumulate numbers. Specifically, in the hit related process (S4216 of FIG. 63), when it is determined that the prize ball command has been received (S4505: Yes of FIG. 63), the value corresponding to the received prize ball command is added ( S4506 of FIG. 63).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to obtain a large amount of prize balls not only in the big hit game but also in the small hit game, and accordingly, in accordance with the value of the prize ball number counter 223u, After the winning game is over, or after the big hitting game in which a small number of rounds are set, the card forgetting warning display can be executed.

The power-off flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether or not there is a momentary power failure. The power-off flag 223y is set to ON before the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 and the power-off process is executed (see S4117 in FIG. 59). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all the information in the RAM 223 disappears after a fixed time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, in the start-up process (see FIG. 58) of the voice lamp control device 113, when the power-off flag 223y is on (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58), the power-off flag 223y remains constant after being set on. This is the case where the voice lamp control device 113 is started up before the time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed, that is, when there is a momentary power failure. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not disappeared, and unnecessary information (or incomplete information due to the disappearance of only a part of the information) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). As a result, processing is not executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so that each processing of the voice lamp control device 113 can be operated normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. .. The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce the cost.

Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure. The same applies to the following), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply unit 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Note that, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, in general, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged in a plurality of pages in succession, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands that form the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts the image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs publicly known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and publicly reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error data is not corrected based on the erroneous data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data blocks. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside while using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first releases the system reset. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. To output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are NOR type ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" and then the instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program. By doing so, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately causes the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d to be stored in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed amount of fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the first predetermined pointer of the program storage area 233a to move. It is set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 to fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a to fetch the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed so that the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 74B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. By this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 causes the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 or the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, in general, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The MPU 231 gives an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred to the storage source end address.

Thereby, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Further, since the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and the third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a at the time of power-on, the rear image area 235c, and the character symbol area 235e, an error message image area 235f is provided, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variation effect when the entry into the entry slot 64b2 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 shows that the display control device 114, immediately after the power is turned on, while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234, the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the variation pattern command shown in FIG. As shown in Fig. 25, on the display screen of the power-on main image, a power-on variation image of the "○" symbol is displayed at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in Fig. 25(c), "○" At the same position as the design, the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" design is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is performed. The result is judged, and if it is "a big hit of a special symbol", the image shown in Fig. 25(b) is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect, and if it is "a deviation of the special symbol", it is shown in Fig. 25(c). The image shown is displayed for a certain period after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation check efficiency is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

In addition, the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball is detected at the upper first entrance 64b1 or the lower first entrance 64b2. 25B and 25C, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to alternately display on the third symbol display device 81. Accordingly, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the variation effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. When a time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if a ball is detected at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance 64b2, a corresponding variation effect is given to the third. It can be immediately displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 26B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “town stage” and the rear surfaces B to D corresponding to the “forest stage”, the “river stage”, and the “sky stage”, respectively. .. Further, FIG. 27 shows the rear surface E corresponding to the “island stage”.

As for the rear images corresponding to the respective rear faces A to D, as shown in FIG. 26, images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while horizontally scrolling the image from left to right.

The images prepared on the rear surfaces A to D (hereinafter, referred to as “scrolling images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the positions a and a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smooth. The back image is scrolled and displayed due to such connection.

When the change of the rear surface type is decided based on the rear surface type selection table (not shown), and the stage is changed to the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 , The first rear position of the corresponding back image is set as the initial position of the display area from the position a to the position a′, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the display is further performed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a′. Therefore, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, the back surface image on the back surface E is, as shown in FIG. 27, with the passage of time, in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→... It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back surface E is an image of a mountain rising over the island, an image of a sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island, with the displayed position fixed, the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky that spreads over the mountains changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the “island stage”, the rear surface image shown in FIG. 27A is displayed as the initial rear surface image of the rear surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27A, an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed. Then, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue with the passage of time, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 27B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black with the passage of time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time, the rear image shown in FIG. 27C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the display returns to the back image shown in FIG. 27A, and the back images of FIGS. 27A to 27C are displayed again on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 26A, the rear surface A corresponding to the town stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while displaying the "town stage" which is the initial stage, so the image data of the back surface A corresponding to the "town stage" that is frequently displayed is displayed. By making all of them resident in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the “Mori stage”, the back surface C corresponding to the “River stage”, and the back surface D corresponding to the “empty stage” are, as shown in FIG. That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Also, the back surface E corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 27A, and the image data corresponding to the back images between FIGS. 27A and 27B except FIG. Is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up processing of the above.

Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images be made resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a′ (or the range of FIG. 27A to FIG. 27B). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between the positions a and b including the initial position (or the image between FIG. 27A and FIG. 27B) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. However, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, if the stage change is decided by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the rear side of the resident video RAM 235 will be stored. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone changes with the passage of time. It can be displayed while doing. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surfaces B to D, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

In addition, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surfaces B to D, the range from the position a to the position b is changed from left to right by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b′ to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, the image data from the position b′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b′ to the position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the rear surface E, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 27A and 27B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 27A to 27C so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 27B to 27C and 27C to 27A can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. The range of (b) to (b) is set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 27B to 27C and 27C to 27A are normally used while the images of FIGS. 27A to 27B are displayed. Since it can be transferred to the video RAM 236, after the images of FIGS. 27A and 27B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the images are stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 27B to 27C and 27C to 27A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the lapse of time by using the image data corresponding to the back image. be able to.

It should be noted that, on the back surfaces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in the sub image dedicated sub area provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 24) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, and thus the back image can be displayed reliably.

Further, in the rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image between the position b'and the position b. Image data to be duplicated is stored. Then, by the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the positions c and d is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a′ is displayed as the display area on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. To do. As a result, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection on the third symbol display device 81 so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 24, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with the numbers "0" to "9" which are the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has entered the ball, the first symbol display device 37, even though the variation effect has been started, the third symbol display device In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variation effect is not immediately started.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols to which numbers "0" to "9" are not attached, a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol, which is composed of an attached symbol imitating the above, is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. To be As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are displayed in the character design area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 is for resident use. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character pattern can be immediately changed even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages is previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data required for subsequent image drawing among the sub areas provided from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , And instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area in which the image data should be stored. Accordingly, the image controller 237 reads the image data designated by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While developing the image, while developing the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes the process of displaying the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers and at the same time. It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are stored in every one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a confirmed display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table, and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variation effect and an opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started and the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is an effect for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special game state and the large opening that is normally closed is repeatedly opened, and the round effect is about to start. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending effect is an effect for informing the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variation effect is stopped. It is a staging effect, and the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not attached, is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a person related to the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table, which is a display data table for variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is provided for each variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (design 1, design 2,...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, a character used for various effects such as a boy image or characters, is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the semitransparent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back surface type which is information for specifying the type of the back image. This rear surface type is one of the rear surfaces A to E corresponding to the stage selected from the player (one of the “town stage”, “forest stage”, “river stage”, “sky stage”, and “island stage”). Information that specifies whether to display any one or a rear image different from the rear images A to E is described. The back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed.

When it is specified by the back surface type to display one of the back surfaces A to E, the MPU 231 specifies a back surface image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as a drawing target, Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to E, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from when the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the position information is started.

Further, the position information is, in accordance with the rear surface type, drawing of an image based on the information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating whether or not) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect of the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

Since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main controller 110 are the third symbol. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and displaying the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is currently performed, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the third symbol is displayed at high speed, since the third symbol is invisible to the player, during that time, the symbol offset information of the variable effect stop symbol that was previously performed is displayed. Even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted by switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect that is being performed this time, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 29) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110, or the like, Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images. Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of complicated and enormous programs, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, since the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d, the display is performed. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the rendering mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of sprites used in the effect defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 29). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data to start the transfer does not exist at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, the transfer target image data to start the transfer corresponding to the address does not exist. Null data which means that is defined (corresponds to the address “0002H” in FIG. 29).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

It should be noted that, as in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data that should be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is selected. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. To execute the process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the pachinko machine 10, the display controller 114 displays display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be surely transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 25(a) to 25(c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag that indicates. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is turned on in the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 of FIG. 75(b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 75(b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 75(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

When the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 85(b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction for As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 30) that describes the instruction content of the image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

Thus, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed (FIG. 75(b )), the pointer update process (see S7205 of FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

The MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d every time the pointer 233f is updated, and the drawing list described later is displayed. (See FIG. 30), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, it is possible to display a wide variety of effects regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing is always stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 30, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, reserved ball count symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method designated by that information according to the filter designation information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of the other image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays the number of held balls). Based on the image and a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error), detailed drawing information (detailed information) is generated for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved sphere number pattern 1, reserved sphere number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The clock counter 233h is a counter for counting the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

Then, on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. Each time the display setting process of ()) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 of FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the same when the effect ends. Performs various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for every sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 74) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will always be in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 simultaneously reads the drawn image information which has been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 75B) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are stored in every one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the back image change flag 233w is ON, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and if it is OFF, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when the back image change command transmitted from the audio lamp controller 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referred to in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is turned off when the back image changing process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). As a result, the back image corresponding to the back image change command or the effect mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be displayed.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, 1 byte, and each back face type is associated with each bit. If any of the bits in the back image discrimination flag 233x is ON, it means that the back type corresponding to the ON bit is set as the current back type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back surface image determination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. In the back image discrimination flag 233x, when the back image changing command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the back image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 81(a). ) S7002)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. The back surface image discrimination flag 233x makes it possible to easily specify the currently set back surface type.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not the demonstration effect is being performed. If the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that the demonstration effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the demonstration effect is not being performed. The demo display flag 233y is set to ON when the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demo display data table is displayed. When another display data table other than the above is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 77(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b). , S6905 in FIG. 79). With this demo display flag 233y, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the demonstration effect is currently in progress.

The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not the confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the fixed display effect refers to an effect in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variation pattern. If the confirmed display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmed display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmed display effect is not being performed. The confirmation display flag 233z is set to ON when the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and the confirmation display flag other than the confirmation display data table is set. When another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to OFF (S6505 in FIG. 77(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b), FIG. 79 S6905). With this confirmation display flag 233z, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the present is during the confirmation display effect.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 31 to 57. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (at an interval of 2 msec in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a regular process that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per random type counter C2, the second per random number counter C4, and the small per capita type counter C5 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each of them reaches 479, 99, 232, 99), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C4, C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 47.

After the start winning process (S105) is executed, the process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and the process associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 are normally performed. A symbol variation process is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the normal symbol variation process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated, and the ball is fired. Is a process for determining whether to turn on or off. The main controller 110 instructs the firing controller 112 to fire a sphere when the firing of the sphere is on.

First, with reference to FIG. 32, the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104). When the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201), and when it is determined that it is a big hit or a small hit (S201: Yes) Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202). In the process of S202, it is determined whether or not one of the special maps is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win, and thus the subtraction of the other special map variation time being changed is suspended. In the process of S202, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S202: Yes), the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated. However, (S203), that is, for the special figure in which the subtraction of the fluctuation time is suspended, the processing for continuing the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, and this processing ends. As a result, the player can be notified that the special figure fluctuation is not forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S201, when it is determined that the present is a big hit or a small hit (S201: No), whether the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is larger than 0 (that is, the special figure 1 changes). (S204), if the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S204: No), the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S208) is executed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to S209, which executes the variation process regarding special figure 2. Details of the first special symbol variation start processing (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation executing process (S205) is executed. This first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205) is to execute the process in the variation of special figure 1 and its detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG.

When the first special symbol variation in-progress processing (S205) is finished, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0) (S206), and the variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing (S206: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207) is executed, and then the process proceeds to S209. On the other hand, in the process of S206, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S206: No), the process of S207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S209.

In the processing of S209 to S213, the same processing as S204 to S207 executed for the special figure 1 is executed. When the process of S209 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is greater than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S209), and the special figure 2 fluctuation When it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S209: No), the second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed, and then this process is ended. Details of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation executing process (S211) is executed. This second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211) is to execute the process in the variation of special figure 2 and will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the second special symbol variation in-progress processing (S211) is finished, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is 0) (S212), and the variation time When it is determined that it is the end timing (S212: Yes), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S212, when it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S212: No), the processing of S213 is skipped and the present processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation start process (S208) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process (S208).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding sphere counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the value of the acquired first special symbol holding sphere counter 203d (N1). ) Is greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d (N1) is set. 1 is subtracted (S303), a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d after the subtraction is set, and a reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S304). ..

The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) described later executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is extracted from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is the first special symbol reserved ball counter of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223c. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reservation ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, since the value of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 223c is updated, the first special symbol of the main control device 110. The value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d.

When the process of S304 ends, next, the data of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of holding area 1→execution area, holding area 2→holding area 1, holding area 3→holding area 2, holding area 4→holding area 3.

When the process of S305 ends, then the first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S306). The first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 34, but the value of the first per-random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. Is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot, based on the set gaming state.

When the processing of S306 ends, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection processing is executed (see FIG. 35). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S307) is the judgment result of the first special symbol, and the variation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is completed, then a game state update process is executed (S308). This game state update process (S308 in FIG. 36) will be described in detail later, but the state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated by updating the state of the probability variation flag 203g, which indicates the state of the pachinko machine 10, and the value of the time saving counter 203f. Is a process for updating. When the process of S308 ends, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), this process is ended as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S204 in FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 explain. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during a period in which the variation display (big hit variation) that is won for the jackpot in one of the special symbols is being executed, whether or not the jackpot is won in the other special symbol lottery It is configured not to make a determination.

In other words, one special symbol lottery, in a state where it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period (after the change time), the other special symbol lottery wins the jackpot, multiple times in a short period of time It is configured so that it is prevented that the jackpot is won and the privilege is excessively given.

In this way, the process of acquiring various counter values is performed in the same manner as the normal special symbol lottery, the determination based on the various counter values acquired in the process is skipped, and the configuration is such that the deviation symbol is set. You can quickly respond to the lottery results of the special symbol lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol has a high probability state (probability change state, latent probability state). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is ON (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol) (S402: Yes), the random number value that is a jackpot defined in the first random number table 202a for high probability time. And whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer matches, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, in the processing of S402, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off (that is, the low probability state of the special symbol) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a for low probability is displayed. It is determined whether or not the defined random number value of the jackpot and the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer match, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is on (S405). When it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406). (S406: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S407), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to the jackpot (S408). Then, based on the value of the obtained hit type counter, the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and a value according to the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area. It is stored in 203j (S410), 1 is set in the time saving counter 203f (S411), and this processing is ended.

Here, by setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the first special symbol fluctuation start process (see S208 of FIG. 33) in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 of FIG. 34) It is possible to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state in the game state update processing (S308) executed in the latter stage. As a result, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol, it is possible to set the low probability state of the ordinary symbol at the timing when the jackpot variation is started. Therefore, the probability variation state can be shifted to the latent probability state by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set.

Also. By performing the process of setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the process of shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state on condition that the jackpot is won, and the variation of the special symbol The process of shifting the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state on condition that the number of times has reached a predetermined number, both of which can be executed using the game state update process (S308). Thereby, even when a plurality of conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol are provided, it is possible to prevent the processing of the main control device 110 from becoming complicated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S405, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203h is on (S405: Yes), or in the processing of S406, it is determined that the lottery result is out (S406: No), a deviation symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S412), and then this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 of FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S307).

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S307 of FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 of FIG. 34), the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, that is, the first It is determined whether or not the jackpot of 1 special symbol is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on. This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the processing of S407 in the above-described first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 34).

In the process of S501, when it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the first obtained in the process of S401 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16A) is used to determine the jackpot type based on the value of the hit type counter C2 (S502), and the process proceeds to S503.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of alignment (that is, the special map 1 jackpot flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped. Then, the process proceeds to S503.

In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the game state is read (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. The gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability variation flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f. In the process of S505, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S505), and then the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern ( S506).

When the process of S506 is finished, the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (S507), and then the variation start of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the process of S505. The value indicating the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in step S1 is set in the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the game state update process (S308) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing this game state update processing (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, for updating the state of the probability variation flag 203g, which is a condition for setting the game state, and the value of the hour/hour counter 203f, only the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is updated at the start of variation of the special symbol. In the game state update process (see FIG. 36) which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33), the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is configured to be executed.

And, as will be described later in detail, the probability variation flag 203g which is set to ON is set to OFF when the jackpot variation ends and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). Is configured as follows.

That is, of the two condition elements (state of the probability variation flag 203g, value of the time saving counter 203f) that are referred to when setting the game state, one condition element is updated at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and other condition elements By making it possible to update when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is possible to easily diversify the game state set by combining two condition elements. Further, it is possible to set a specific game state (for example, a latent state) only during the period from the start to the end of the variation of the special symbol, which is advantageous to the player only during a predetermined period. It becomes possible to set the game state.

When the gaming state update processing (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S602), and the remaining short time count command indicating the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is set. Yes (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S604), and when it is determined that the value is 0 (S604: Yes), it is then determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605). ). Here, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S605: No), it is a probability variation state (that is, a latent probability state) in which a time saving game is not given, and therefore a latent probability state is indicated. A status command is set (S606), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S605, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), it is the normal state, and therefore the state command indicating the normal state is set (S607), and the present processing To finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S604, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), this processing is directly terminated.

In the present embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set until the next big hit of the special symbol is won (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination showing the big hit). In addition to this, for example, a probability variation counter is provided in place of the probability variation flag 203g, and the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted every time the variation of the special symbol is executed, and the value of the probability variation counter becomes 0. In this case, the high probability state of the special symbol may be changed to the low probability state.

When using such a configuration, the gaming state update process (S308) shown with reference to FIG. 36 is set as the special state variation start time gaming state update process, and at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends separately. By providing a special state fluctuation stop time game state update process that updates the value of the probability variation counter, the process of determining whether to end the high probability state of the special symbol, and whether to end the high probability state of the normal symbol It is possible to execute the processing for determining whether or not it is performed at a different timing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, regarding the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 of FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Explain. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation executing process (S205). In the first special symbol variation in-execution process (S205), the process of restarting the subtraction of the variation time of the special diagram 1 is suspended, and the process of subtracting the variation time is executed.

When the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701). Here, a case where this processing is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON will be briefly described. As described above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when the special figure 1 is changing and the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a small hit. Then, when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON in the process, so that the main controller 110 executes the timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds. When the process loops and the special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) of the next time (after 2 ms when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON) is executed, it is a big hit in the process of S201. Therefore, the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is not executed. Then, the big hit game (or the small hit game) ends, and it is determined that it is not in the big hit (or in the small hit) in the process of S201, and the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed. It will be. By configuring in this manner, the state where the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the state in which the first special symbol variation executing process (S205) is executed is a big hit (or a small hit) game. It is configured such that the timing is reached and the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, which has been terminated and the subtraction of the fluctuation time is suspended, is restarted.

Returning to FIG. 37, the description will be continued. In the processing of S701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes), next, the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 temporary stop is set. The stop flag 203v is set to OFF (S703), and the process proceeds to S704. On the other hand, in the process of S701, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S701: No), the processes of S702 and S703 are skipped and S704 is executed. Process shifts to.

In the process of S704, the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is decremented by 1 and updated (S704), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 of FIG. 32) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207), first, for the first special symbol (special figure 1), it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S802), and the special figure is set. 2 A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S803). Then, the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a detached symbol (S804).

When the processing of S804 is completed, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability variation flag 203g are reset (S806). Next, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process proceeds to S808.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S801: No), the processes of S802 to S807 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S808.

In the process of S808, the special figure 1 decision command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is decided to be stopped is set (S808). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S809), and this process is ended.

Thus, in the first special symbol stop process (S207), the process (S802 to S809) of stopping the variable display with the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Moreover, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit (S801: Yes), a process (S803, S804) of forcibly stopping the second special symbol that is being variably displayed is executed.

In the first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol in the variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed as a detached symbol. It is not limited to. For example, when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol may be restarted. As a result, it is possible to achieve a natural effect as compared with the case where the player is forced to stop the vehicle when it comes off. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot scenario is set in the processing of S806 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 34), , For example, based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) using the opening period of the jackpot game, set the jackpot scenario in the process of S706 You may do so.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) executed in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210). In the second special symbol variation start process (S210), the process for starting the variation of special figure 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the process relating to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, the target of the variation is merely changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. The detailed description of the elements is omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start processing (S209), first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to OFF (S902), and this processing is ended. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag that is set to ON while the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the deviation when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends. .. That is, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on, it means that the big hit is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on in the processing of S901, the present processing is ended without executing the processing of S902 to S907 for setting the fluctuation start.

On the other hand, in the processing of S901, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to OFF (that is, not set to ON) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b Data (various counter values) is acquired (S903). Next, it is determined whether or not there is acquired data based on the data acquired in the process of S903 (S904). That is, when it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area (S904: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S903, when it is determined that there is data (S904: Yes), the second special symbol jackpot determination process for executing the jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value. Execute (S905). Details of the second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

When the process of S905 is completed, then, based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, and the data acquired in the process of S903, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting the variation pattern is executed (S906). .. Details of the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S906 ends, the above-mentioned gaming state update processing (see FIG. 36) is executed (S907), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 of FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (S905).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above is executed, so the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) The differences will be mainly described.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is acquired (S1001). Then, the processing of S1002 to S1004 for acquiring the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit is executed based on the acquired respective counter values and the state of the probability variation flag 203g. In each of these processes, the only difference is that the counter value used for the lottery (judgment) is obtained from the second special symbol execution area 203b, and the others are the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). Control is executed.

When the processing of S1003 or S1004 ends, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1005). When it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1005: No), it is determined whether or not the acquired lottery result is a jackpot (S1006), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot. (S1006: Yes), the processing of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol to be a big hit is executed, and this processing is ended. In each of these processes of S1007 to S1010, the same process as each process of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is executed. To be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S1005, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1005: Yes), or in the process of S1006, the obtained lottery result of the second special symbol is not a jackpot. When it is determined (S1006: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation processing for setting the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit or the deviation of the second special symbol is executed (S1011), and this processing is ended. The details of the special figure 2 deviation processing (S1011) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S1003 or S1004 of FIG. 40 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), and the lottery result is a small hit. When it is determined that it is (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to the small hit (S1103). Then, the small hit symbol indicating the small hit type corresponding to the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1101 that the lottery result is out of place (S1101: No), the outlier symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105), and thereafter, This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) which is one process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 of FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection processing (S906).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 of FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Then, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 of FIG. 40), whether or not the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set is determined. (S1202). Here, whether or not it is a big hit is determined by whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is turned on for the second special symbol. This special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is something which is set to ON with the processing of S1007 in the above-mentioned 2nd special design big hit decision processing (figure 40 reference).

In the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 and 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1001 in the above-described second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40), a jackpot from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) The type is determined (S1204).

When the processing of S1204 ends, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table (S1205), and then the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected fluctuation pattern. Yes (S1206). Then, the process proceeds to S1208.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1202, when it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is not set (S1202: No), the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207) is executed, and the processing of S1208 is performed. Transition.

In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1208). Then, the variation start of the second special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S1209), and the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the process of S1205 is set in the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n ( (S1210), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207) will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207).

In the special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S1207 in FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1301). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area (S1302). Then, the small hit type is selected based on the acquired value of the small hit type counter C5 and the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) (S1303).

Next, the variation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current game state is read (S1304), and the variation pattern of the small hit corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is read from the read variation pattern selection table. Is selected (S1305). After that, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern is set (S1306), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1301, when it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out) (S1301: No), the variation pattern selection table (FIG. 17 and FIG. 19) is read (S1307), and an outlying variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1308). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is set based on the selected deviation pattern (S1309), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the second special symbol variation execution process (S211) which is one of the special symbol variation processes (see S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Explain the contents. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation executing process (S211). In the second special symbol variation in-execution process (S211), the process of restarting the subtraction of the variation time of the special diagram 2 is suspended, and the process of subtracting the variation time is executed.

When the second special symbol variation execution process (S211) is executed, first, the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203n is updated by subtracting 1 (S1401), and the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Is updated (S1402), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213). This second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is to execute the process when stopping the fluctuation of special figure 2.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON (S1501), and the special figure 2 big hit flag 203i is set to ON. If it is determined to be (S1501: Yes), a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command indicating stop of special figure 1 fluctuation is set (S1503). Next, when the process of S1503 is finished, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed in the off symbol (S1504). Next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, probability variation flag 203g, and time saving counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the big hitting flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process proceeds to S1509.

In the process of S1509, a special figure 2 confirmation command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is confirmed to be stopped is set (S1509). After that, a process of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1510), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1501, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing is executed (S1508), and the above-described S1509 and S1510 are executed. The process is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing (S1508) which is one processing of the second special symbol variation stop processing (S213 in FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing (S1508). In this special figure 2 off stop process (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than the big hit (small hit, miss), the special figure 2 showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the lottery result of Toku-zu 2 is a small hit, a process for temporarily stopping the fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 being executed is executed.

In the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing (S1508), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set to ON (S1601: Yes), the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is turned on is set (S1603).

When the processing of S1603 is completed, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S1604). After that, the small hitting flag 203k is turned off (S1605), and the small hitting medium flag 203p is turned on (S1606).

When the process of S1606 ends, a special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol is set (S1607). After that, the second special symbol that is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is variably stopped by the small hit symbol (S1608), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is out) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is fixedly stopped. A special figure 2 confirmation command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S1609). After that, the second special symbol which is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is deviated from the second special symbol and stopped changing (S1610), and this processing is ended.

As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed. Can be displayed. Therefore, the lottery game with more special symbols can be executed within the predetermined time, and the probability that the jackpot is awarded to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the special symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed on either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed while being temporarily stopped or the measurement of the variation time is interrupted. In such a case, the special symbols that have been temporarily stopped are stopped in a display mode or a notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so that the player loses the lottery game that was in the midst of variable display. It is possible to grasp that it is not, and to play the jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a start winning process (S105) which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 of FIG. 47) determines whether a game ball has entered (first winning) the first ball inlet (first starting port) 64, and if the player has won (wins), the process is suspended. It is a process of storing the acquired respective counter values in the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a up to the upper limit number (up to four in the first entrance 64). In addition, each counter value acquired based on the reserved sphere is stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved sphere storage area 203a A process of predicting the result of the hit/miss judgment, the selected variation pattern, etc. is executed in advance. The start winning process (S105) will be described below.

In the start winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered (starting prize) in the first starting port 64 which is the first starting port (S1701). Here, the determination is made using the detection result of the first ball input switch (not shown) that detects the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702). ). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). This is determined whether it is less than 4 which is the upper limit value of the reserved number for the first entrance 64 (that is, whether the reserved number is not stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol holding number counter 203d (S1704). A reserved ball number command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of reserved balls is set (S1705). Various counter values, each of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 is read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is read. Are stored (stored) in the corresponding storage areas of the number of reserved balls (S1706).

Next, based on each of the stored counter values, the determination result of the first special symbol, the determined hit type, and the variation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, a winning information command including a predicted result of the first special symbol, a hit type, and a variation pattern is set (S1708), and this process is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting opening (first entrance opening) 64 and is newly stored, the win/fail judgment result is obtained based on the stored information. Is discriminated before the fluctuation starts and is notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the display mode of the holding sphere is changed (for example, the color of the holding sphere is changed to a different color from the normal color) based on the result of the hit/non-hold judgment stored and displayed, or before the fluctuation starts. It is possible to display an announcement pattern or the like and execute an effect that suggests a win/fail judgment result to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), the variation display and variation time of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, the lower first entrance 64b2 Is a process for controlling the opening operation and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a associated with.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 of FIG. 48), first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S1801). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is being performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. It is included while being done. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S1801: Yes), a new ordinary symbol variation (lottery) cannot be started (executed), so that it is as it is. This process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1801: No), next, whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol changing) If it is determined (S1802) and the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol changing) (S1802: No), that is, even if the current symbol is a normal symbol, variation of the normal symbol If there is no particular condition, that is, if it is determined that it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol fluctuation (lottery), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (holding of variable display in the normal symbol) The number of times M) is acquired (S1803).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203e is larger than 0 (S1804), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere counter 203e is 0. (S1804: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is not 0 (S1804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S1805), and normally. The data stored in the symbol reserve sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S1806).

In the process of S1806, the data stored in the normal symbol holding first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the normal symbol hold first area → execution area, the normal symbol hold second area → normal symbol hold first area, the normal symbol hold third area → normal symbol hold second area, normal symbol hold fourth area → Shift the data in each area, such as the normal pattern hold third area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S1807).

Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S1807 and the normal symbol (second) random number table 202c, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 10", it is determined as the normal symbol hit, and the normal symbol When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "232", Usually it is determined that the design is off.

Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S1808 determines whether or not it is a normal symbol hit (S1809), and when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (S1809: Yes), the winning The display mode is set (S1810), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state.

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S1809: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the processing of S1812, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S1811.

When the process of S1810 or S1812 is completed, in the process of S1811, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary symbol (S1811), and the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol (time saving period). When it is determined to be (state) (S1811: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S1813), and then the universal symbol short variation flag 203t is set to ON. (S1814), the present process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (normally short time state) of the normal symbol (the low probability state of the normal symbol) (S1811: No), the variation time of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device. Is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and this processing ends.

In addition, the general symbol short change flag 203t set to ON in the process of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing the game state at the timing when the lottery for the ordinary symbol is executed, and the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped. It is displayed and is referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a. As a result, it is possible to change the opening operation content of the electric auditors product 64a according to which game state the variation (lottery) start timing of the normal symbol and the opening operation timing of the electric auditors product 64a are.

In this embodiment, the game state at the timing of starting (execution) the variation (lottery) of the normal symbol is configured to be temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may be used. , For example, in the game state storage means that can always store the currently set game state, when it is determined that the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a hit, the game state when the lottery of the ordinary symbol is executed A storage area for temporary storage may be provided. Furthermore, a means for always storing the period in which the normal state is set is provided, and the period stored in the means (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing at which the ordinary symbols are drawn By doing so, it may be possible to determine the game state at the timing when the lottery for the normal symbols is performed. That is, it is sufficient that the storage means capable of storing the currently set game state and the storage means capable of storing at least the game state set at a predetermined timing in the past are provided.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1802, when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1816). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S1810 or the process of S1812 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the processing of S1813, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1816, if it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S1816: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the process of S1817, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S1810, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is missed and the display mode is set by the processing of S1812, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. The period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one place in the blinking display (alternate display of "○" and "x") indicating that the second symbol is changing is turned on. Is configured (determined display). This allows the player to easily recognize that the second symbol is stopped and displayed.

By the process of S1817, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (S2208 of FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device Ends, and in the display mode set in the process of S1810 or the process of S1812, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device.

After finishing the process of S1817, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the regular symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) However, it is determined whether it is a normal symbol hit (S1818). When it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal pattern (S1818: No), the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (S1818: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the universal symbol short change flag 203t is set to ON (S1819).

In the processing of S1819, when it is determined that the universal figure shortage fluctuation flag 203t is not set to ON (is set to OFF), that is, the game state at the timing when this time the regular symbol lottery (fluctuation) is started. When it is determined that it is in the normal state (S1819: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is set to 0.2 seconds and the opening count is set to 1 (S1821), and the process proceeds to S1820. To do.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1819, when it is determined that the universal figure shortage variation flag 203t is set to ON, that is, it is determined that the game state at the timing when the regular symbol lottery (variation) this time is started is the time saving state. In the case of (S1816: Yes), the universal figure short change flag 203t is set to OFF (S1820), and then it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a short-time state (time-shortening) (S1821).

In the process of S1821, when it is determined that the current game state is not the time saving state (S1821: No), the game state at the timing of starting the lottery (variation) of the current normal symbol is the normal state, and the current game state ( Since the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set. It is set to one time (S1824), and the process proceeds to S1823.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the current game state is the time saving state (S1821: Yes), the timing of starting the lottery (variation) of the current normal symbol, and the current game state (the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) Is set to 2 hours, and the opening number of the electric accessory 64a associated with the first lower entrance 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (electric accessory). The long opening operation of 64a is set) (S1822), and the process proceeds to S1823.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the timing of the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol is executed, and the timing of setting the opening operation of the electric auditors product 64a executed based on the winning of the ordinary symbol, Is configured to set the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a only when both are in the time saving state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to strictly set the conditions under which the opening operation, which is advantageous to the player, is set, so, for example, a lottery for normal symbols in a state where the normal state is set as the game state ( (Variation) is executed and the winning is won, and even if the time saving state is set until the variation time (10 seconds) of the ordinary symbol is set, long opening is set as the operation of the electric accessory 64a. There is nothing. Also, in the same way, the winning symbol is won in the variation (lottery) of the ordinary symbol executed in the state where the time saving state is set, and the ordinary state is set as the gaming state until the variation of the ordinary symbol stops. Also in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 64a is not set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively advantageous privilege (long opening of the electric accessory 64a) from being provided to the player.

Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the electric accessory 64a from being long opened in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, the lottery of the special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player is easily executed. The time period can be limited during the short working hours. In addition, in the present embodiment, the game state at the timing when the lottery (variation) of the normal symbols is started and the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set is determined, and the game state set at each timing is set. Although the above-described configuration is used as the configuration for setting the opening operation content of the electric accessory 64a based on this, other configurations may be used.

For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when both the timing when the regular symbol lottery (variation) is started and the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are normal (S1824 in FIG. 48). (Opening operation set in step 1) is set (shorting opening is set), and long opening (opening operation set in S1822 of FIG. 48) may be set in other states. By configuring in this way, the advantage (long opening) is provided to the player even for the normal symbol variation executed in the period before and after the time saving state, which is the game state advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, the time saving state can be made more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time saving state is set as the gaming state, compared to the case where the normal state is set, the variation time of the normal symbol is very short, “10 seconds→3 seconds”, and Since the opening period of the lower first entrance 64b2 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 → 2 seconds x 2", it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first entrance 64b2. Become. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is configured to end, and thus the jackpot game is in the normal state. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed, it is configured so that the time saving state is continuously set unless the time saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, the small amount executed while the time saving state is set. During the winning game, in the small hitting game, the first variable winning device 65 is opened and the electric accessory 64a is long opened, and a plurality of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a, lower first winning opening) It is a specific period during which it becomes easy for a ball to enter 64b2).

By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2, the electric accessory 64a and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are arranged above the first variable winning device 65. , It is preferable that the balls enter the two winning openings (the V winning device 65a and the lower first entrance 64b2) during the small hitting game, whereby the number of prize balls obtainable during the small hitting game Can be increased, and a more advantageous privilege can be given to the player.

Returning to FIG. 48, the description will be continued. In the process of S1820, the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a associated with the lower first entrance 64b2 is set (S1823), and the process is finished. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the processing in S1823, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is opened and closed when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S2206) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S1824 or S1822 are completed.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the game ball passes. If there is, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, the passage of the game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203e (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. Yes (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1903).

Whether the game ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, the game ball normally passes through the ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), normal The value (M) of the symbol holding sphere number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1904).

When the process of S1904 ends, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) described above is set to the empty reserve area of the normal symbol reserve ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 (reservation first It is stored in the first area of the area to the reserved fourth area (S1905), and this processing is terminated. In the process of S1905, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the lower first ball inlet 64b2 provided by winning the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. ..

By indicating the timing at which such a game state is provided based on the preliminary determination result of the universal figure, the player can play the game without missing a more advantageous game state than the normal game state. In addition, when performing an effect using such a preliminary determination result of the universal figure, not only the effect based on the hit determination result of the universal figure, but also the electric accessory 64a is opened when it is determined that the universal figure is a hit. It is good to perform a performance that suggests the timing of By doing so, in the normal game state, a game is aimed at the left side game area of the game board 13, and the lower first entrance 64b2 (the entrance with the electric accessory 64a) is the game board 13. Even if it is arranged on the right side of the game board, it becomes possible to switch to a game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right hitting) before the electric accessory 64a performs the opening operation, which is a normal game state. However, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the possibility that a ball will enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S2001), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

Note that the NMI interrupt process described above is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power interruption occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this startup processing.

This startup process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2101). For example, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S2102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2104), and if it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process proceeds to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105), and if it is not stored (S2105). S2105: No), there is a possibility that the previous process at the time of power shutoff did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S2110.

If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S2106), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S2107: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S2110. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2110). Upon receipt of this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears areas (work areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and is ready to start payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S2111, S2112) of RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed during the startup process, the initialization process (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is executed.

In addition, the initialization processing (S2111, S2112) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S2111, S2112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S2113.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. If there is (S2107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2108). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, the production permission command which permits execution of various productions is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S2113). After that, the state of the probability variation flag 203g and each value of the time saving counter 203f are read (S2114), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). When the process of S2115 ends, the interrupt is permitted (S2116) and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main process, roughly, a counter updating process and a power-off process are executed.

In the main process, first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). External output processing to be transmitted to () is executed (S2201).

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203). The jackpot control process is executed (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 53, but a process of setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the big hit game process (S2204) is executed, the small hit control process (S2205) is executed. This small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. After that, the electric accessory opening/closing process is executed (S2206). In the electric accessory opening/closing process (S2206), the opening/closing process of the electric accessory 64a is executed. Then, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, a symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device is executed (S2208). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes, and at the second symbol display device. The variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is carried out. And the lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is carried out by the value of the second hit random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is hit, the electric accessory 64a is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main processing (S2210). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already elapsed (S2210: Yes), the process proceeds to S2201 and the above-described processes after S2201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S2210: No), the first time is reached during the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2211).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2211). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 and 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffers of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S2202 (S2212).

Here, since the execution time of each processing of S2201 to S2208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and is variably displayed. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the processing of S2209, if the RAM 203 stores the information on the occurrence of power failure (S2209: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 50 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S2213 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2213), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S2214). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S2215), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2216), and the endless loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

Note that the processing of S2209 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S2201 to S2208 is completed, or when the one cycle of the processing of S2211 and S2212 that is performed within the remaining time is completed. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the startup process is completed. The process can be started from S2201. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S2201 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup processing. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S2201). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S2201 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

Next, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S2204). This jackpot control processing (S2204) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 52), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the first specific winning a prize. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

In the jackpot control process (S2204), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S2301). When it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S2301: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2301, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303). .. More specifically, in the process of S2302, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2303, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) starts the jackpot scenario opening. It is determined whether the value corresponds to.

In the processing of S2303, when it is determined that it is the timing of the opening start of the jackpot scenario (start of jackpot) (S2303: Yes), the opening command for jackpot is set (S2304), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the jackpot scenario (S2303: No), it is then determined whether it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

In the processing of S2305, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), the jackpot operation setting processing for setting the opening/closing operation of the specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot is executed ( (S2306), the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2305, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), it is then determined whether or not the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied ( S2307). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in total while the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, or When the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a has passed a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round ending condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a that is currently open is set to be closed in the process of S2308. This process ends. In addition, the determination process of S2305 to S2307 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S2307, when it is determined that the round ending condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the ending timing of the ending effect (S2309), and the ending effect is performed. If it is the start timing of (S2309: Yes), the big hit ending command is set (S2310), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp control in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect indicating the end of the big hit is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2309, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2309: No), it is determined whether it is the jackpot end timing (S2311). Here, the end timing of the big hit refers to the case where the ending effect execution period has elapsed. In the process of S2311, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S2311: Yes), the jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end is executed (S2312), and this process is ended. Details of this jackpot end processing (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the big hit (S2311: No), this processing is ended as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot end processing (S2312) which is one of the jackpot control processing (S2204 of FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. This jackpot end process (S2312) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end, as described above. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot end processing (S2312).

In the jackpot ending process (S2312), first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the winning state storage area 203j (S2401). Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit of this time is a probability big hit (a big hit type in which the probability change flag 203g is set to ON after the big hit game ends) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, determination is performed based on the jackpot type set this time. In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the big hit this time is the probability variation big hit (S2402: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, when it is determined that the current big hit is not the probability-change big hit (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2404. Thereby, the low probability state of the special symbol is set as the game state after the big hit.

Next, a value corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning read out by the processing of S2401 and the jackpot type is set in the time saving counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, "10000" is set to the value of the time saving counter 203f in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next big hit, and "big hit B" When "" is set, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to "100" in order to continue the high-probability state of the normal symbol until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times.

After finishing the processing of S2404, the big hit medium flag 203o is set to OFF and the winning state storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). After that, a state command corresponding to the set gaming state is set (S2406), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type of the jackpot that has been won this time and the gaming state at the time of winning are determined, and two condition elements for setting the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished. The contents of (probability change flag 203g, time saving counter 203f) are set. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to both the jackpot type of the winning jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the small hit control process (S2205) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the content of this small hit control process (S2205).

In the small hit control process (S2205), first, it is determined whether a small hit scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the processing of S1604 of the special figure 2 disengagement stop processing (see FIG. 46) is executed to determine whether the small hit scenario is set. In the processing of S2501, if the small hit scenario is not set (S2501: No), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if the small hit scenario is set (S2501: Yes), the small hit scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the opening start timing of the small hit scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the process of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2503, the counter value of the small hit scenario counter (not shown) is set to the small hit scenario. It is determined whether the value corresponds to the opening start of.

In the processing of S2503, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503: Yes), the opening command for small hits is set (S2504), and the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the opening of the small hit scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start the round of the small hit scenario (S2505).

When it is determined in the process of S2505 that it is the timing to start the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: Yes), the small hit operation setting process is executed (S2506), and the present process is ended. The details of the small hitting operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the time to start the round of the small hit scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are won in total while the specific winning opening 65a is opened, or the opening period of the specific winning opening 65a has passed a predetermined time. If it is, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied.

In the processing of S2507, when it is determined that the round ending condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the processing of S2508, and this processing is executed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round ending condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the timing for starting the ending effect (S2509).

In the processing of S2509, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), the ending command for small hit is set (S2510), and the present processing is ended. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp control in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect indicating the end of the big hit is started on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2509, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit refers to the case where the ending effect execution period has elapsed.

In the process of S2511, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511: Yes), the small hit medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S2512), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small hit (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513), and this process is ended. Details of the second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a small hitting operation setting process (S2506) which is one process in the small hitting control process (S2506 of FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hitting operation setting process (S2506).

In the small hitting operation setting process (S2506), first, the opening scenario in which the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the small hitting to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning opening 65a is set by the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process is ended.

In this way, since each operation of the variable winning a prize device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power failure occurs during the big hit game, the big hit game ends in the middle. It is possible to suppress defects.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the second winning prize process (S2513), which is one of the small hit control processes (S2506 of FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the second winning process (S2513). The second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55), and is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a as described above.

In the second winning process (S2513), first, it is determined whether or not the current round is the valid period (S2701). Here, the round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from when the specific winning opening 65a is set to an open state until the interval period (5 seconds) ends. In the process of S2701, if it is not the round valid period (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, when it is determined that the current round is in the valid period (S2701: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703), and the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. If no winning is detected (S2703: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2703, if the winning of the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703: Yes), the value of the winning counter 203u is updated by adding 1 (S2704). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or more than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203u is equal to or less than the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) ( S2705: No), and this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the value of the payout counter 203u is equal to or more than the upper limit value (5 in the present embodiment) (S2705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (the opening/closing plate 65f1 attached to the specific winning opening 65a) is set to be closed (S2706). Next, the small hit scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and this processing ends.

<Regarding Control Processing of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 72. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

First, with reference to FIG. 58, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S4117 (see FIG. 59) occurs due to the instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous stop") in the current startup processing. It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of () (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 59, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 59), it executes the power-off process in S4117. The power-off processing in progress flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing in-process flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred and the power-off in S4117 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving the power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4003).

The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it is possible to confirm the data destruction of the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power shutdown). Therefore, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, the startup process of this time was started after the momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of S4116 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S4002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S4117, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

In the processing of S4008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 of FIG. 59). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed. Therefore, the process of S4008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and the processing is started in a state where the execution of the power-off processing in S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010), and the status is changed. The status setting area is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the process of step S4008 with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely cut off, for example, so that the process of steps S4004 to S4006 is performed and then step S4008 is performed. This is a case where processing has been started or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset by noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and started. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009 which is a work area clearing process of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S4010).

It should be noted that the clear processing of S4009 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S4004 when the processing of S4004 goes to the processing of S4008 through the processing of S4006. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S4101 was executed last time (S4101), 1 ms. If the above has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4111 without performing the processes of S4102-S4110. In the process of S4101, it is the process related to the display (effect) of S4102 to S4110 that determines whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). , It is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S4111 and the variable display setting processing of S4112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception failure of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S4111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to set the variable display effect without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S4103 to S4113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so that the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108 described later is set (S4103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not being turned on, the process goes to the process of S4105 without performing the power-on notifying process.

In the process of S4105, the customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display updating process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting production, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the setting of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is a command as a display control device. Sent to 114.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is dealt with. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this processing, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, a ramp edit process is then executed (S4108), and then a sound edit/output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4109, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4110). After this, the process moves to S4111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing/output process of S4109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

After the processing of S4110, various counter updating processing is executed (S4111), and the processing proceeds to S4112. Details of the various counter update processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After that, a command determination process (S4112) is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S4113. Details of this command determination processing (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4113, in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed by the display control device 114. The variable display setting process, which is a process to be set for transmission to the user, is executed. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

When the process of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off process is executed (S4117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the command determination processing (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 59) performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. .. Details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed. It is determined whether the 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4202), and this process is ended. Details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4201, when it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command is received (S4201: No), whether or not a state command is received from the main control device 110. Is determined (S4203). When it is determined that the status command has been received (S4203: Yes), the status command processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. The details of this status command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, but based on the status command output from the main controller 110, the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 (normal status, probability variation status, latent probability). The process of setting (state) to the state setting area 223j is executed.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4203, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206), and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received. The special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern command is used to extract the fluctuation pattern type (S4207), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format capable of identifying that it is the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. In the case of notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol) Used).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command is not received (S4205: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S4208). The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the processing of S4208, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4209), and the special feature is received. The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command shown in FIG. 2 (S4210), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format in which it can be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and in a variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. In the case of notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting the variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol) Used).

In the process of S4208, when it is determined that the special pattern 2 variation pattern command is not received (S4208: No), it is determined whether the reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110 (S4211). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command is received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received reserved ball number command (that is, the first The variable number of reserved symbols for special symbols) is extracted, and the value of the first special symbol reserved number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value ( (S4212), the present process ends. Since the present embodiment does not have a configuration for storing the lottery of the second special symbol (special feature 2) on hold, the value of the first special symbol (special feature 1) reserved sphere number counter 223c is set in the process of S4212. Only the process of updating is executed.

Here, since the number of reserved balls command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the balls win the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), every time there is a start prize, the process of S4212 is performed. The value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, but is started. If the number of reserved balls command is notified based on the winning, the value of the first special symbol holding counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected, the first special symbol holding ball number of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d.

In addition, in the processing of S4211, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213). In the processing of S4213, when it is determined that the prize information command has been received (S4213: Yes), the information of the received prize information command (whether or not the special symbol is drawn, the winning type, and the variation pattern) is associated with the prize information. The storage area 223b is set (S4214), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4213, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether or not a hit related command has been received from the main control device (S4216). In the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit related command is received (S4216: Yes), the hit related process is executed (S4216), and the present process is ended. Details of the hit related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63, but as a result of the special symbol lottery, a big hit game or a small hit game executed when a big hit or a small hit is won. Processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to perform display is performed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether the remaining short time count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4217). In the processing of S4217, when it is determined that the remaining short time count command has been received (S4217: Yes), the remaining count update processing (S4218) is executed. The details of the remaining number update processing (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 66, but for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 based on the remaining short time count command output from the main control device 110. A process of setting the contents of the effect display is executed.

In the process of S4217, when it is determined that the remaining short time count command is not received (S4217: No), it is determined whether the temporary stop related command is received from the main control device 110 (S4219). In the process of S4219, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command is received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4220), and the present process ends. Details of the temporary stop-related processing (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but processing for determining the remaining time of the special figure change time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received. Then, when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command or the special figure 2 fluctuation restart command is received, a process of setting an effect (additional effect) to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4219, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command is not received (S4219: No), the process according to the other command is executed (S4221), and the present process is ended. In the process of S4221, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the process corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is executed. Is set to the display control device 114.

As described above, in the command determination process (S4112 of FIG. 60) executed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment, the process of determining whether the status command is received (see S4203 of FIG. 60) is executed. , Which is arranged before the process (see S4205 and S4208 of FIG. 60) of determining whether the variation pattern command of each special symbol is received.

With such a configuration, when the variation pattern command and the state command are simultaneously output from the main control device 110, that is, in the first special symbol variation start process of the main control device 110 (see S208 in FIG. 33). Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 of FIG. 33) is executed, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is set, and in the game state update process (see S308 of FIG. 33) executed thereafter, the game is played. Even when the state command indicating that the state has changed is set, the game state currently set on the voice lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, when the jackpot of special figure 1 is won in the state where the probability variation state is set and the latent probability state is set during the variation of the jackpot, it is determined that the latent state is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is possible to easily set a variation effect (see FIG. 7A) corresponding to a variation pattern command that causes a jackpot variation in the determined state.

Note that, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment, when the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command is executed before the determination processing of the state command, the variation pattern command corresponding to the above-described jackpot variation is changed from the probability variation. Only the information indicating that the jackpot is won by the first special symbol lottery in the state is received first, and the variable display corresponding to the received content is set. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute the variation display indicating that the latent probability state has been set at the same time when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started. Since the variation display indicating that the latent state has been set is delayed in this way, the timing of notifying the player that the right-handed game is to be performed is delayed, and thus the player feels uncomfortable. I'll give you a problem.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the main controller 110 side, a process of varying the game state after the jackpot win/failure determination (see S306 in FIG. 33) and the variation pattern setting (S307 in FIG. 33). While the (gaming status update processing (S308 of FIG. 33)) is executed, the voice lamp control device 113 side first executes the processing (S4204 of FIG. 60) for determining the current gaming status, and thereafter. The variable display corresponding to the variation pattern is set. Therefore, it is possible to surely prevent the variable display corresponding to the game state before that from being set and executed even though the latent state is set.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 side is configured to define the reception order of various commands output from the main control device 110, so that it is necessary to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. Can be reduced. Therefore, the control load of main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a stop type command reception process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the stop type command reception process (S4202). The stop type command reception process (S4202) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described.

In the stop type command reception processing (S4202), first, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received corresponding to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, the stop type (big hit A to big hit G, small hit A to small hit C, out, reach out, etc.) is extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command (S4302), and the book The process ends.

The stop type extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. The stop type is stored so that it can be identified. Thereby, even if the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) start changing at the same time, it becomes possible to manage the respective stop types, and execute appropriate change display. You can

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the state command processing (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this status command processing (S4204). This state command processing (S4204) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. Details of the status command processing (S4204) will be described below.

In this state command process (S4204), a process of setting the current game state in the state setting area 223j based on the state command output from the main controller 110 is executed, and when the game state shifts to the latent state. The process for setting the effect (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6B)) for notifying the player that the latent state is set, and the game state is shifted to the normal state. In this case, processing for clearing various flags and counters used to display the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

In the state command processing (S4204), first, the game state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223 (S4401). That is, it is determined in which game state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the game state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402). When it is determined that the game state before receiving the state command is not the latent state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating transition to the latent state (S4403). In the process of S4403, if the received command is a state command indicating the transition to the latent probability state (S4403: Yes), a latent probability notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent probability state is set (S4404). Then, the value corresponding to the game state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4406.

On the other hand, in the process of 4402, when it is determined that the game state before receiving the state command is the latent state (S4402: Yes), or in the process of S4403, the received command shifts to the latent state. If it is not the status command shown (S4403: No), the process moves to S4406.

Next, it is determined whether the received command is a status command indicating transition to the normal status (S4406). When it is determined that the received command is not the state command indicating the transition to the normal state (S4406: No), the processes of S4407 to S4410 are skipped, the process of S4411 described later is executed, and this process is ended. .. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is the state command indicating the shift to the normal state (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether or not the card notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4407: Yes), the value of the prize ball number counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), the card notification flag 223q and the card notification flag are possible. The rush display flag 223t is set to OFF for 223s (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining variable time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), and the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the other state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411). This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, when it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to OFF (S4407: No), the processes of S4408 and S4409 are skipped, the processes of S4410 and S4411 are executed, and The process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a hit related process (S4216), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related process (S4216). In this hit related process, as a result of the special symbol lottery, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to perform an effect display corresponding to the jackpot game or the jackpot game executed when the jackpot or the jackpot is won. This is performed, and processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

In addition, when a prize ball number command for indicating the number of prize balls acquired during the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) is received, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated and accumulated. Based on the result, processing for displaying the card forgetting attention screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

In the hit-related processing (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) has received the jackpot-related command (S4501). When it is determined that the received command is the jackpot-related command (S4501: Yes), the jackpot-related processing is executed (S4502), and this processing is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, a jackpot related process (S4502), which is one process in the hit related process (S4216 of FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related process (S4502). In the jackpot-related processing, the processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and when the jackpot is won, the main controller Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S4502), first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received in the hit-related process (S4216) has received a jackpot start command (S4601). When the jackpot start command is received (S4601: Yes), the jackpot start command for display is set (S4602), and this processing is ended. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the big hit start command for display, the display control device 114 displays an effect suggesting the start of the big hit on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, when it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S4603). When the round number command is received (S4603: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S4604), and this processing is ended. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number-of-rounds command, the display-number-of-rounds command is set based on the received number-of-rounds command. In order to reduce the capacity of command data transmitted from the control device 110, when the configuration for transmitting the information indicating that a new round is started from the main control device 110 as a round update command, the audio lamp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the 113, a round number storage counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and based on the value of the round number storage counter, the voice lamp control device 113 side outputs the current round. The number may be calculated and the display round number command may be set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4603, when it is determined that the round number command is not received (S4603: No), it is determined whether the ending command is received (S4605). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4605: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S4605: Yes), the ending command for display is set (S4606), and it is determined whether the card notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4607). When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), a display ending command not including the card notification is set (S4608). That is, the processing for not displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4607, when it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S4607: No), the jackpot type of this time is jackpot A or jackpot B. It is determined whether or not (S4609). When it is determined that the jackpot type this time is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: Yes), a display ending command including card notification is set (S4610), and the card notification flag 223q is set to ON. Yes (S4611). That is, the process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10A on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot A or the jackpot B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification possible flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). When it is determined that the card notification possible flag 223s is set to ON (S4612: Yes), the card notification possible flag 223s is set to OFF (S4613), the above-described processing of S4610 to S4611 is executed, and The process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4612, when it is determined that the card notification possible flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the above-described processing of S4608 is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, in the jackpot-related processing (S4502 of FIG. 64), as various display modes displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot game, game information regarding the jackpot game being executed (opening, In addition to the processing for setting the display contents of the ending and the number of rounds), the processing for determining whether or not to display the card forgetting attention screen (see FIG. 10A) is executed.

This card forgetting alert screen is a card (borrow a ball to the player when the player wins a predetermined amount (for example, 250) of prize balls in the game (big hit game, small hit game) This is a notification mode for calling attention so as not to forget the valuable medium used at the time). In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned card when the number of prize balls obtained during the period from the normal state to winning the jackpot and the transition to the normal state again (continuation advantageous period) meets a predetermined amount It is configured to display the forgetfulness alert screen.

Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, a jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot A, which can easily obtain a prize ball exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) in the jackpot (first hit) won in the normal state. If you win the jackpot B), the card notification that displays the card forgetting caution screen is displayed at the end of the jackpot game, and if you win the other jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D), the card notification is executed It is configured not to.

With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the situation where the player forgets the card and displays the card forgetting caution screen to the player who has not won a predetermined amount of prize balls, and the player can continue to play while borrowing balls. It is possible to prevent the player who plays the game from feeling uncomfortable.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the big hit game, the small hitting game can be frequently set so that a game state (latent probability state) can be set easily. Therefore, by repeating the small hitting game, the player can A predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls may be obtained. Therefore, the number of award balls (number of award balls paid out during the advantageous period) accumulated by the player during the advantageous continuation period is accumulated, and when the accumulated result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), it is executed at that time. It is configured to display a card forgetting alert screen on the ending screen of the big hit game or the small hit game. This allows the player to display the card forgetting caution screen at an appropriate timing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the card forgetting alert screen is configured to be notified only once during one advantageous continuation period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the card forgetting attention screen from being frequently displayed, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. The method of displaying the card forgetting caution screen is not limited to the contents of the present embodiment, and for example, a measuring means for measuring an advantageous duration is provided, and the elapsed time after the previous card forgetting caution screen is displayed. When the time exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), the card forgetting caution screen may be displayed again. In this case, since the card forgetting warning screen is displayed once (because the display condition for displaying the card forgetting warning screen has already been satisfied), during the special symbol change period (for example, during the advantageous continuation period) It is advisable to display the card forgetful attention screen when the variation pattern of which the variation time is 5 seconds or more is selected.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current game situation by using the player's fixed concept that the card forgetting caution screen is displayed after the jackpot game is over. Further, as a method of achieving the same effect, the big hit game may display the card forgetting attention screen using the opening period of the small hit game.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4501, if it is determined that the received command is not the jackpot-related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command has received the jackpot-related command (S4503). When it is determined that the received command is the small hitting related command (S4503: Yes), the small hitting related processing (S4504) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, the small hit related process (S4504) which is one of the hit related processes (S4216 of FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hitting related process (S4504). In the small hitting related processing, the processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the effect display corresponding to the small hitting game executed when the small hit is won, and when the small hit is won. , Processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from main controller 110 is executed.

In the small hitting related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether the hit related command received in the hitting related process (S4216) has received the small hitting start command (S4701). When the small hitting start command is received (S4701: Yes), the small hitting start command for display is set (S4702), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4701, when it is determined that the received command is not the small hit start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not the ending command (S4703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is the ending command (S4703: Yes), the display ending command is set (S4704), and it is determined whether the card notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4705). .. When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705: Yes), a display ending command that does not include the card notification is set (S4706), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4705, when it is determined that the card notification completed flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification possible flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). When it is determined that the card notification possible flag 223s is set to ON (S4707: Yes), the card notification possible flag 223s is set to OFF (S4708), and the display ending command including the card notification is set ( (S4709), the card notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4710), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4707, the card notification possible flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the above-described processing of S4706 is executed, and this processing is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even in the small hitting game that does not satisfy the display condition for displaying the card forgetting attention screen in one game, after winning the jackpot in the normal state, If the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the game period (advantageous continuation period) until the normal state is set again satisfies the display condition (for example, the number of acquired prize balls reaches 250), a small hit It is configured to display the card forgetting attention screen even after the game is over. This allows the player to display the card forgetting caution screen at an appropriate timing.

Returning to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the received command is not the small hitting related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether or not a prize ball command is received (S4505). When it is determined that the received command is not the prize ball command (S4505: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is the prize ball command (S4505: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball counter 223u (S4506), and then the card It is determined whether the notified flag 223q is set to ON (S4507). When it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to ON (S4507: No), it is determined whether the value of the prize ball number counter 223u added in the process of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). If it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter 223u after the addition is 250 or more (S4508), the card notification possible flag is set to ON (S4509), and the display prize ball number command is set (S4510). , This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4507, when it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or in the process of S4508, the added prize ball number counter 223u is less than 250. If determined (S4508: No), the process of S4509 described above is skipped, the process of S4510 is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the state command process (see S4204 of FIG. 62) determines that the normal state is set, and the value of the prize ball number counter 223u is cleared. The number of prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number command received during the period up to (advantageous continuation period) is accumulated by the prize ball number counter 223u. Then, at the end of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) (at the ending screen display timing), the card forgetting caution screen is displayed according to the value of the prize ball number counter 223u.

As a result, for example, when the jackpot (first hit) that triggers the setting of the advantageous duration is a jackpot C (a jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a predetermined amount (250 shots) of prize balls in one jackpot game) Can display a card forgetting caution screen when a small hit game is won or a big hit C is won again during an advantageous continuation period.

Next, the remaining number update processing (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the content of the remaining number update processing (S4218). This remaining number update processing (S4218) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the remaining short time count command from the main control device 110. Based on the reception of the, the processing for updating the contents set in the remaining short time count area 223k, the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p is executed.

In the remaining number update process (S4218), first, it is determined whether or not a remaining short time count command is received from the main control device 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the remaining short time count command has not been received (S4801: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4801, when it is determined that the remaining short time count command has been received (S4801: YES), the display short time count command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220) will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220). In this temporary stop related process (S4220), the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure variation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, and the third figure display device when the special figure 1 variation restart command is received The process of setting the effect (additional effect) executed in 81 is executed.

When the temporary stop related process (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received (S4901), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command is not received (S4901: No), the variable restart process is performed. (S4902) is executed. Details of the fluctuation restart processing (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. On the other hand, in the processing of S4901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received (S4901: Yes), the remaining variation time of the currently set variation pattern is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether or not the residual fluctuation time calculated in the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904), and when it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the residual fluctuation time is stored in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o. A period A indicating that the time is short is set (S4905), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4904, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then the remaining fluctuation period is 2 seconds or more and is longer than 15 seconds. If it is determined to be small (S4906), and if it is determined to be 2 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), the period B indicating that the remaining variation time information storage area 223o is a normal remaining variation time. Is set (S4907), and the process proceeds to S4902.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4906, when it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not less than 15 seconds (exceeds 15 seconds) (S4906: No), it indicates that the remaining fluctuation time is long in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o. The period C is set (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4902. In this way, the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) that is executed when the special figure fluctuation resumes is calculated at the timing when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special figure fluctuation time is interrupted), and it corresponds to that period. By setting the information to be set, an effect (additional effect) suitable for the remaining fluctuation time can be executed without delay at the timing of restarting the special figure fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, the period information (period A to period C) set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o is different depending on the variation time (remaining variation period) executed when the special figure variation restarts. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shorter the remaining time, the easier it is to choose the period A, and the longer the remaining time, the easier it is to choose the period C. The ratio may be configured to be different according to the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and the period A to the period C may be arranged in order for each division. It may be configured.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional effect executed based on the period information set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o and the remaining variation time. The fun of predicting variable time can be provided.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the fluctuation restart processing (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation restart processing (S4902). This fluctuation restart process (S4902) is a process for setting an additional effect that is executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received.

When the fluctuation restart processing (S4902) is executed, it is first determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001), and if it is determined that it has not been received (S5001: No), this processing ends. .. On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received (S5001: Yes), then the remaining fluctuation time information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read (S5002). ), the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection table 222c based on the read remaining change time information and the additional effect counter 223i (S5003). Next, a display additional effect command corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), the information set in the remaining variation time information storage area o is cleared (S5005), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special figure fluctuation is interrupted, the special figure fluctuation is restarted after the normal effect (the effect display executed when the special figure fluctuation is started) is finished. The swing effect of swinging and displaying the third symbol is executed in the period until it is performed, and when the special figure fluctuation is restarted, the additional effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation period (remaining fluctuation period) after the restart is executed. However, other configurations may be used.

For example, a production period determination unit that determines a normal production period in which the normal production is executed is provided, and when the production period determination unit determines that the normal production period has ended, the additional production is configured to be executed. Good. With such a configuration, since the normal effect and the additional effect can be continuously executed, it is possible to provide a more suitable effect display to the player. In this case, an error may occur between the end timing of the additional effect period in which the additional effect is executed and the special figure fluctuation period after restart, but the additional effect is continuously executed during the error period. Alternatively, a swinging effect of swingingly displaying the third symbol may be executed. Further, an error period discriminating unit for discriminating the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period discriminating unit discriminates that the error period is a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) or more, the additional effect is executed again. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S4113). The variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is performed on the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set, and the process of transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (big hit A to big hit G), a process for setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop kind command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop kind is executed.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), it means that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the processing of S5105 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current game state is the latent state (S5103). When it is determined that the current game state is the latent probability state (S5103: Yes), the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, details of the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. To do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104). In this variation display setting for special figure 1 (S5104), when the current gaming state is the latent probability state, based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, for displaying the first special symbol A process of setting the latent probability variation pattern command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104), first, the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read (S5201), and the value corresponding to the variation time read in the process of S5201 is set to the sub special figure 1 The variable time counter 223m is set (S5202). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5203). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), the display rush rush command is set (S5204), and the rush displayed flag 223t is set to ON (S5205). ). On the other hand, in the process of S5203, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation counter is larger than 0 (S5203: Yes), the processes of S5204 and S5205 described above are skipped, and the process proceeds to S5206. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a latent latent variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set (S5206), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. In the process of S5103, when it is determined that the current game state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S4205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60). The variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated (S5105). The variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is configured to be distinguishable from the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the high-order 2 bits of the high-order byte of the display variation pattern command of 2-byte configuration is "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if "01", the second special symbol. Is configured to indicate that

The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol set in S5104 or S5105 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and the command output process of the main process (see FIG. 59) ( It transmits to the display control apparatus 114 by S4102). In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed.

With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the holding ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the holding ball of the first special symbol). In accordance with the display setting), the data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5106).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the processing of S5111 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S5108). Next, the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109) is executed.

Here, the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process (S5109).

In the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read (S5301), and the read variation is read. A value corresponding to the time is set in the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether or not the current game state is a latent probability state (S5303). When it is determined that the latent state is established (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush display completion flag 223t is ON (S5304). When it is determined that the rush display completion flag 223t is not on (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than 1 second (S5306). When it is determined that the remaining time is less than 1 second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5308.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5306, when it is determined that the read remaining time is 1 second or more (S5306: No), the display rush rush command is set (S5307), and the rush display flag 223t is set to ON. Yes (S5308). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a latent latent variation pattern command for display of the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5303, when it is determined that the current game state is not the latent state (S5303: No), or when it is determined in the process of S5304 that the rush display completion flag 223t is set to ON. (S5304: Yes), the processing of S5305 to S5308 described above is skipped, the processing of S5309 is executed, and the present processing ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the latent state is set in the state setting area 223j, when the variable display of the first special symbol is set, that is, during the jackpot variation period, the latent state is a latent state. When setting the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and when it is determined that the special figure 2 is not changing Is configured to set a rush rush command as an effect mode of variable display. That is, the screen (see FIG. 7A) is displayed to notify the player that the rush has entered the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the target special figure 1 fluctuation is executed. doing.

On the other hand, when setting the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation that becomes a latent state during the jackpot variation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special symbol If it is determined that No. 2 is changing, a screen indicating that the latent state is in progress (see FIG. 6(b)) is displayed without setting the display rush rush command as an effect mode of variable display. It is configured to display.

As a result, when a right-hit game is performed at the time when the screen (see FIG. 7(a)) for setting the display rush rush command and notifying the player that the rush has been rushed is displayed, immediately It is possible to execute a lottery for the second special symbol in the latent probability state, and it is possible to provide the player with a game that does not cause a feeling of strangeness.

In addition, when setting the variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation that becomes a latent state during the jackpot variation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changing, and the special figure 2 If it is determined that the change in the special figure 2 is being changed, the change in the special figure 2 being changed may be forcibly ended, and a new change in the special figure 2 may be executed.

It should be noted that the timing of setting the display rush rush command when the game state shifts to the latent state while the special map 2 is changing is not limited to the contents of the present embodiment, and the player can be provided with a game that does not feel uncomfortable. It is sufficient if it has a configuration that enables For example, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation that is changing at the timing when the latent state is set is ended, the display rush rush command may be set, or the fluctuation at the timing when the latent state is set. The remaining time until the change of the special figure 2 in the middle is determined, and the display rush rush command may be set when the determination result becomes a predetermined time (1 second). In this case, the predetermined time to be set is required from the time when the player operates the operation handle 51 to start the right-handed game until the ball shot by the right-handed game enters the second entrance 640. The time may be shorter than the period, and may be set appropriately according to the configuration of the game board 13.

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. The variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). It transmits to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the display variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the special pattern corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern of the second special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbols is performed. Then, in the winning information storage area 223b, the data corresponding to the second special symbol is shifted (S5110).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S5111). When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set to ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5111: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), if the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on. Sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to off, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to off (S5112).

In the processing of S4201 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this processing ends. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, based on the stop type, the display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set. If the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, the display special map 2 stop type command for notifying the stop type to the display control device 114 is set based on the stop type. .. It should be noted that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 notifies the big hit type when a big hit occurs, and notifies even if the determination result is out of order. To be done. If the determination result is out, the stop type is not referred, and the out symbol is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 72, various counter update processing (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the various counter update processing (S4111). This various counter update process (S4111 in FIG. 72) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the values of various counter values provided in the RAM 223 are stored. This is the process of executing the update.

In the various counter update processing (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401). If it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, in the process of S5401, when it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S5401: No), the process of S5402 is skipped and S5403 is executed. Process shifts to. Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S5404).

Next, the value of the sub special figure 1 variation time counter 223m and the sub special figure 2 variation time counter 223n are read (S5405), and the value of the sub special figure 1 variation time counter 223m is changed to the sub special figure 2 variation time counter 223n. Is subtracted to calculate the remaining time (S5406). The remaining time calculated by the processing of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), the values of other various counters are decremented by 1 (S5408), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S5403, when it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S5403: No), the above S5404 to S5407 are skipped. , S5408 is executed and the present process is terminated.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of a command or the detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply device 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d operates at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions in the boot program from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since this is a memory capable of reading data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, subsequently, according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S6103). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing required for the boot processing (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S6001 in FIG. 73) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, the control program of the predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot processing that should be processed subsequent to the processing of S6102. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S6101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S6101. Alternatively, the processing of S6103 to S6105 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S6102.

As a result, even when the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and thus reduces the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot process time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 73. When the boot process is completed, the initialization process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, the work RAM 233 is provided with various flags, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether or not the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). The transfer instruction includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included, and the image controller 237 follows the transfer instruction so that the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

When all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, then the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller, in accordance with this transfer instruction, outputs image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S6005). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S7502 in FIG. 85A).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) (not shown) is simply drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)). Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75(b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, like the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person related to the hall, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and therefore, it is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately check that the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from being deteriorated.

In the display controller 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start prize) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and the start instruction of the variation effect is given. When it is received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation is performed. You can direct. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, and it takes a long time to transfer the NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on also becomes long. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery. Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S6005, the interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes the infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 75(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so not the power-on image but the normal effect image is the third symbol. In order to display on the display device 81, the command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then the display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination processing (S6302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when it is determined to start the variation effect, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and the stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

In the display setting process (S6303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. The content of is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect or the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305). The drawing list shown in FIG. 29 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list (S6306). The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As the counter updated by the process of S6307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside, complete disconnection) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S6301: YES), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S6304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81, details of the above-mentioned command determination processing (S6302) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 76, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S6303) that the new command is processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the processing returns to S6401.

Details of the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 77A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This fluctuation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation is always made in the main controller 110 for several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command judgment processing is performed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the processing of S6501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, in reality, fluctuations longer than the set display data table are set. Even if the main control unit 110 has instructed the time-varying change effect, as will be described later, after the change effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control unit 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player can easily see the third symbol display device 81 in the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S6505), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S6502. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in step S3, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any one of the big hits A to G, the small hits A to C, out of reach, and out completely) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S6601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to ON (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S6602 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S6603, and the identified stop The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of a change at a distance of several seconds or more, so that no two or more display stop type commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit" is displayed, and the player may misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "special big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the “special symbol jackpot”, the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S6409) and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command process (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. The opening command process is a process corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display round command is displayed. If there is a use round number command (S6410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S6801). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S6802).

Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the displaying ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S6904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display rush entry command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and display is performed. If there is a command rush rush command (S6414: Yes), the rush rush command process is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the rush rush command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80A is a flowchart showing the rush rush command processing. The rush rush command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rush rush command processing, first, a rush rush display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush rush effect indicated by the display rush rush command is determined, and the determined rush rush display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. And sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6932).

Next, based on the rush rush display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6931, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6935), the rush rush command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display rush rush command (S6414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an additional effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the additional effect. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), the additional effect command process is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Details of the additional effect command process (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a flowchart showing the additional effect command processing. This additional effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the additional display effect command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the additional effect command processing, first, an additional effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional effect indicated by the display additional effect command is determined, and the determined additional effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , And sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Then, the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S6952).

Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6951, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmation display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6955), the additional effect command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the description will be continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no additional display effect command for display (S6416: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed command includes the back image change command (S6418), If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the back image change command process (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. This back image change command process is a process for executing a process corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag 233w for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7503) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7001). ). Then, among the bits of the back surface image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back surface image type (back surface A, B), the bit corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is set to ON, and other The bit corresponding to the rear image type is set to OFF (S7002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is turned on, the changed back image type is selected from the back image determination flag 233x set by the process of S7002. Identify.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that either the back surface A or B is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, from the back surface image determination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored ( The resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, the player does not receive more than one back image change command within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some commands may change due to the influence of noise, and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S7002, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, it is also possible to extract an arbitrary one back image change command and turn on the back image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 76. In the processing of S6418, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S6420), and there is an error command. If (S6420: Yes), the error command process is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81(b). FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7101). Then, of the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S7102), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S7102, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S7102 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly understand the occurrence status of the error.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 76. If it is determined in the process of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S6422), and the process returns to S6401.

In the processing of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), and the processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

The simple command determination process (S6308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination processing, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. While extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 77(b)) corresponding to the respective commands, other commands are Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84, details of the above-described display setting process (S6303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, first, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7201: No). ), it is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination process, the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S7202), and then S7203 to S7204. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is ON (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations that are set to ON The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task process (S6304), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are set for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S7203: No), the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. In this pointer updating process, the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that the pointer 233f is incremented by one each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is the demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, and therefore the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S7403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( (S7406), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, for example, when the variable display data table is set, the address immediately before the End information is written. Since the drawing content of is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 82, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering image developed in the process of S7206 together with the warning image previously developed, and for each sprite. , Various display parameters such as display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). Then, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S7209: No), the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d because the finalized display effect has not yet been produced and the finalized display effect is to be produced. The data is set (S7210), and then the Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S7211). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7212), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the last stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt process.

Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. Further, by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S6304), until the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7215, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S7216). If the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so that a fixed time has elapsed from the end of the fixed display effect. After that, processing for displaying the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e, thereby clearing the contents (S7218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the fixed display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set in the.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag is ON (S7216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the production time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends. The process of setting the display data table that defines that the image is stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S6305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7502) that is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting processing (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S7601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S7601: Yes). ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7602). In the process of S7602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. If it is determined by the processing in S7602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7602: No), the image transfer processing is being continued in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Further, as a result of the processing in S7601, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the processing proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S7603). A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Then, it is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S6308 of FIG. 75(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 of FIG. 75(b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose reading speed is slow at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a normal image transfer setting process (S7503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S7205) of the display setting process (S6303) previously executed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S7703, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to step S7705.

If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S7702 (S7702: No), the processes of S7703 and S7704 are skipped and the process proceeds to S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after the image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237, and when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the processing in S7706 that the transfer processing is not completed (S7706: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S7706: Yes), the process moves to S7707. Further, as a result of the processing of S7705, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S7708), the sprite image data indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S7703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). If the back image change flag 233w is not on but on (S7709: No), there is no image data to start the transfer, and thus the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is turned on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag 233w is turned off (S7710), it is provided for each back image type. The image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the ON state is specified from the back image discrimination flag 233x, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S7711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag 233x in the ON state, and the transfer destination ( The head address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the processing of S7713, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the processing of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S7713 (S7713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S7713, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S7714). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transfer here). The sub address provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the big hit stop type, the image data used in the fanfare production can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, if the back image of the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified in accordance with the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, the transfer data table defines transfer data information so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the above-described drawing process (S6306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (FIG. 29) is generated (S7801). That is, in the processing of S7801, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task processing (S6304). Then, the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image for one frame, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is set to the detail for each sprite. As the detailed drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting it in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process of S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed every 20 milliseconds while the drawing processing of the image for one frame is performed.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured to be simultaneously executable in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the state where the variable display of 1 is executed, other variable display may be configured to be unexecutable. Then, if there is a reserved ball, the variable display may be performed in order from the reserved ball with the oldest winning prize in time. With this configuration, the control can be simplified, and the processing load can be reduced.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, and normal state of normal symbol), probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, and high probability of normal symbol) State), time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, and high probability state of normal symbol) and latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, and normal state of normal symbol) Provide four game states There is. The latent state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player.

That is, when the latent state is set, the variation time for showing the lottery of the second special symbol that tends to be a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol is set to another game state. By prescribing it so that it is shorter than the case in which the lottery is performed, the lottery that is advantageous to the player can be most efficiently executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a novel game property in which he expects the player to expect the latent state to be set.

Specifically, in the lottery for the second special symbol, in addition to the big hit, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened even when it is a small hit, so that the variation time of the second special symbol is short In the state, prize balls can be continuously increased. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that it will be in the latent state. In a general gaming machine, the probability variation state is the most advantageous game state, but in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is more advantageous than the probability variation state, so that it is possible to provide a novel game property.

Further, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called, simultaneous). The variable method is adopted). As a result, even when the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the lottery of the special symbol can be executed more efficiently. it can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing simultaneously, when one of them stops fluctuating with a big hit or a small hit stop symbol, the other fluctuation display shows the remaining fluctuation time or lottery. Regardless of the result, it is stopped and displayed with a stop pattern that is off. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the problem that the other variable display is confirmed and displayed as a hit or a small hit during the execution of the big hit or the small hit, and the big hit and the small hit are overlapped and started.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the probability change state (high-probability state of special symbols, high-probability state of normal symbols) is set, when variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed. , The high-probability state of the normal symbol is transitioned to the low-probability state, and the game state is configured to transition from the probability variation state to the latent probability state. While this latent probability state is set, the variable display (dynamic display) period for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to be short, and therefore a lot of second special symbol lottery can be executed. It will be a possible period (special figure 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

In this embodiment, since it is configured to win the small hit with a probability of about 1/2 in the lottery of the second special symbol, during the period when the latent state is set as the game state, the small hit The small hit game that is executed when the player wins is frequently executed, and the game state is advantageous for the player who can obtain many prize balls (special state 2 advantageous state).

As described above, the period in which the latent state is set in the present embodiment (special figure 2 variation advantageous period) is during the variation display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that is won in the probability variation state. Since it is (special map 1 jackpot variation), when the special map 2 advantageous state ends, the jackpot game is executed. In this way, since a plurality of states that are advantageous to the player (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot gaming state) are continuously set, various benefits can be continuously given to the player. You can

Further, in the present embodiment, if one of the special symbols (special map 2) is won as a small hit and the small hit game is executed, the variation of the other special symbol (special map 1) is interrupted (variation display period). Measurement is suspended), and when the small hit game is finished, the measurement of the suspended variable display period is restarted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variation advantageous period from being subtracted during the small hit game, regardless of the number of small hit games executed during the special figure 2 variation advantageous period. It is possible to provide the player with a fixed special figure 2 variation advantageous period.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special symbol 1), the other special symbol (special symbol 2) which is changing, a stop display mode indicating a deviation It is configured to force stop. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where the small hit game is executed during the big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control content for the variation of the other special symbol is changed according to the lottery result of the one special symbol. Specifically, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a big hit (lottery result that can give the first benefit to the player), the variation of the other special symbol is that the lottery result is out. Stop display in the display mode shown, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a small hit (lottery result that can give a second privilege different from the first privilege to the player), fluctuation of the other special symbol Is stopped until the second bonus is given (until the small hit game is finished), and is restarted after the second bonus is given. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is out of alignment, the variation of the other special symbol is executed as it is.

With such a configuration, based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the lottery content of the other special symbol (lottery result, period until the lottery result is displayed) can be changed, and the player's A variety of game play can be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, if the lottery result of one of the special symbols is a lottery result that can give a privilege to the player, the control content for the other special symbol fluctuation is changed according to the content of the privilege. Therefore, for example, in the case of the lottery result which gives the player the most advantageous privilege (big hit game), the lottery result corresponding to the change of the other special symbol being executed is the lottery result which gives the privilege. Even if it does, the fluctuation is forcibly stopped so that the lottery result will be out of order, the excessive privilege is suppressed from being given to the player, and the lottery result with less privilege than the jackpot game (small hit) In the case of, in order to prevent the bonus based on the lottery of the other special symbol from being given during the small hitting game, without changing the lottery result corresponding to the variation of the other special symbol being executed, the variable display It is possible to suspend only the measurement of the period.

Therefore, in a state in which a plurality of special symbols (special figure 1, special figure 2) are changing at the same time, the player is given the least advantageous bonus, and the most advantageous bonus given later is given. It is possible to suppress the situation that the player is not allowed to do so, and it is possible to prevent the situation that the player feels uncomfortable.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the latent state is set as the game state, the short period (0.5 seconds) of the variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special diagram 2), It is configured so that a small hit game can be frequently executed. Then, the condition that the latent probability state is set as the game state, if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the state where the probability variation state is set, the condition that the latent probability state ends is the first special symbol In the case where the big hit game is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the big hit, the big hit game is executed after the end of the first advantageous period which is advantageous to the player who frequently executes the small hit game. The second game period is set. Therefore, the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period, which are advantageous to the player, can be continuously set, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started during the probability variation state, the latent state is set from the time of the jackpot variation start, and the latent state In the state in which is set, the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be efficiently performed.

Therefore, at the same time when the latent probability state is set (based on the set latent potential state), the player is informed of the period during which the latent probability state is set (FIG. 7(a)). ))reference.

However, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the first special symbol is also the second symbol. Both special symbols may change.

In such a case, even if a display mode indicating that the latent state (RUSH) is set is displayed at the timing when the latent state is set (see FIG. 7A), the second currently changing Until the special symbol stops changing, the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed during the latent state, and the problem that the small hit game is not executed irrespective of the RUSH state occurs. I was afraid.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent probability state is satisfied (when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability variation state), the variation situation of the second special symbol (whether or not there is variation, The remaining fluctuation period) is discriminated, and the timing of notifying that the RUSH state has been set is varied based on the discrimination result.

Specifically, when the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied, the fact that the RUSH state has been set is notified when it is determined that the new second special symbol can be changed I am configuring. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the new small variation of the second special symbol is not started and the small hit game is not executed, despite the fact that the RUSH state has been notified.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the transition condition to the latent state is satisfied, the period from the state in which a new second special symbol variation can be executed to the end of the latent state is determined. If the determined period is less than the predetermined period, the fact that the RUSH state has been set is not notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the big hit game from being started without the small hit game being executed despite the fact that the RUSH state has been set.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation state, the gaming state is changed by shifting the high probability state of the ordinary symbol to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot variation starts. Configured to set the latent state, if you win the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, without shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts , It is configured to continue the probability change state even during the change of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide different playability according to the type of special symbol.

Incidentally, without being limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, even when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability variation state, the high-probability state of the ordinary symbol is changed to the low-probability state at the time when the jackpot variation starts. It may be configured to set a latent state as a game state by shifting to, and only when a specific jackpot type is set among a plurality of jackpot types It may be configured to set the latent probability state as the game state by shifting the high probability state of the symbol to the low probability state.

Furthermore, measure the number of jackpots won during the advantageous continuation period, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined number, shift the high probability state of ordinary symbols to a low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. Therefore, the latent state may be set as the game state.

In the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability variation state, the latent state is set in the period until the jackpot variation ends at the time when the jackpot variation starts. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot variation corresponding to the predicted winning information ends based on the fact that the winning jackpot is predicted in the starting winning process (see FIG. 47). It may be configured to set the latent state until a period (a plurality of fluctuation periods).

In this embodiment, when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the state where the latent probability state is set, regardless of the number of variations of the second special symbol during the latent probability state setting, a constant variation pattern table (See FIG. 19(b)) is used, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the latent probability state is set reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). It is also possible to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not it has been done and to make the data table for selecting the variation pattern different based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means.

Specifically, if the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has not reached a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), refer to the data table in which the average of the fluctuation time is about 2 seconds, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol. When the number of times reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to the data table in which the average of the fluctuation time is about 1 second. As a result, when a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set as the big variation of the first special symbol is selected, it is possible to provide the player with more small hit games.

Further, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the big hit variation in the probability changing state, but in addition to this, the special symbol lottery result is a specific deviation or a small hit. In this case, the latent probability state may be set during variable display, and during the probability variation state, the number of special symbol lottery results deviates from the specified value, or the number of small wins reaches a predetermined number. In this case, the latent state may be set.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 111. In the first embodiment described above, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) In addition, the gaming state in which the big hit is changing is set to the latent probability state, and when the latent probability state is set, the small hit game is easily executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the above-described first embodiment, the game state is changed during the symbol fixing period (period during which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) for displaying the special symbol lottery result. It is configured to let. In other words, in the state where the probability variation state is set, if you win the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), the start timing of the symbol determination period in which the lottery result is displayed (the first symbol showing the jackpot) When the display is stopped), the latent state is set as the game state.

Furthermore, the second embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that a different symbol settlement period is set based on the special symbol lottery result. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the length of the period in which the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player is set according to the length of the symbol fixing period that is set. Further, as in the first embodiment described above, compared to the configuration of setting the latent state corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol (the period during which the special symbol is varied), the symbol determination period of the special symbol (special Since the configuration for setting the latent state corresponding to (the period during which the symbol is stopped) is used, the display mode corresponding to the special symbol in the state where the latent state is set can be simplified. The control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, once the probability variation state is set, the probability variation state continues until the next jackpot is won, but in the second embodiment, in the special symbol jackpot. Even if you have not won, if the predetermined end condition (the number of special symbol fluctuations after the probability change state is set reaches a predetermined number (50 times)) is satisfied, end the probability change state It is different in that it is configured into. With this configuration, it is possible to enthusiastically allow the player to play a game for shifting to the latent probability state during the period in which the probability variation state is set.

Here, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of a game flow when a specific jackpot (jackpot C) is won by a lottery of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) in a state where the probability variation state is set. .. As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when the jackpot is won in a state where the probability variation state is set, the jackpot game is started from the timing (see FIG. 88(c)) at which the jackpot fluctuation stops. The latent state is set in the period until it is executed (the symbol fixing period).

Then, in the state where the latent probability state is set, the game for causing the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) to be performed is executed as in the above-described first embodiment. In addition, if you win the small hit of the special figure 2 during the symbol fixed period of the special figure 1, while the small hit game is being executed, it is configured to interrupt the measurement (subtraction) of the symbol fixed period of the special figure 1. ing. In addition, in the second embodiment, even when the special symbol lottery result is out of place or in the case of a small hit, a different symbol fixing period is set according to the lottery result. As a result, the player desires that a long period be set as the symbol determination period as the lottery result of the special map 1 corresponding to the period in which the latent state is set (the lottery result of winning the jackpot), In the state where the latent probability state is set, it is desired that a short period is set as the symbol fixing period in order to execute the lottery of special figure 2 more.

In other words, in the second embodiment in which the symbol determination period is changed according to the lottery result, in the case where a long symbol determination period is desired and a short symbol determination period is desired, depending on the game state and the type of special symbol. And can be provided to the player. Further, in the second embodiment, different symbol settlement periods are set for the same variation pattern in which the same variation display can be executed. With this, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting the symbol settlement period in advance due to the variable display contents of the special symbol, and which symbol settlement period is set for this special symbol lottery. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the special symbol is actually displayed until it is stopped. In addition, since it has the configuration described above, for the variation effect (effect mode executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) executed corresponding to one variation time (variation pattern) Since, since it is configured to set a plurality of types of symbol determination period, the time required for one special symbol lottery (after performing the special symbol lottery, the next special symbol lottery can be performed It is possible to unify the variation effects even when the time until is set complicatedly.

In the example described with reference to FIG. 88, a state in which the probability variation state is set, that is, when the remaining time reduction number is 47 times, showing the flow of the game when the jackpot of special figure 1 is won Therefore, the latent state is set from the time when the jackpot fluctuation stops. In addition to this, when the jackpot of special figure 1 is won at the timing when the probability variation state ends (the value of the probability variation counter 203aa becomes 0) (for example, the 50th special figure lottery after the probability variation state is set) Is configured so that the latent probability state is set from the timing when the big hit variation starts.

With such a configuration, in the state in which the probability variation state is set, advantageous periods having different lengths are set based on the timing of winning the jackpot in special figure 1. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while wishing to win the jackpot at a timing when a long advantageous period is set, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the game state set for the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed when the probability variation state is set will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the contents of the special figure 1 game and the awarded points after the probability variation state is set.

As shown in FIG. 89, in the second embodiment, the game state is variably set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the probability variation state is set, and the number of times of lottery (number of times of special figure variation). It is configured to do. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the probability variation state is continuously set until the number of times of special symbol lottery (the number of fluctuations) reaches a predetermined number (50 times) without winning the jackpot. If you win the jackpot between the number of special symbols lottery (number of fluctuations) is 1 to 49 times, the special symbol showing the jackpot changes during the jackpot fluctuation, the special symbol showing the jackpot is stopped and displayed. The latent state is set during the fixed period. As a result, the player is provided with the latent probability state game (RUSH game) during the symbol determination period and the jackpot game after the completion of the latent probability state as a privilege.

Then, when the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the number of times of change) is a big hit in the 50th time, the latent probability state is set during the big hit change and during the symbol fixing period. As a result, the player is awarded a bonus probability state game (RUSH game) from jackpot variation to the end of the symbol determination period, and a jackpot game after the latent probability state has ended. That is, in the second embodiment, in the state in which the probability variation state is set, the condition for transition to the latent probability state (big hit) is when the specific condition (specific lottery number (50th)) is satisfied. When the condition is satisfied, the player is given a more advantageous privilege than when the condition for transitioning to the latent state is satisfied while the specific condition is not satisfied.

Then, if the number of times of special symbol lottery exceeds 50 times, a predetermined probability variation number is reached, and the normal state is set as the game state. If you win the jackpot during this normal state, during the change of the special symbol, and during the symbol determination period, the normal state continues, jackpot game is executed.

On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery number (the number of fluctuations) is out of the range from 1 to 49 times after the probability variation state is set, during the variation of the special symbol, and the probability variation state during the symbol determination period. Continuing, if it is off at the 50th time, during the fluctuation of the special symbol, and because the latent probability state is set during the symbol fixing period, the latent state from the special symbol change to the end of the symbol fixing period A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the second embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol in the probability variation state, and the symbol fixing period, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, other than the jackpot (out , Small hit), it is configured so that a long time can be easily selected. For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the variation time is “60 seconds to 180 seconds”. The variable time of “” is selected, and the symbol confirmation period of “5 seconds to 150 seconds” is selected as the symbol confirmation period, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is other than the jackpot (for example, out), that The variable time is selected as the variable time of "5 seconds to 150 seconds", and the symbol determination period of "0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol determination period.

By configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery result, and the latent probability state game (RUSH game) depending on the number of lottery is 330 seconds at the maximum (if you win the jackpot at the 50th special figure fluctuation number), the minimum It is possible to provide to the player with a width of 5 seconds (when the jackpot is won at the 1st to 49th variation of the special map). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting how long the latent state this time will last.

Further, in the present embodiment, regardless of the special symbol lottery result, when the special symbol lottery number (variation number) after the probability change state is set is the 50th time, during the change of the special symbol, and , Since the latent state is set during the symbol determination period, even if you do not win the jackpot during the probability variation state, the latent state game (RUSH game) to the player Can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the latent probability state game (RUSH game) than in the configuration of the first embodiment in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is provided only when the big hit is won. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot experience a latent state game (RUSH game) even though the game has been played for a long time, and a situation in which he/she gets tired of the game occurs.

Further, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set based on the fact that the jackpot is won during the probability changing state, and the latent state is set longer than the latent state is set without winning the jackpot. It is configured to be easy. As a result, the longer the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is executed, the easier it is to execute the jackpot game after the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who is in the latent state game (RUSH game) play the game while expecting that the jackpot game will be executed.

Note that, unlike the configuration of the present embodiment described above, in some cases where the latent state is set without winning the jackpot, it is equivalent to when the latent state is set based on winning the jackpot. Or, the variation time and the symbol fixed period corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol other than the big hit (out, small hit) are set so that the latent state game (RUSH game) of a longer length is executed. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a situation in which it is advantageous not to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and it is possible to provide a surprising game.

In the present embodiment, as described above, it is easy to set a long latent probability state when a big jackpot is won during the probability variation state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the latent probability without winning the jackpot during the probability variation state is set. A long latent state may be set when the state is set. In this case, for example, the number of probability changes (the number of times the special symbols are randomly set (the number of changes) in which the probability changes state is continuously set) is 50, and the probability changes state, that is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbols is 1/20. It is preferable that the long latent probability state is set when the result of the lottery for special symbols is missed 50 times in a row (about 7%).

Next, of the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the display contents different from those of the above-described first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. In the second embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, since the latent probability state is set during the symbol fixing period, the special figure 1 for the effect contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display mode of the display area Dm1 or the special figure 2 display area Dm2 is different from that of the first embodiment described above. FIG. 90A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents during the latent state. As shown in FIG. 90(a), in the second embodiment, since the latent probability state is set during the period in which the first special symbol is stopped (fixed display), the latent probability state is set. The display of the production mode (super chance zone display) showing the state where the variation of the second special symbol is executed over the timing, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. This is different from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8A) in that it is executed during the period in which the second symbol for display is stopped (confirmed). The other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 90(a), the display mode (“777”) of the third symbol for indicating that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has been won as a jackpot is stopped and displayed. It shows that the latent probability state is set based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the first special symbol during the probability changing state. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 90(a), since the special symbol 1 display area Dm1 in which the third symbol is displayed in a display mode that can be visually recognized by the player is formed, the player has the special symbol 1 display area. By understanding the display mode of the third symbol displayed on Dm1 and the effect mode indicating that the latent state displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has been set, it is possible to relate to the future game flow. It is possible to play the game in a state in which the information (information on whether or not the jackpot game is executed after the latent state game is finished) is acquired in advance.

Further, in the second embodiment, when the latent state is set based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, the falling lottery (special symbol) when the special symbol lottery is performed in the latent state. It is configured so that a lottery for shifting the high-probability state to the low-probability state is not performed. Therefore, by identifying the display mode of the third symbol displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, it is possible to grasp whether or not the current latent probability state is an advantageous latent probability state advantageous to the player. You can play the game with confidence.

In the second embodiment, the third symbol is displayed so that the player can easily identify the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery result of the special symbol can be displayed. In order to make it difficult for the player to identify, the display area is reduced, or other than the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a light emitting element attached to the game board 13 or other than the third symbol display device 81 is provided. A liquid crystal display device or the like) may be used for display. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what triggered the latent probability state to be set, so that the jackpot game is executed after the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is finished. It is possible to play the game while predicting whether or not the falling lottery is being executed during the latent probability state game (RUSH game).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol is changed from the stop display (confirmation display) of the third symbol in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 to the passage of the confirmation display period (symbol confirmation period). Although it is configured to be completely stopped without changing, it is not limited to this as long as it informs the player that the special symbol is currently in the confirmed display period (symbol confirmed period), for example, The variable display of the third symbol is stopped during the fixed display period, but the display mode (color) of the third symbol may be gradually changed, or the third symbol may be changed to a degree that the player cannot identify. You may comprise so that a design may be rocked.

In addition, the player is currently in the fixed display period (symbol fixed period), or because the right of the special symbol lottery to be newly executed is not yet acquired, a new lottery for the special symbol (change) ) May be configured to set a display mode for allowing the player to identify whether or not the state is not executed. For example, “fixed display” or “standby” is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. The display mode (color, design) of the third symbol may be changed depending on whether "displaying the fixed display" or "waiting". With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent erroneous recognition that a new lottery will not be started during the confirmed display period, even though the storage is held.

Next, with reference to FIG. 90(b), the display contents at the time of entering the latent state game (RUSH game) in the second embodiment will be described. 90(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time of entering the latent state game (RUSH game). As shown in FIG. 90(b), in the present embodiment, since the latent probability state is set during the period when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the latent probability state game (RUSH game) An effect mode indicating that the player enters the game is executed during a period in which the second symbol for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. This is different from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8B). The other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed in the second embodiment. It is different in that it is done. The other points are the same as in the first embodiment, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, the big hit type selection table 202d is replaced with the big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, and the small hit type selection table 202e is replaced with the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab. Is provided in place of the variation pattern selection table 202f, and a variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac is provided, and further, a deviation type selection table 202ad is provided, which is a difference from the first embodiment described above.

The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is different from the jackpot type selection table 202d of the above-described first embodiment in that the type of jackpot type is changed, and various counters (time saving counter 203f, probability variation counter 203aa) set after the jackpot is finished. , And the contents of the fixed time counters 203ad and 203ae) are changed, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa defines the same jackpot operation content as the jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) of the first embodiment described above. The values of the time saving counter 203f, the probability variation counter 203aa, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae are defined for each jackpot type.

Specifically, when the big hit type (big hit A1 to big hit A3) in which the same big hit operation content as the big hit A of the big hit type selection table 202d of the above-described first embodiment is executed (when the big hit is won). The value of "100" is set in the time saving counter 203f when the game state is "normal state" or the latent probability state, and the value of "50" is set in the time saving state or the probability variation state. Therefore, the value of “50” is set in the probability variation counter 203aa.

Further, as the symbol determination period of the special symbol, the jackpot A1 is set to be "5 seconds", the jackpot A2 is set to "60 seconds", and the jackpot A3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot A1 is defined in the range of the counter C2 (0 to 99) "0 to 19," the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23," and the jackpot A3 is defined in "24." That is, in the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackets A1 to A3) is executed at 25% when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and 80% (20/ 25) is a jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is a jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is a jackpot A3.

In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot in which the jackpot game that is most advantageous to the player is won, there is a short symbol fixing period as a period (symbol fixing period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result to the player. When selected, the period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed becomes short. Therefore, with respect to the special symbol lottery, the player can pay attention not only to whether or not the jackpot is won, but also to the length of the symbol fixing period, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a configuration in which the symbol determination period is defined in association with the jackpot type is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (jacket type), You may comprise so that a lottery for selecting a symbol fixed period may be performed independently. In this case, since it is possible to combine a plurality of symbol determination periods with respect to a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide a game property that is difficult for the player to predict.

Next, similarly to the above-mentioned big hits A1 to A3, big hits B1 to B3, big hits C1 to C3, and big hits D1 to D3 are respectively defined.

Specifically, when the big hit type (big hit B1 to big hit B3) in which the same big hit operation content as the big hit B of the big hit type selection table 202d of the above-described first embodiment is executed (when the big hit is won). The value of "0" is set to the time saving counter 203f when the game state is "normal state" or the latent probability state, and the value of "100" is set to the time saving state or the probability variation state. Therefore, the probability variation counter 203aa is specified to be set to a value of "0".

Further, as the symbol determination period of the special symbol, it is stipulated that the big hit B1 is set to "5 seconds", the big hit B2 is set to "60 seconds", and the big hit B3 is set to "150 seconds". The jackpot B1 is defined in the range of the counter C2 (0 to 99) "25 to 29", the jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and the jackpot A3 is defined in "24". In other words, in A2 of the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to the jackpot A (jackpot A1 to A3) is executed at 25% of the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, of which 80% ( 20/25) is a jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is a jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is a jackpot A3.

Next, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93(a), the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)) of the first embodiment described above for each small hit type (small. The difference is that the hit A to the small hit C) are further subdivided and defined. Other than that, it is the same as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

Specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 9" as the small hit type for which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit A of the first embodiment described above is executed. , "Small hits A1" with a symbol determination time of "0.2 seconds" are in the range of "10 to 89", "Small hits A2" with a symbol determination time of "0.5 seconds" are "90 to 93". In the range of “”, “small hit A3” having a symbol fixed time of “1.5 seconds” is defined.

Then, as a small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit B of the above-described first embodiment is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is within the range of "94 to 95", and the symbol is determined. "Small hits B1" with a time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "96 to 97", "Small hits B2" with a symbol determination time of "0.5 seconds" is a value of "98" A "small hit B3" with a fixed time of "1.5 seconds" is defined. Furthermore, as a small hit type in which the small hit operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small hit C of the above-described first embodiment is executed, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is "99" and the symbol fixed time is "1. A small hit operation (opening operation) of "5 seconds" is specified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93B, the content of the disconnection type selection table 202ad will be described. This deviation type selection table 202ad is referred to for selecting the deviation type when the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation, and is different in correspondence with the value of the obtained small hit type counter C5. A fixed time is specified.

In the present embodiment, because the special symbol lottery results cannot be duplicated, the special symbol lottery result is the same as the small hit and the missed result (the value of the small hit type counter C5. ), the type is selected. As a result, the number of counters included in main controller 110 can be reduced. The configuration is not limited to the above-described configuration, and different counters may be used depending on whether the special symbol lottery result is a small hit or miss.

FIG. 93B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the disconnection type selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 93(b), the symbol type (missing type) with a symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds is a small hit corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is defined corresponding to the value of the type counter C5.

As described above, in the second embodiment, as the lottery result of the special symbol, it is possible to set the lottery result of the big hit, the small hit, and the miss, and further, it is possible to set a different symbol fixing time for each lottery result. Is configured. Thereby, even when the special symbols are selected in the same lottery result, different symbol fixing times can be set.

Here, for example, if the special symbol lottery result is a big hit and the latent state is set during the symbol fixing period, a longer time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the symbol fixing time. Since it is possible to lengthen the period in which the latent state is set, it can be advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is wrong, the longer the symbol determination time is selected, the less the number of games per unit time (the number of special symbol lottery) becomes, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in the case where the latent state is set in the period in which the special symbol indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a big hit is stopped and displayed, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) In the latent state game (RUSH game) to execute the lottery, if the lottery result of special figure 2 is a small hit, or if it is out, a long symbol confirmation time is selected, and the predetermined latent state The number of special drawing 2 lottery that can be executed during the period (the symbol fixing period of special drawing 1) is reduced, which is disadvantageous to the player.

In this way, the degree of advantage of the symbol determination period that is set can be changed according to the special symbol lottery result, and thus it is possible to provide the player with novel game playability.

In the present embodiment, by changing the symbol determination period of the special symbol, the period in which the latent state is set which is a game state advantageous to the player is changed, and is executed during the latent state. By varying the number of special symbol lottery, it is configured so that the degree of advantage provided to the player is different, but other configurations may be used, for example, in the special symbol lottery Only when the symbol-fixing period of the special symbol indicating the winning is longer than the predetermined period, the player may be provided with the privilege of displaying a preferable image, or the music played during the jackpot game. The selecting operation may be configured to be executable during the symbol fixing period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the contents of the time saving/probability variation 2 table 202ac2 will be described. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving/probability variation 2 table 202ac2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, the time reduction/probability variation 2 table 202ac2 is different from the time reduction/probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A) of the above-described first embodiment in the variation pattern corresponding to FIG. They differ in that they have different lengths. Other than that, it is the same as the time saving/probability change table 202f2 (see FIG. 19A). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

That is, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state is set during the stop display period (symbol fixing period) of the special symbol when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (lottery of special symbol 1) during the probability variation state. Since it is configured, the variable display period of Toku-zu 1 during the probability change state is shorter than that of the first embodiment.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 95, in the second embodiment, the probability variation counter 203aa is provided in place of the probability variation flag 203g in the first embodiment described above, and the special figure 1 symbol in-determination flag 203ab, the special figure 2 The difference is that a symbol finalizing flag 203ac, a special figure 1 finalizing time counter 203ad, and a special figure 2 finalizing time counter 203ae are added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

The probability variation counter 203aa is a counter for continuing the lottery number of special symbols executed in the high probability state of the special symbols (latent probability state, probability variation state), and the period for which the special symbol lottery is executed with high probability. Is for indicating.

The probability variation counter 203aa has a value defined in correspondence with the jackpot type selected at the timing of setting the probability variation flag 203g to ON in the jackpot ending process (see S2312 of FIG. 54) of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 92) is set, the value is referred to in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) (S451 in FIG. 98), and the jackpot lottery according to the value set in the probability variation counter 203aa. It is executed (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 98). Similarly, it is also referred to when performing the lottery for the second special symbol (see S953 in FIG. 102).

Then, the value is decremented by 1 at the timing when the symbol fixing period of the special symbols (special symbols 1 and 2) has passed, and is reset to 0 at the timing when the symbol fixing period of the special symbol that has been won in the jackpot has passed. ..

The special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is a flag for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to ON, the stop display of special figure 1 is displayed. It indicates that it is during the period (during the symbol determination period). This special figure 1 symbol determination in progress flag 203ab is set to ON in the first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 of FIG. 100) (see S2802 of FIG. 100), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (FIG. 99). (Refer to S257). When it is determined that the symbol fixing period has elapsed (S853: Yes in FIG. 99), it is set to OFF.

The special figure 2 symbol determination flag 203ac is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed, and when it is set to ON, the stop display of special figure 2 is displayed. It indicates that it is during the period (during the symbol determination period). This special map 2 symbol determination flag 203ac, the special symbol 1 in the above-mentioned special symbol determination flag 203ab, the type of the target special symbol from the first special symbol (special symbol 1) to the second special symbol (special symbol) The only difference is the change to 2), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Special figure 1 decision time counter 203ad, special figure 2 decision time counter 203ac is the counter for measuring the symbol decision period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) When the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) 1 is stopped and displayed, the corresponding counter is set to a value indicating the present symbol fixing period. Then, in the process during the fixed time period (see S860 in FIG. 101) that is periodically executed, the value of the counter is decremented, and the values of the special time period fixed time counter 203ad and the special time period 2 fixed time counter 203ac become 0. In this case, a process of ending the symbol fixing period of the special symbol is executed.

In the second embodiment, different symbol settlement periods are set according to the type for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 92 and 93). Then, the latent probability state is set as the game state during the symbol fixing period.

Next, the information stored in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in the RAM 223 of the second embodiment, in addition to the electrical configuration of the above-described first embodiment, the special figure 1 decision counter 223aa, the special figure 2 decision counter 223ab, and the remaining decision time information storage area. The difference is that 223ac and the in-fixing flag 223ad are added.

Special figure 1 decision counter 223aa is the counter for measuring the period (symbol decision period) in which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol decision period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) from the main controller 110. When a confirmation command including information for indicating is received, a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of special figure 1 is set.

The value set in the special figure 1 definite counter 223aa is periodically subtracted by various counter update processing 2 (see FIG. 111) executed every 1 millisecond. In the second embodiment, the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the symbol fixing period of the special symbol (first special symbol), so this special symbol By managing the value of the 1-determination counter 223aa, it becomes possible to set the remaining period information indicating the remaining period in which the latent state is continuously set.

Further, in the present embodiment, during the symbol determination period of the special map 1 (during the latent probability state game), when the small hit of the second special symbol is won, the value of the special map 1 determination counter 223aa during the small hit game. It is configured to interrupt the process of subtracting. Therefore, since the symbol fixed period of special figure 1 is not subtracted while the small hit game is being executed, it is possible to appropriately execute the lottery of the second special symbol during the symbol fixed period.

In addition to the configuration of the second embodiment described above, a process of accumulating the period during which the subtraction process of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is suspended may be provided. Specifically, a small hitting game counter for measuring the period during which the small hitting game is executed is provided, and the small hitting game counter is used to continuously set the small hitting game in the latent probability state. May be configured to calculate the cumulative period of, and a suspension counter for measuring a period in which a flag for suspending the subtraction processing of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is set, and the suspension thereof is performed. It may be configured to calculate the cumulative period of the small hitting game during the latent state that is continuously set using the medium counter.

In this way, by notifying the player of the result of the latent probability state game (RUSH game) of this time by calculating the cumulative interruption information by accumulating the period in which the subtraction process of the symbol fixed period of the special figure 1 is suspended. You can Furthermore, as a detailed game result of the latent probability state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of balls acquired during the latent state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of small winnings per winning small prize, and the above-mentioned interrupted accumulation Based on the information and, based on the information, the game result indicating whether more bonuses are acquired than the design value (or more than past history), and whether more balls are acquired for the number of wins. The player may be informed of the game result shown or the game result indicating whether or not the interruption cumulative information is long with respect to the number of small hits won. Alternatively, the cumulative number of acquired balls, the cumulative number of small hits, or the cumulative interruption information may be notified.

The special figure 2 decision counter 223ab is a counter for measuring the period (symbol decision period) for which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol decision period of the second special symbol (special figure 2) from the main controller 110. When a confirmation command including information for indicating is received, a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of special figure 2 is set. The specific contents are the same as those of the above-mentioned special figure 1 decision counter 223aa except that the measurement target is changed to the symbol decision period of special figure 1 and the symbol decision period of special figure 2 is set, and the detailed description thereof is given. The description is omitted.

Remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac, the remaining time (remaining fixed time) of the symbol fixed period at the time when the subtraction process of the symbol fixed period of the first special symbol (Special symbol 1) is interrupted (temporary stop of special symbol 1) It is a data area for storing the remaining fixed time information shown. In the second embodiment, an effect mode when restarting the subtraction process of the symbol fixed period is set based on the remaining fixed time information stored in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac. As a result, by grasping the effect mode executed when the small hit game ends and the subtraction process of the symbol fixed period is resumed, it is possible to predict the period until the latent state ends.

In the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command is received in the command determination processing 2 (see S4162 of FIG. 106) of the voice lamp control device 113 (S4219 of FIG. 106: Yes). The remaining fixed time information (period A to period C) set in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 of FIG. 108) to be executed is stored (see S4956, S4958, and S4959 of FIG. 108). Then, the temporary stop-related process 2 (see S4253 of FIG. 108) and the resumption process (see S4952 of FIG. 109) executed during the restart process (see S4952 of FIG. 109) are read when setting the effect mode when restarting the subtraction process of the symbol settlement period. It is issued (see S5002 and S5052 in FIG. 109) and referred to when determining the additional effect type (see S5003 and S5053 in FIG. 109).

Since the information for indicating the remaining period of the latent state game is notified by the establishment of various notification conditions in this way, the remaining period of the symbol fixing period, that is, the latent state game, It is possible to acquire the information indicating the remaining period that can be executed by grasping the effect modes of various effects executed during the latent state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect and enhance the effect of the effect.

In the second embodiment, the remaining period of the symbol determination period, that is, the remaining period in which the latent state game can be executed is divided into predetermined ranges, and the remaining period information for indicating the divided range is displayed by the player. Although it is configured to inform the player, the player can roughly understand the remaining period of the latent state game and provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting a specific remaining period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to notify the player of a specific remaining period in seconds.

The in-fixing flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the special symbol stop display period (symbol fixing period) is in progress, and is set to ON when the special symbol stop display period (symbol fixing period) is in effect. It This in-fixing flag 223ad is configured such that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the special symbol of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are set to ON even during the symbol decision period. There is.

The confirmation flag 223ad is executed in the command determination processing 2 (see S4152 of FIG. 106) of the voice lamp control device 113 when the determination of a symbol determination related command is received (S4254 of FIG. 106: Yes). It is set to ON in the related process (see S4255 in FIG. 110) (see S5077 in FIG. 110). Then, in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 of FIG. 108), when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received (see S4951 of FIG. 108), the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is during the symbol fixing period. Is referred to in order to determine whether or not (see S4953 of FIG. 108). Also, when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command is received in the restart process (S4952 of FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 of FIG. 108) (S5001: Yes of FIG. 109). , The reference state is referred to in order to determine whether the fluctuation state of the special figure 1 is in the symbol fixing period (see S5051 of FIG. 109).

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) (when the small hit game is executed), or at the time when the small hit game is finished. It is determined whether the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is in the variable display period or the symbol determination period, and based on the determination result, the special symbol 1 is temporarily stopped (variable display period, It is configured to set the process when suspending the subtraction of the symbol fixing period) and the effect mode when restarting the special figure 1 (restarting the variable display period and the subtraction of the symbol fixing period).

With such a configuration, the second special symbol (special figure 2) is appropriately processed regardless of the fluctuation state of the first special symbol (special figure 1) at the timing when the small hit is won in the lottery. can do.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105. The control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is a special symbol variation process 2 in place of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 97), the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) First special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) instead of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 102), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process Second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 103) instead of (see FIG. 45), special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (see FIG. 105) instead of special figure 2 disengagement stop process (see FIG. 46) The difference is that the first special symbol determination period setting process (see FIG. 100), the second special symbol determination period setting process (see FIG. 104) is newly added. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the content of the control processing executed by the main controller 110 in the second embodiment, the points that are largely different from the above-described first embodiment will be briefly described. In the above-described first embodiment, the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the variable display period of one special symbol (special figure 1). More specifically, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state is set during the variation display period of the special symbol that was won for the jackpot, and the latent state game (RUSH game) is played until the variation display period ends. The jackpot game was executed immediately after the variable display period was ended. As a result, the player can continuously execute two different privilege games (a game that frequently causes a small hit in the latent probability state and a big hit game), and the player can frequently perform a large number of games in a short period of time. It was possible to grant the privilege of.

Further, since the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be executed in the state before the jackpot game is executed, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be executed at ease. In other words, even if the game result on the first half side is not good because it is set on the second half side of the two bonus games in which the big hit game, which generally gives a larger bonus to the player than the small hit game, is set. , Was able to eagerly acquire the privilege in the game (big hit game) executed in the second half.

In addition, since the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is configured to be performed during the execution of the jackpot variation, a period during which the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be executed can be set in advance. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the latent state game (RUSH game) is executed for an unexpectedly long period of time and the privilege is excessively given to the player.

Further, the period during which the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be executed is changed according to the variation pattern selected when the big hit is won. In other words, one lottery of the special symbol is configured to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot game and the length of the game period of the latent probability state game (RUSH game). Therefore, the latent state game ( It was possible to reduce the processing load of the main controller 110 as compared with the case of executing the processing using the dedicated selection table in order to preset the length of the game period of the (RUSH game).

However, in the configuration of the first embodiment described above, since the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) is determined only by the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, the latent state game In order to prepare a plurality of (RUSH game) game periods, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) in advance, and there is a risk that the data area for storing the fluctuation patterns will be pressed.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the above-described first embodiment, the period during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the symbol confirmation period) is also a period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. It is configured as described above, and is configured to change the length of the symbol fixing period according to the symbol type based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

By configuring in this manner, the game period of the latent state game (RUSH game) can be set by combining (combining) the variation time of the special symbol and the symbol fixing period, so the latent state A plurality of patterns can be set for the game period of the game (RUSH game) with a small amount of data.

Further, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special diagram 2) during the latent probability state game (RUSH game), it is configured so that a different symbol fixing period is set according to the lottery result, so it is set. By the symbol fixing period, the number of lottery of special figure 2 executed during a predetermined latent state game (RUSH game) period (variable display time of special figure 1) can be different.

That is, in the lottery of the first special symbol that will set the game period of the latent probability state game (RUSH game), it is desired that a longer symbol finalization period be set, and the latent state game (RUSH game) In the lottery of the second special symbol that is repeatedly executed during, it becomes a game property that a shorter symbol fixed period is desired to be set, and the novelty that a different lottery result is desired depending on the special symbol type targeted for the lottery is novel. A certain playability can be provided to the player.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, a process for shifting a high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state (subtraction process of the time saving counter 203f) is executed at the start of variation of the special symbol, and a high probability state of the special symbol. Is configured to execute the process for shifting to a low probability state (subtraction process of the probability variation counter 203aa) at the end of the symbol determination period of the special symbol, and in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of times of lottery) reaches a predetermined number (50 times), the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state, and it is special in the state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set. When the number of variations of the symbol (number of lottery) reaches a predetermined number (50 times), the high probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low probability state.

In other words, in the state where the probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols) is set, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of times of lottery) reaches 50 times, the fluctuation (50th fluctuation) ) The game state transitions to the latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols) at the timing when it starts, and its fluctuation (50th fluctuation) ends (symbol confirmation period end) At the time), the game state is configured to be able to shift to a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol).

With this configuration, even if the jackpot is not won, the latent state can be set only for a predetermined specific period (50th variation period (including the symbol determination period)). , It is possible to make the player easily experience the latent state game (RUSH game).

First, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 2 (S154). Special symbol variation stop process 2 (S154), in addition to the special symbol variation process (S154) in the first embodiment described above, the point of adding the process of S251 and S252, the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) The difference is that the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) and the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) are replaced by the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263).

In the special symbol variation process 2 (S154), when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), the special figure 1 symbol finalizing flag 203ab is turned on. It is determined whether it is set (S251). If it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is executed, and the process proceeds to S209. Details of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to OFF (S251: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, and S209 of Move to processing.

When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not 0 (greater than 0) in the process of S206 described above (S206: No), or when the processes of S208 and S257 are executed, next, It is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 203n in FIG. 2 is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S209: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON. Yes (S252).

In the processing of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol determination flag 203ac is not set to ON (S252; No), that is, by the processing of S209 and S252, the present is the second special symbol (special figure 2). If it is determined that the symbol is not being displayed even during the variation display, the second special symbol variation start process is executed to newly start the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S210), and then the book. The process ends. Since the processing content of the second special symbol variation start processing (S210) is the same as that of the above-described first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol determination flag 203ac is set to ON (S252: Yes), that is, the present is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) symbol determination period. If it is determined that the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) is executed, this process is ended. Details of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356), in contrast to the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 instead of the process of S402. The difference is that the processing (S451) for determining whether or not to execute is executed.

In other words, in the above-described first embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the big hit of the special symbol is won. The probability variation flag 203g for indicating that it is a high probability state was used, but in the second embodiment, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol, the special symbol jackpot win (first end condition) In addition, it has a second end condition that is satisfied when the number of times the special symbol changes (number of times of lottery) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). Therefore, the probability variation counter 203aa is used to measure the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of lottery) in the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. This probability variation counter 203aa is for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (lottery number) until the above-mentioned second ending condition is satisfied, and the value is updated based on the lottery of the special symbol being executed. It is configured to be.

It should be noted that the configuration other than the present embodiment may be any configuration as long as it is possible to determine whether or not the above-described second end condition is satisfied. For example, the probability variation flag 203g used in the first embodiment and the second The probability variation counter 203aa used in the embodiment may be used, or a configuration using a variation number counter that always measures the number of variations (lottery number) of the special symbol regardless of the game state, and the setting state of the probability variation flag 203g, It may be configured to determine the number of times of change of the special symbol during the probability change state based on the number of changes of the change counter.

Further, in the second embodiment, the number of times of variation of the special symbol, that is, the number of times of variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of variations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are combined. Although the end condition (second end condition) for ending the probability variation state is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the number of fluctuations (number of lottery) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is measured. Figure 1 fluctuation number counter, special figure 2 fluctuation number counter that measures only the number of fluctuations (number of lots) of the second special symbol (special figure 2), and for the number of fluctuations of each special symbol (number of lots) It may be configured such that each end condition (end condition for ending the probability variation state) is set.

Further, in the second embodiment, as a termination condition for terminating the high probability state of the special symbol (for example, the probability variation state), in addition to the first termination condition based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, the number of times the special symbol varies Although the second end condition based on the (lottery number) is provided, other end conditions may be provided, for example, the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific lottery result other than the jackpot (for example, a small hit). A third ending condition that is satisfied when the number of times of reaching reaches a predetermined number may be provided. Furthermore, the third ending condition is a lottery result of the first special symbol and a lottery result of the second special symbol, It may be set for each.

In addition, a time counter is provided to measure the time when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the fourth termination condition that is satisfied when the time counter counts a predetermined time, or the high probability state of the special symbol is set. There may be provided a fifth ending condition that can be established based on the lottery result and the number of times of lottery of ordinary symbols executed in the state in which it is performed.

Further, when any of the plurality of ending conditions described above is satisfied, the timing for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state is set to a timing other than the timing used in the second embodiment. Good, for example, just before starting the lottery for special symbols, immediately after the lottery for special symbols is performed, the timing to start the variation of the special symbols, a predetermined time after the variation of the special symbols is started (for example, 5 seconds) timing, the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped, the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, the stop display period of the special symbol (the symbol is fixed) The transition may be made at any timing of the end timing of (period).

By providing a plurality of end conditions for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol and the timing for ending the high-probability state of the special symbol in the case where the end condition is satisfied, it is special for the player. It is possible to make it difficult to understand when the high probability state of the symbol continues and at which timing (when the special symbol starts changing, when changing stops, when the symbol fixing period ends), so it is difficult for the player to get nervous. It is possible to play a game while giving a feeling.

Other processes of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) are the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257), which is one process in the special symbol variation process 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257). The first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207) in the above-described first embodiment, the process executed during the symbol determination period of the special symbol (S851-S858). , S860) is added, and the contents of the reset process when the first special symbol (special figure 1) won for the jackpot are stopped and displayed are different. Since other processes are the same as the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S207), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, returning to FIG. 97, the condition under which the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) is executed will be described. In this first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99), the process of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the process of setting the period (symbol fixing period) for which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol determination set The process of measuring the period and various execution processes corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol after the symbol fixed period has elapsed are configured to be executed.

Therefore, in the process of S206 of FIG. 97, that is, in the process of determining whether it is the timing to end the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) When (the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0) is determined (S206 of FIG. 97: Yes), and the processing of S251, that is, the present is the first special symbol (special figure 1). In the process of determining whether or not the stop display is in progress, when it is determined that the first special symbol (special feature 1) is in the stop display (the special feature 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON) (S251 in FIG. 97: Yes) is executed.

Returning to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. In the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 in-fixing flag 203ab is set to ON (S851). Here, when the variation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed and the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257) is executed to stop and display the special figure 1, that is, in the processing of S206 of FIG. 97, When executing the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) by determining that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter is 0, because the special figure 1 in-determination flag 203ab is not set to ON In the processing of S851, it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S851: No), and the first special symbol fixing period setting processing is executed (S852). ).

In the first special symbol fixed period setting process (S852), a process is executed to set a period (symbol fixed period) during which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 100, a first special symbol fixed period setting process which is one process in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. (S852) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852). In the first special symbol fixed period setting process (S852), the fixed time (symbol fixed period) is set, the process of setting a command to be transmitted to the first symbol display device 37, and the first special symbol of this time (special symbol) When the lottery result of 1) is a big hit, a process for shifting a high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state is executed.

In the second embodiment, as a condition (time saving end condition) for shifting a high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state, if the special symbol jackpot is won (first time saving end condition), an ordinary symbol In the state where the high probability state is continuously set, the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (lottery number) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) (second time saving end condition), and two time saving ends If there is a condition and the above-mentioned first time saving end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the start timing of the symbol determination period), When the 2 o'clock end condition is satisfied, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol is started (the timing when the lottery for the special symbol is executed). ..

In this way, a plurality of conditions (time saving end conditions) that trigger the transition of the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state are provided, and the transition timing to the low probability state is changed according to the satisfied time saving end condition. By configuring, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set in the gaming state (time saving state, probability variation state), the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at which timing for the player who is playing the game Since it is difficult to predict whether the game state (normal state or latent state) will be entered, it is possible to constantly pay attention to the game content and provide a game that does not get tired.

In the second embodiment, it is configured to shift the state of the normal symbol with the above-mentioned content, but other configurations may be used, for example, immediately before starting the lottery of the special symbol, or the special symbol. Immediately after the lottery is executed, the timing to start the fluctuation of the special symbol, the timing when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the fluctuation of the special symbol has started, the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped, The special symbol is stopped and displayed, a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has passed, or the special symbol stop display period (symbol fixing period) is configured to be shifted at any timing. May be.

In the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852), first, a value indicating the determination time (symbol determination time) corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad (S2801). In the second embodiment, a fixed time corresponding to each type selected in various tables (big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, out-of-range type selection table ad) used in special symbol lottery Since the (symbol fixing period) is defined, a value indicating the fixing time (symbol fixing period) corresponding to the type to be stopped and displayed this time is set in the special figure 1 fixing time counter 203ad. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a big hit and the big hit type selected using the big hit type selection 2 table 202aa (see FIG. 92) is a big hit A3, it is determined. Since 150 seconds is defined as the time (symbol fixing period), a value indicating 150 seconds is set in the special figure 1 fixing time counter 203ad.

Next, the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON (S2802), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S2803). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S2803: Yes), that is, this time, it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol for setting the settlement time (symbol settlement time) is a jackpot. In this case, the value of the time saving counter 203f is reset in order to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (S2804). On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON (S2803: No), the process of S2804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2805. Thereby, only when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, it is possible to set the low probability state of the normal symbol at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, for example, when the special symbol jackpot is won (the first time saving end condition) and the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is continuously set, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (lottery number) is a predetermined number of times ( For example, when 50 times) is reached (second time saving end condition) and when the two time saving end conditions are satisfied based on the same special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the first time saving end condition is satisfied. Since it is configured to preferentially execute the process of determining whether or not the second time saving end condition is satisfied, the process of determining whether or not the second time saving end condition is satisfied is selected, and when the symbol fixing period of the special symbol is set, the special symbol jackpot is won. Even in this case, the process of S2804 will be skipped.

After the processing of S2803 or S2804 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 in the processing of S2805 (S2805). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S2805: Yes), the status command indicating the latent probability status is set (S2806), and the process proceeds to S2808. On the other hand, in the process of S2805, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S2805: No), the state command indicating the normal state is set (S2807), and the process proceeds to S2808. After the processing of S2806 or S2807 is executed, the special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S2808). Next, the variation of the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S2809), and this processing is ended.

Returning to FIG. 99, the description will be continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to ON in the process of S851 (S851: Yes), that is, the present is during the symbol fixing period of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). If it is determined that there is, the process of S852 is skipped and the process proceeds to S853. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 97), it is determined that the special symbol 1 in-determination flag 203ab is set to ON (S251 of FIG. 97: Yes), and the first special symbol variation stop process 2 ( 99 (see S257 in FIG. 99) is executed, it is determined that the special figure 1 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to ON in the process of S851.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is 0 (S853). That is, it is determined whether or not the present is the timing when the symbol fixing period of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has passed. Here, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 decision time counter 203ad is not 0 (1 or more), that is, it is determined that the present is during the symbol decision period of the first special symbol (special figure 1). In the case (S853: No), the process during the fixed time (S860) is executed, and the present process is ended. During this fixed time process (S860), the process of updating the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period is executed, or the elapsed time of the symbol fixed period that has been temporarily stopped based on the fact that the small hit game is executed is updated. A process for restarting the process is executed, and the detailed contents thereof will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S853, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 determination time counter 203ad is 0 (S853: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the determination time (symbol determination period), The special map 1 symbol fixing flag 203ab is set to OFF (S854). Next, it is determined whether the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S855). When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S855: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S856). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S855: Yes), the process of S856 is skipped and the process proceeds to S857. In the process of S857, a state command corresponding to the values of the time saving counter 203f and the probability variation counter 203aa is set (S857).

By executing the process of S856 described above, in the present embodiment, a process of subtracting the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is executed after the stop display period of the special symbol has elapsed (after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed), and the subtraction is performed. When the value of the probability variation counter 203aa later becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured to shift to the low probability state. As a result, the probability variation end condition (condition for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state) that is satisfied when the number of times of variation of the special symbol (number of times of lottery) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) is satisfied. If you do, because the low probability state of the special symbol is set after the stop display period of the special symbol is set, during the variable display period of the target special symbol, and during the symbol determination period, the high of the special symbol It can be a stochastic state. Therefore, for example, by the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol, even if the above-described probability variation end condition is satisfied, during the variable display period of the first special symbol, during the symbol determination period, a high probability state of the special symbol It is possible to execute the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol in the state where is set.

The contents of the state command set in the process of S857 described above will be specifically described. When the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set), the probability variation counter When the value of 203aa is larger than 0, a state command indicating that the gaming state is the probability variation state is set, and when the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0, it indicates that the gaming state is a time saving state. The status command is set. Further, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set), when the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0, the gaming state is a latent state. Is set and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0, the state command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state is set.

Further, in the process of S857, when the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (1 or more), the residual probability variation number command is set as the value of the probability variation counter 203aa, that is, information indicating the residual probability variation number. The state command and the residual probability variation number command set in the process of S857 are output to the audio lamp controller 113 by the external output process (see S2201 of FIG. 52) of the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52). To be done. The voice lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110, and executes a process corresponding to the command received in the command determination process 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106). As a result, it is possible to properly determine the current game situation on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the first time saving end condition (condition that is satisfied when the jackpot is won) is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is low probability at the stop display timing of the special symbol. Transition to the state, the second time saving end conditions (conditions that are satisfied according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of times of lottery)) are satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is low at the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol When the probability change end condition (the first probability change end condition that is satisfied when the jackpot is won, the second probability change end condition that is satisfied according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (the number of times of lottery)) is satisfied along with the transition to the probability state In the special symbol stop display period (symbol fixing period) at the end timing, it is configured to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state.

With this configuration, the period in which the latent state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is set as the gaming state can be made different according to the time saving end condition that is established, so , It is possible to expect not only a big hit as a special symbol lottery result, but also a longer period in which an advantageous game state is set.

Next, the special figure 1 fixed period end command is set (S858), and the same processing as the processing of S801 to S805 in the above-described first embodiment is executed. Next, the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h and the probability variation counter 203aa are reset (S859), the big hit medium flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a process during a fixed time which is one process in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment ( S860) will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the process during the fixed time (S860).

In the processing during the fixed time (S860), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901). The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol and the lottery result is stopped and displayed (see S1602 in FIG. 46). Then, during the period when the small hit game is being executed, in the process of S201 of the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 of FIG. 97), the first special symbol variation stop process 2 is configured not to be executed. In other words, in the processing of S2901 of the processing during the fixed time (see S860 of FIG. 101), it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the special symbol is the first time after the small hit game is over. Only when the variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) is executed.

Therefore, in the process of S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the special figure 1 restart command is set (S2902), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag is set. 203v is set to off (S2903), and the process proceeds to S2904. That is, in the process of S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the small hit game is finished, so the small hit game is executed. The processing of S2902 and S2903 is executed in order to restart the update processing of the symbol settlement period which has been temporarily stopped by doing so.

On the other hand, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (S2901: No), the processes of S2902 and S2903 are skipped and S2904 is executed. Process shifts to.

In the process of S2904, the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is decremented by 1 and updated (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2905), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953), in contrast to the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 of FIG. 40) in the first embodiment described above, in place of the process of S1002, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is The difference is that a process (S1051) for determining whether the value is greater than 0 is executed. Since other processes are the same as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S903), detailed description thereof will be omitted. The contents of the process executed in S1051 described above are the same as the contents executed in S451 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 of FIG. 98) described above, and therefore the detailed description thereof is omitted. The description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, regarding the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263) which is one process in the special symbol fluctuation process (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. explain. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263), in addition to the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (see S213 of FIG. 45) in the above-described first embodiment, the point of adding the process of S1551 to S1563, and S1506. The difference is that the process of S1560 is provided instead of the process of S1509 and the process of S1509 and S1510 is deleted. Other processes are the same as the second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213 in FIG. 45), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

This second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263), like the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) described above, the symbol determination period has elapsed after the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed. The process up to is performed, and is different in that the control target is changed from the first special symbol (special figure 1) to the second special symbol (special figure 2). In addition, among the various processes executed in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263), only the control target for the various processes of the above-described first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) The detailed description of the processing only for changing the different symbol types will be omitted.

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S263), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551). If it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the process of S1552 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1553. On the other hand, in the process of S1551, when it is determined that the special figure 2 symbol determination flag 203ab is set to OFF (S1551: No), the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the second special symbol which is one process in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S263 of FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. The fixed period setting process (S1552) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fixed period setting process (S1552). This second special symbol fixed period setting process (S1552), the first special symbol target symbol type for the process executed in the above-described first special symbol fixed period setting process (see S852 of FIG. 100) Change from the second special symbol, the command to be set is the special symbol 2 confirmation command corresponding to the second special symbol, in the point that the symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the second special symbol. The only difference is that the other processing contents are the same. Therefore, the detailed description of this process will be omitted by referring to the contents of the above-described first special symbol determination period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100).

Returning to FIG. 103, the description will be continued. After executing the processing of S1551 or S1552, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553), and the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is not 0 (that is, When it is determined that it is larger than 0 (S1553: No), the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is updated (S1562), and the display of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1563). ), and ends this processing.

The process of S1563 is to update the display of the second special symbol which is already stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, in order to indicate that the special symbol is stopped on the first symbol display device 37, the symbol is lit and displayed (including a display that blinks at high speed so that the player recognizes that it is lit). Since it is configured as described above, in the process of S1563, an instruction for lighting the second special symbol is output to the first symbol display device 37.

In the case of using the configuration in which the special symbol is simply turned on during the symbol determination period as in the present embodiment, for example, the second special symbol determination period setting process (see S1552 in FIG. 104) In the process of S3009, the second special symbol is configured to output an instruction to stop (display stop), and also output information indicating a period (symbol fixing period) to be stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (symbol fixing) During the period), the second special symbol may be preset to be lit and displayed. With such a configuration, in the processing executed in a short cycle, it is not necessary to execute the processing for updating the display content of the first symbol display device 37 each time, so the processing load of the main control device 110 Can be reduced.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fixed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553: Yes), the special figure 2 symbol fixing flag 203ac is set to OFF (S1554). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to ON (S1555), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit flag 203h is set to OFF (S1555: No), the probability variation counter 203aa. It is determined whether the value of is larger than 0 (S1556).

When it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (S1556: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is decremented by 1 (S1557), and the process of the SW valid time counter 223h1558 is performed. On the other hand, in the process of S1555, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1555: Yes), or when it is determined in the process of S1556 that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0. (S1556: No), the process of S1557 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1558.

In the process of S1558, a state command according to the values of the time saving counter 203f and the probability variation counter 203aa is set (S1558), then a special figure 2 fixed period end command is set (S1559), and then the above-described first embodiment. The same processing of S1501 to S1505 is executed. Here, in the process of S1501, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S1501: No), the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S1561). ) Is executed, and this processing is ended.

After the processing of S1505 is finished, next, the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is reset (S1560), and the same processing of S1507 as in the first embodiment described above is executed. Then, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (which is one process in the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. S1561) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 disengagement stop process 2 (S1561). The special figure 2 deviation stop process 2 (S1561) in the second embodiment is different from the special figure 2 deviation stop process (S1508) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1607 to S1610 are not executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment is the command determination process 2 instead of the command determination process (see FIG. 59) in the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 106), except that the various counter update processing 2 (see FIG. 71) is executed in place of the various counter update processing (see FIG. 71), and the other processing is the same. Specifically, the processing executed when various commands output by changing the control contents executed by the main control device 110 from the first embodiment and the various kinds of commands added from the second embodiment are received. A process to update the counter value has been added.

First, with reference to FIG. 106, a command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 2 (S4162). The command determination process 2 (S4162) is different from the command determination process (S4112 of FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes of S4251 to S4255 are added. Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the same processes of S4201 to S4216 as the command determination process (S4112 of FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above are executed. Then, in the process of S4215, when it is determined that the hit related command is not received from the main control device 110 (S4215: No), it is next determined whether or not the remaining number related command is received (S4251). ).

Here, as the remaining number-related command, the remaining short time number command (set by the process of S603 of FIG. 36) indicating the remaining number of times (the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set is set. Command) and a high probability state of the special symbol, the residual probability variation number command (command set by the process of S857 of FIG. 99) indicating the remaining number of times (the residual variation number of the special symbol) that is continuously set. When it is determined that the remaining count related command has been received (S4251: Yes), the remaining count update processing 2 (S4252) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the remaining number update processing 2 (S4252) which is one of the command determination processing 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. .. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the content of the remaining number update processing 2 (S4252). The remaining number update process 2 (S4252) is different from the remaining number update process (S4218) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes of S4851 to S4852 are added. Specifically, the difference is that a process for transmitting a command for displaying the number of residual probability changes to the display control device 114 is added.

In the remaining number update processing 2 (S4252), first, it is determined whether or not a remaining short time count command is received from the main control device 110 (S4801). When it is determined that the remaining short time count command is received (S4801: Yes), the display remaining short time count command corresponding to the command is set (S4802). On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining short time count command has not been received (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4851. Next, it is determined whether or not the residual probability variation number command has been received (S4851). When it is determined that the residual probability variation number command has been received (S4851: Yes), the display residual probability variation number command corresponding to the command is set (S4852), and the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the residual probability variation number command has not been received (S4851: No), this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 106, the explanation will be continued. In the processing of S4251, when it is determined that the remaining number related command is not received (S4251: No), it is determined whether the temporary stop related command is received (S4219). Here, in the temporary stop related command, the special figure 1 temporary stop command set when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v for temporarily stopping the first special symbol is set to ON (see S1603 in FIG. 46). And the variable display of the first special symbol that is temporarily stopped, or the special figure 1 restart command (see S2902 in FIG. 101) set when restarting the stop display is included. If it is determined that the temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) is executed, and the present process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 108, a temporary stop-related process 2 (S4253) which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. .. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253). The temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) is different from the temporary stop related process (S4203) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for calculating the remaining fixed time is added.

In this temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), in the variable display of the first special symbol, or when the elapsed time of the stop display is temporarily interrupted (temporary stop), the temporarily stopped first special symbol A process for executing the effect display mode corresponding to the variable display mode or the stop display mode on the third symbol display device 81 is performed. In the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received from the main control device 110 (S4951). When it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received (S4951: No), the restart process (S4952) is executed, and this process is ended. Details of the restart processing (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. 109. On the other hand, in the processing of S4951, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received (S4951: Yes), that is, the variable display of the first special symbol (special figure 1) along with the execution of the small hit game, or When it is determined that it is time to temporarily stop the stop display, it is then determined whether the in-fixing flag 223ad is set to ON (S4953). Here, when it is determined that the in-fixing flag 203ab is set to ON (S4953: Yes), since the first special symbol is being stopped and displayed (during the symbol fixing period), the set symbol fixing time is set. The remaining time of (the symbol fixed time of the first special symbol) is calculated (S4954), and the process proceeds to S4955.

In the process of S4954, the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa, that is, the value indicating the remaining time of the symbol determination time of the first special symbol is read to calculate the remaining time of the set symbol determination time. Next, it is determined whether the symbol remaining time calculated in the process of S4954 is less than 2 seconds (S4955). When it is determined that the remaining time is less than 2 seconds (S4955: Yes), the period A indicating that the remaining fixed time is short is set in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac (S4956), and the process of S4952 is executed. Then, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4955, when it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4955: No), then the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds. It is determined whether or not (S4957). In the processing of S4957, when it is determined that the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4957: Yes), it is determined that the remaining remaining time information storage area 223ac has the normal remaining remaining time. The period B shown is set (S4958), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process is terminated.

When it is determined in the processing of S4957 that the remaining time is not less than 60 seconds (60 seconds or more) (S4957: No), it indicates that the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac is long. The period C is set (S4959), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S4953, if it is determined that the flag 223ad during confirmation is set to OFF (S4953: No), that is, if it is determined that the present is during the variable display period of the first special symbol, The temporary stop related process of the first embodiment described above (see S4220 of FIG. 67) is executed to perform the process (see S4903 to S4908) for calculating the remaining variation time of the first special symbol, and the process of S4952. Move to. The process for calculating the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) is the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a restart process (S4952) which is one process in the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the content of the restart processing (S4952).

In the second embodiment, in addition to the variable display of the first special symbol (during the variable display period), the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol can be executed during the stop display (during the symbol determination period). Since it is configured, when the small hit game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, the stop display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (temporarily interrupting the subtraction of the symbol fixing period) Is configured as follows. Further, at the timing when the small hit game is finished, the stop display of the first special symbol is restarted (the subtraction of the symbol fixing period is restarted). Therefore, in the present second embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol, or the situation of the first special symbol when restarting the stop display is determined, and based on the determination result, the effect mode after restart is set. It is configured to do.

In the restart processing (S4952), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 restart command is received (S5001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S5001: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether the committing flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051). When it is determined that the finalizing flag 223ad is set to ON (S5051: Yes), that is, the timing of receiving the special figure 1 restart command is during the stop display of the first special symbol, the remaining finalization is determined. Based on the read of the remaining fixed time information stored in the time information storage area 223ac (S5052) and the read remaining fixed time information and the additional effect counter 223i, the additional effect type is determined from the additional effect selection 2 table 222aa ( (S5053), an additional display effect command for display corresponding to the additional effect type determined in the processing of S5053 is set (S5054), and the information set in the remaining fixed time information storage area 223ac is cleared (S5055). Then, the in-fixing flag 223ad is set to OFF (S5056), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5051, when it is determined that the in-fixing flag 223ad is set to OFF (S5051: No), that is, the timing at which the special figure 1 restart command is received is during the variable display of the first special symbol. In some cases, the same processing of S5002 to S5005 as the fluctuation restart processing (S4902 of FIG. 68) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 106, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4219, when it is determined that the temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation related command has been received (S4254). When it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has been received (S4254: Yes), the symbol confirmation related process (S4255) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has not been received (S4254: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S4221), and the present process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the symbol determination related process (S4255), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol determination related process (S4255).

In the symbol determination related process (S4255), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 determination command is received from the main control device 110 (S5071). If it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received (S5071: Yes), the display special figure 1 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5072). Next, the value corresponding to the received command is set in the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa (S5073), and the process proceeds to S5074. On the other hand, in the processing of S5071, if it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S5071: No), the processing of S5072 and S5073 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S5074.

In the process of S5074, it is determined whether the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074). If it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074: Yes), the special figure 2 confirmation command for display corresponding to the received command is set (S5075), and the value corresponding to the received command is set to the special figure. The 2 confirmation counter 223ab is set (S5076), the confirmation flag 223ad is set to ON (S5077), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5074, when it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received (S5074: No), the processing of S5075 and S5076 is skipped, the processing of S5077 is executed, and this processing ends. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 111, various counter update processing 2 (S4161) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of various counter update processing 2 (S4161).

In the various counter update processing 2 (S4161), first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is greater than 0 (S5451). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 definite counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 definite counter 223aa is decremented by 1 (S5452). On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 determination counter 223aa is 0 (S5451: No), the process of S5452 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5453. In the process of S5453, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453). When it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453: Yes), the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5454), and the special figure 1 definite counter 223aa is obtained. Then, the value of the sub special figure 2 variable time counter 223n is read (S5455). Next, the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 definite counter 223aa read in the process of S5455 to calculate the remaining time (S5456). Next, the processing of S5407 and S5408 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5453, when it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is 0 (S5453: No), the processing of S5454 to S5456 and S5407 is skipped and the processing of S5408 is executed. , This process ends.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 135. In the second embodiment described above, like the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to simultaneously change (so-called. , Simultaneous change type), by executing the lottery (change) of special figure 2 during the period when the latent state is set as the game state, it is possible to execute a large number of small hit games (RUSH games) Was configured.

Further, as a condition for setting the latent probability state (a condition under which the RUSH game can be executed), in the state where the probability variation state is set, the first probability variation end that is established when the jackpot is won in the lottery of Toku-zu 1 The condition and the second probability variation end condition that is satisfied when the number of times of variation of the special symbol (number of times of lottery) reaches a predetermined number (50 times) are provided, and if the first probability variation end condition is satisfied, a big hit is won. When the special symbol (special figure 1) indicating that it has been stopped is displayed in a latent state (symbol fixing period), and the second probability variation ending condition is satisfied, the special symbol is variably displayed. The period (variable display period) and the symbol determination period are configured to be in a latent state.

Also, the length of the symbol settlement period is configured to differ depending on the result of the special symbol lottery, and when the jackpot is won, the symbol settlement period is set longer than when the jackpot is not won. Was configured as.

In addition, when one of the special symbols (special map 1) is selected to win the jackpot, the other symbol (special map 2) is selected to draw an ineffective lottery that does not win the jackpot. In this configuration, the value related to the condition for changing the game state is not updated by this invalid lottery. Specifically, during the period when you win the jackpot in the lottery of special map 1 (during the variable display period of the special symbols that wins the jackpot, and during the symbol fixing period), you execute the lottery of special map 2. Even if it does, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is not updated (subtracted).

In the second embodiment configured in this manner, in the state where the probability variation state is set, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of Toku-zu 1, the period during which the jackpot game is executed for the jackpot winning (variable display Until the period, the symbol determination period) ends, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is not updated (subtracted) no matter how many times the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed, so the special figure 2 Was able to carry out fluctuations.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the types of the probability variation ending conditions are increased more than in the second embodiment, and the period in which the latent probability state is set is longer than that in the second embodiment. doing. Specifically, as the probability variation end condition, the probability variation end condition (third probability variation end condition) is established when the small hit is won in the special figure 1 while the probability variation state is set, and the third When the probability variation ending condition is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted from the probability variation state to the latent probability state at the time when the small hit game is started.

Furthermore, the period when the high probability state of the special symbol is set (the value of the probability variation counter 203aa) and the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the value of the time saving counter 203f) are the same (for example, "4 )), the probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, if you do not win the jackpot, the game state transitions from the probability change state to the normal state Is configured.

In other words, in the third embodiment, while the probability change state (high probability state for both the special symbol and the ordinary symbol) is set, the small symbol is won in the lottery of the special map 1, and the ordinary symbol is changed to the low probability state. By shifting, the period from the start timing of the small hit game until the low probability state of the special symbol is set can be set to the latent probability state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the period during which the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is continuously set according to the timing of winning the small hit in the lottery of Toku-zu 1. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the lottery result of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not get tired.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the big hit is won in the final fluctuation in which the probability variation state ends, a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is easily selected. As a result, even if the final variation of the probability variation state is reached without winning the small hit, it is possible to set the latent state for a long time, so that the player is expected to play until the end. Can be made.

Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the types of benefits granted based on the game content of the special figure 1 in the probability variation state in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram summarizing the relationship between the game contents of the special figure 1 game after the probability variation state is set and the granted privilege. As shown in FIG. 112, in the present embodiment, the probability variation state is set in a predetermined period after the jackpot is over (4 variations of the special symbol), and the number of variations during the probability variation state (after the jackpot) The contents of the privilege given to the player are made to differ depending on the number of fluctuations of the special map) and the lottery result of the special map.

Specifically, in the first and second special map 1 fluctuations (special map 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, when the lottery result (lottery result of special map 1) is a big hit, there are many players. In addition to the jackpot game that can win the prize ball, as a period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed, the period in which the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that it is a jackpot (symbol fixing period ) Is set. In addition, when the lottery result (lottery result of special map 1) is a small hit, the small hitting game is executed based on the lottery result of special map 1 as a period in which the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed. It is specified that the period until the number of special symbol fluctuations after the big hit reaches four (the symbol fixing period) is set.

In other words, when you win the small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery for the first time after the end of the big hit, the timing at which the small hit game is started (the timing at which the first special symbol fluctuation stops and the small hit game is executed ), the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is set in the period from the end of the jackpot until the end of the fourth special figure fluctuation. Therefore, as the period in which the latent probability state (RUSH state) is set, the longest period is set to “super long”. In addition, if the lottery result (lottery result of special map 1) is missed in the first and second special map 1 fluctuations (special map 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, no benefit is given to the player. Is never given.

In the special figure 1 fluctuation (special figure 1 lottery) at the third time after the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state is set under the same conditions as the first and second times after the probability variation state is set as described above. I am configuring. Here, if you win the small hit, in addition to during the small hit game, the period until the end of the fourth special figure fluctuation is set as the latent probability state, so after the above-mentioned probability change state is set The period in which the latent probability state is set becomes shorter than in the case where the small hit is won in the first and second fluctuations of the special map (special drawing 1 lottery).

In addition, in the third embodiment, as the number of special figure 1 fluctuations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability variation state is set in the probability variation state increases, a variation having a long variation time when the jackpot is won. The pattern is configured to be easily selected. Therefore, as compared with the case where the jackpot is won in the first to second variation of the special figure (special figure 1 lottery) after the above-described probability variation state is set, the period in which the latent probability state is set can be easily extended. be able to.

Next, in the fourth special map change (special map lottery) after the probability change state is set, that is, in the final change of the special map in the probability change state, the special map change is started regardless of the result of the special map lottery. To the end (until the symbol determination period has elapsed) is set as a latent state. In the third embodiment, it is easy to set a long variation time when the jackpot is won in the final variation of the special map in the probability variation state (the fourth variation of the special figure after the probability variation state is set). Therefore, the length of the period in which the latent state is set is “long”.

If the jackpot is not won due to the final fluctuation of the special map in the probability changing state, the normal state is set after the symbol fixing period and the special drawing lottery for the fifth time and thereafter is executed.

<Regarding the effect display content in the third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 112, the period in which the latent probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set varies depending on the transition condition (probability change end condition) that is satisfied. In the probability variation state, a suggestion effect (bingo game) for suggesting to the player the possibility that the latent state is set and the timing when the latent state is set is executed. I am configuring.

Therefore, the display content of the suggestive effect (bingo game) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Incidentally, among the elements displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in the above-described respective embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 113(a), the display content of the jackpot game end screen (ending screen) in which the probability variation state is set will be described. FIG. 113(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen at the end of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 113(a), in the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, in the main display area Dm, the same special figure 1 display area Dm1 and special figure 2 display area as those in the second embodiment described above. Dm2 and a guide display area Dm3 are formed, and in addition, a special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4 showing the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 and a special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm5 showing the number of reserved balls of special figure 2. , Are formed.

FIG. 113(a) shows an end screen of the jackpot game executed on the basis of the special map 1 jackpot, and shows that the lottery result of the special map 1 is a jackpot in the special map 1 display area Dm1. The stop display mode "777" of the third symbol is displayed, and "-" indicating that the special figure 2 change is not executed is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Further, in the guide display area Dm3, the characters "left hit" are displayed to indicate that the jackpot game was played in the left hit game.

In the third embodiment, similar to the second embodiment described above, the game content (right hit or left hit) displayed in the guide display area Dm3 during the jackpot game is the same as the game content when the jackpot is won. Is configured to be. That is, the state shown in FIG. 113(a) is a jackpot that was won during the left-handed game.

Further, in the center of the main display area Dm, a bingo card 820 used in the probability changing state set after the jackpot game is displayed. Here, the suggestive effect (bingo game) executed in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, bingo is used as a suggestive effect for suggesting to the player whether the latent probability state is set or whether the jackpot is won during the period in which the probability variation state is set. The game is configured to run.

In this bingo game, a bingo card 820 (see FIG. 113(a)) in which arbitrary numbers are arranged for 9 squares (3 vertical×3 horizontal) is displayed on the jackpot end screen (ending screen). , Numbers are announced based on the lottery of Toku-zu 1 executed in the state where the probability variation state is set, and the player is informed based on the announced numbers and the arrangement of the numbers described in the bingo card 820. An effect that suggests the game result (the lottery result of Toku-zu 1) is executed.

Next, the display content (effect content) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the bingo game will be described with reference to FIGS. 113(b) to 115. When the bingo game is started (when the change of Toku-zu 1 during the probability change state is started), the display shown in FIG. 113(b) is executed. FIG. 113(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content displayed when the special figure 1 variation (first time) is executed after the jackpot is over.

As shown in FIG. 113(b), when the special figure 1 change (first time) is executed, a display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. .. Then, "3" is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4, and the fact that the special figure 1 has been subtracted (updated) from the value ("4") shown in FIG. Showing.

Also, in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, the number "1" is displayed as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game based on the current (special figure 1 change (first time)) lottery result, and the lower right area. Displays a remaining number display 822 indicating the remaining number "last 3" of the bingo game. Here, for example, an effect example in the case where the special figure 1 variation (fourth time) in the probability changing state is a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 114.

FIG. 114A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the bingo game during the variation of the special figure 1 variation (third time) when the special figure 1 variation (fourth time) in the probability variation state is a big hit. 114(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents during the change of the special figure 1 change (fourth time). In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 112, the latent state is set at the timing when the variation display of the special figure 1 is started in the final variation of the positive variation state (special figure 1 variation (fourth time)). It is configured to be performed, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is executed to execute the lottery of the special figure 2 by a right-handed game during the latent probability state.

Therefore, immediately after the final variation of the probability variation state is executed (after the symbol determination period of the special figure 1 variation (third time) has elapsed), the latent probability state is set so that the player can immediately perform the right-handed game. The effect result (bingo 2 row alignment display) for notifying that the setting is made is made before the special map 1 change (4th time) when the latent state is set (during special map 1 change (3rd time)). It is configured to run. With this configuration, it is possible to set the latent probability state in a state in which the player fully understands that the latent state is set.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, it is short when the jackpot or the small hit is not won in the lottery of Toku-zu 1 in the final variation of the probability variation state (when it is out). A variation pattern of the variation time (1 second) is selected, and an effect result (bingo two-row aligned display) for notifying that the latent state is set in the bingo game is not displayed. .. As a result, it is possible to execute the failure effect of the bingo game without notifying the player that the latent state is actually set for a short time. Further, when the latent probability state for a short time is set, since it is not displayed in the guide display area Dm3 that the player is to play the right-handed game, the annoyance of the game can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 114(a), the description will be continued. In FIG. 114(a), the variation display of the special map 1 variation (third time) is displayed, and the lottery result “1” of the special figure 1 variation (first time) and the special map 2 variation (second time) is drawn. “8” is displayed as the past history 823 on the left side of the main display area Dm, and “5” is displayed as the current lottery result 821. Then, in the bingo card 820, the cells corresponding to “1”, “8”, and “5” displayed in the current bingo game are changed to “cross marks”, and two lines of lines are formed and displayed. ..

Furthermore, “double bingo” is displayed as a status display mode 821 indicating the current status, and a comment of “super lucky” is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this way, by notifying the player that the bingo game has been successful during the change before the special map 1 change (the fourth time) in which the jackpot is actually won, the player can be presented with the effect. It is possible to provide a period in which a successful satisfaction is enjoyed and to notify in advance that it is necessary to play a right-handed game from the next fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, as a comment for notifying that the right-handed game will be performed from the next change (a comment for notifying that the right-handed game condition is satisfied (the condition for setting the latent probability state is satisfied)) Although "I'm about to hit the right hand game" is displayed in the sub display area Ds, the player is informed in advance of the timing at which the latent probability state is set, that is, the timing of performing the right hand game. It is only necessary to calculate, for example, a remaining period until the end of the special figure 1 change (third time) (the remaining period obtained by adding the remaining change display period of the special figure 1 change (third time) and the symbol fixing period). It is also possible to provide a calculating means and notify the player of information based on the calculation result of the calculating means (information for indicating the remaining variation period of the variation (3rd time) of Toku-zu 1).

In the third embodiment, when the probability variation state is set as the game state and a ball is inserted into the second ball inlet 640 (when the starting condition of Toku-zu 2 is satisfied), A variation pattern with a short variation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. As a result, if the right-handed game is performed in the state where the probability variation state is set and the variation (lottery) of special figure 2 is executed, the probability variation state is set for the period in which the latent probability state can be set. It becomes extremely short compared to the case where the left-handed game is performed in the state and the variation (lottery) is executed in the special figure 2, so the right-handed game in the probability changing state can be a disadvantageous game that is disadvantageous to the player. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the action of intentionally performing an irregular game different from the displayed content during the probability variation state where “left hit” is displayed in the guide display area Dm3 of the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case where the probability variation state is set as the game state, a ball is thrown into the second ball entrance 640 (when the starting condition of special figure 2 is satisfied). ), a fluctuation pattern of a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. However, the fluctuation pattern is not limited to this, and the special figure 2 fluctuation during the probability variation state is set. The time may be configured to be a fluctuation time extremely longer than the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 (for example, 120 seconds).

With this configuration, for example, when the right-handed game is performed in a state in which the probability variation state is set ignoring the progress content of the suggestive effect (bingo game) executed on the third symbol display device 81 Since the special map 2 fluctuation is executed for a long time (for example, 120 seconds), even if the latent probability state is set thereafter (for example, the fluctuation of the special map 1 fluctuation (the fourth time) that is won the jackpot). Even if the display is started), because the special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed, the latent probability state game (the game that executes the special figure 2 fluctuation while the latent probability state is set) is newly added. It can be hard to execute.

In the present embodiment, the latent state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is set based on the variation period of the special symbol (special symbol 1) and the symbol fixing period. The longer the period from the setting of (the start of the predetermined Toku-zu 1 fluctuation) to the end of the running Toku-zu 2 fluctuation is, the longer the period during which the Toku-zu 2 fluctuation in the latent state can be executed (latent probability State game period) will be shortened. Further, in the state where the probability variation state is set, in order to reliably prevent the special figure 2 fluctuation from being executed, when a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the latent probability state was set. Similarly, when the right hitting game is started, the latent state game period is shortened. Therefore, in order to grasp the timing of executing the right hitting game, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed to the player. The display contents on the screen can be watched.

When the right hitting game is performed during the latent state and the special figure 2 variation is executed, the effect display during the RUSH game (latent state state game) shown in FIG. 114(b) is the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed on the display screen of. FIG. 114(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 when the fourth special figure fluctuation is a big hit after the jackpot is over (after the probability variation state is set). In the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when the latent probability state is set, a latent probability state game (RUSH game) in which the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed by the right hitting game is performed. That is, during the latent probability state, the right-handed game is an advantageous game and the left-handed game is a disadvantageous game.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 114(b), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, “right hit” is entered in the guide display area Dm3, and the special figure 1 changes (4 in the special figure 1 display area Dm1). In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, a display mode indicating that the special figure 2 change is being executed is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4. “0” indicating that there is no reserved number in the special figure 1 is displayed, and “0” indicating that there is no reserved number in the special figure 2 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved sphere number display area Dm5.

While the RUSH game is being executed, a character 811 imitating a rabbit runs from left to right and opens the treasure box 812 discovered on the way (the same effect as the first embodiment). Is displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the sub display area Ds, the character "RUSH in progress" is displayed, which indicates that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is being performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the latent state game (RUSH game) is currently in progress in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the above-described FIGS. 113 to 114, as the probability variation end condition for ending the probability variation state, the second probability variation termination condition that is satisfied based on the number of variations of the special symbol is satisfied, that is, the final variation (4) of the probability variation state. An example of the display screen when the latent state is set in the second special map change) has been described. In the third embodiment, the probability variation end condition for terminating the probability variation state (transition of the probability variation state to the latent probability state) (condition for shifting the high probability state of a normal symbol to the low probability state) is the first Probability change end condition (probability change end condition that is established based on the big win), 2nd probability change end condition (probability change end condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol changes), third probability change end condition (established based on the small win) It is configured to shift the game state from the probability variation state to the latent probability state when any of the termination conditions is satisfied.

Next, referring to FIG. 115(a), the display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the first probability variation end condition is satisfied before the above-described second probability variation end condition is satisfied. Explain the contents. FIG. 115( a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents executed during the third special map change after the big hit (after setting the probability variation state) and when the third special map change is a big hit. It is a figure.

In the third embodiment, if the first probability variation ending condition (winning for the special symbol jackpot) is satisfied, the special symbol for indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, The latent state is set during the period until the stop display is finished (the symbol fixing period). Therefore, since the probability variation state is continuously set during the variable display period of the special figure 1 (during the special figure change), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 has a special feature in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 115(a). A display mode indicating that the display in FIG. 1 is being changed is displayed, and “left-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. Then, “4” is displayed in the lottery result 821, and the bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode indicating that one line has been established.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, in the third embodiment, when the first probability variation ending condition described above is satisfied and the latent probability state is set during the symbol determination period of the special symbol, it becomes a target. It is configured so that different numbers can be displayed as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game a plurality of times during the variable display period of the special symbol, and the player is notified stepwise of information for indicating the final result of the bingo game this time. It is configured to do.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 115(a), the special map 1 is in a variable display and shows a state in which one line of lines is established. For example, the type of the jackpot that has been won this time is a long symbol confirmation. When the period (for example, 300 seconds) is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot C), a different number is selected as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the remaining period until the variable display of the special figure 1 ends. (For example, "5") is newly displayed, and finally, an effect in which the result of the bingo game is "two lines are established" is executed.

In this way, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) can be changed a plurality of times during the variable display of the special symbols. As a result, the contents of the privilege (RUSH game, jackpot game) given to the player at the end of the current special figure fluctuation can be grasped as the special symbol fluctuation display period elapses. The effect contents displayed on the display screen of the three-symbol display device 81 can be continuously watched.

If the type of jackpot that is won this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) for which a short symbol fixing period (for example, 5 seconds) is set, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) does not change. A number (for example, “3”) is displayed, and the result of the bingo game may be “one line is established”.

With such a configuration, while unifying the number of lottery results 821 displayed by the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823), the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) and the special symbol It is possible to correlate with the content (amount of privilege) of the privilege given after the end of the variable display of. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content and the result of the bingo game, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

In the third embodiment, regardless of the special symbol lottery result, the number of lottery results 821 displayed in the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) is unified, and the result of the bingo game is obtained. Although the production that excites the player is shown as to whether or not (the number of established lines) is increased, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the content of the privilege (amount of privilege) given after the end of the variable display of the special symbol, The number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) may be associated with each other. As a result, it is possible to give a more advantageous privilege to the player when a lot of numbers are displayed as the lottery result 821 during the bingo game, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115(b), the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the third probability variation ending condition is satisfied will be described. FIG. 115( b) schematically shows an example of display contents executed during the second special map change after the big hit (after the probability variation state is set) and the second special map change is the small hit. It is a schematic diagram.

The third embodiment is configured such that the timing at which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the type of the established probability variation ending condition. Specifically, if the first probability variation end condition is satisfied, from the time when the stop display of the corresponding special symbol is started, until the stop display is completed (until the jackpot game is started) (target symbol) The symbol confirmation period) is set as a latent state, and if the second probability variation ending condition is satisfied, from the time when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol is started until the stop display of the corresponding special symbol is ended. The period (variable display period and symbol determination period of the target symbol) is set as the latent state. That is, the latent probability state is set within the period of the special symbol 1 variation, regardless of which of the first probability variation ending condition and the second probability variation ending condition described above is satisfied.

On the other hand, if the third probability variation end condition is met, if the small hit is won in any of the multiple (4) special figure 1 fluctuations that can be executed within the period in which the probability variation state is set In, the latent state is set in the period from the start of the stop display of the special symbol indicating that the lottery result is a small hit to the end of the stop display of the special symbol that is the final fluctuation of the probability variation state .. That is, if you win the small hit in the special drawing lottery (first special drawing lottery) executed immediately after the probability change state is set, the special symbol indicating the result of the first special lottery (small hit) is stopped From the time it is displayed until the special symbol lottery period (variable display period and symbol confirmation period) for the second to fourth times is reached until the stop display of the special symbol indicating the result of the fourth special symbol lottery is completed (multiple times During the special map fluctuation period), the latent state is set.

As shown in FIG. 115(b), when the third probability variation ending condition is satisfied, "ALL" for all numbers is displayed in the lottery result 821, and 8 lines (all lines) are established. The bingo card 820 is displayed in the display mode indicating. Then, "341" indicating that the small hit is won is displayed in the special map 1 display area Dm1, and "right" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3 to indicate that the latent probability state game (RUSH game) has started. Strike is displayed.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the third embodiment, regarding the presence/absence of the first probability variation ending condition or the second probability variation ending condition, the special figure fluctuation (special figure lottery) in which each probability variation ending condition is satisfied is established. ) Is determined before the execution of () is performed (preliminary determination), the third probability variation ending condition is configured not to perform the preliminary determination.

With this configuration, the progress content of the suggestive effect (bingo game) that is displayed over a plurality of changes in the special symbol executed in the period in which the probability variation state is set is changed to the first probability variation end. Since it can be set in accordance with the condition or whether or not the second probability variation end condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and when the third end condition is satisfied. Since the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 115(b) is executed, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

In the third embodiment, it is configured to determine in advance whether or not the first probabilistic change end condition and the second probable change end condition are satisfied, and not determine in advance whether or not the third probable change end condition is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only the second probability variation ending condition that is established based on the number of times the special symbol changes may be pre-determined.

Further, as the above-described pre-determination, when the jackpot is over (during the ending period of the jackpot game), the pre-determination is performed on the special map 1 that is held and stored, and the big hit is won in the special map 1 that is stored and stored. It is configured to determine whether or not the information corresponding to the lottery result is included, and to change the combination of numbers displayed on the bingo card 820 based on the determination result.

With such a configuration, a suggestive effect that does not give a sense of incongruity with respect to the number of special figure fluctuations that are executed before the jackpot is won and the amount of privilege given to the player by winning the jackpot (bingo Game) can be executed. In addition, by allowing the player to understand the numbers displayed on the bingo card 820, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting future game results in advance.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 116 to 121, an electrical configuration of main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 are changed and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 are changed in the third embodiment. It is different in that it is done. The other points are the same as in the second embodiment, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the first random number 3 table 202ba is replaced with the first random number table 202a, the small hit random number table 202b is replaced with the small hit random number table 202bb, and the big hit type selection 2 table 202aa is replaced. The big hit type selection 3 table 202bc is replaced with the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is replaced with the variation pattern selection 2 table 202ac, and the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be is provided. This is different from the second embodiment.

The first random number 3 table 202ba is a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol, as compared to the first random number table 202a of the above-described second embodiment (similar to the first embodiment, see FIG. 15A). It is different in that the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be and the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol are changed.

Here, the contents defined in the first random number 3 table 202ba will be described with reference to FIG. 117(a). FIG. 117A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117(a), in the case of a low probability state of a special symbol as a game state (normal state, time saving state), the first special symbol or the first special symbol obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol It is determined whether the value of the hit random number counter C1 is "0-9", and if it is "0-9", it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit.

Also, in the case of a high probability state of the special symbol as the game state (probability change state, latent probability state), the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is determined whether it is in the range of "0 to 99", and if it is in the range of "0 to 99", it is determined that it is a big hit. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, out of the random number counter of 480 in total, in the low probability state of the special symbol, 10 values are defined as the value to be judged as the big hit, so The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/48. On the other hand, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is 1/4.8.

The small hit random number 3 table 202bb is the first special symbol (special figure 1) with respect to the small hit random number table 202b (similar to the first embodiment, see FIG. 15B) of the above-described second embodiment. The difference is that the lottery was changed to win the small prize. Here, with reference to FIG. 117(b), the contents stipulated in the small hit random number 3 table 202bb will be described. FIG. 117(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 117(b), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first per random number counter C1 is "10-14", If any of "10 to 14", it is determined to be a small hit.

In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), since the same content as the small hitting random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B) is defined, detailed description thereof will be omitted. That is, the third embodiment is different from the second embodiment described above in that it is configured so that a small hit can be won even in the lottery of the first special symbol. And, in the third embodiment, when the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set and the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, normally It is configured to execute the process of shifting the high probability state of the symbol to the low probability state, that is, the process of shifting the gaming state from the probability changing state to the latent probability state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of shifting the game state to the latent state during the probability changing state, so that the player who is executing the game during the probability changing state is motivated to play the game. Can be done.

As shown in FIG. 117(b), in the third embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol (1/48 (see FIG. 117(a))) , The probability of winning the small prize of the first special symbol (1/32 (see FIG. 117 ((b)))) is higher. As a result, the latent probability state is set with high probability based on the small hit prize, compared to the case where the latent probability state is set based on winning the big hit of the special figure 1 in the probability changing state. For a player who is executing a game in a probability changing state, both a latent probability state game (RUSH game) and a jackpot game are executed, but it is difficult to win a jackpot winning game, and a latent state Only the game (RUSH game) is executed, and it is possible to perform both a game aiming for a small win and easier win than a big win.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the probability of winning the small hit of the special figure 1 is configured to be higher than the big hit probability of the special figure 1 in the high-probability state of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be configured to be lower than the jackpot winning probability of the special figure 1 in the high probability state, for example, even if the probability of winning the small hit of the special figure 1 is set to a low probability of 1/480. good. By configuring in this manner, in the state where the probability variation state is set, when the small hit is won before the big hit is won, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) in which the big hit game is not executed is executed. Since the game can be executed, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is surprising.

The jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is different from the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the above-described second embodiment in that the type of the jackpot type is changed, and various counters set after the jackpot is finished (time saving counter 203f, probability variation counter). 203aa, the fixed time counters 203ad, 203ae) are changed, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is changed. Here, the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118.

FIG. 118(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118(a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is a jackpot type operation content of each jackpot type defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) of the first embodiment described above. The contents of the jackpot operation that differ only in the number of rounds to be executed are specified, and for each jackpot type, a time saving counter 203f, a probability variation counter 203aa, a special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad, and a special figure 2 fixed time. The value of the counter 203ae is defined.

Specifically, the jackpot A whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 49". It is defined in the range, the jackpot operation contents in which the round game for opening the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R), and the time saving counter 203f has a value of "4", It is specified that the probability variation counter 203aa is set to a value of "4" and the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad is set to a value indicating "5 seconds".

The jackpot B in which the symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of "50 to 96". The jackpot operation contents in which the round game for opening the second attacker (the second variable winning device 650) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the probability variation counter 203aa are " The value of “4” is set so that the value indicating “100 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

The jackpot C in which the symbol type is set in correspondence with the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of "96 to 99". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the probability variation counter 203aa are " The value of “4” is specified such that the value indicating “300 seconds” is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

Further, the jackpot D whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of "0 to 64". That is, the round game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the jackpot operation content, and the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f is the probability variation counter 203aa. Is set to a value of "4", and a value indicating "0.5 seconds" is set to the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

The jackpot E in which the symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of "65 to 99". The jackpot operation content in which the round game for opening the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for two rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the probability variation counter 203aa are " The value of "4" is specified such that the value indicating "1 second" is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set higher than that in the above-described second embodiment so that the jackpot can be easily won and the bonus given to the player in the jackpot game ( Prize ball) is configured to be less. With this configuration, depending on the result of whether or not the latent state is set and the length of the period during which the latent state is continuously set, the amount of privilege (prize ball) given to the player. Since it is possible to greatly change the number, it is possible to provide the player with novel game playability.

The small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is the content of the small hit type set when the special figure 1 is won in contrast to the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) of the first embodiment described above. Is added and specified. Here, the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd will be described with reference to FIG. 118(b).

FIG. 118(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118(b), the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)) of the above-described first embodiment in relation to the symbol type “special figure 1 Is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16B) in that a small hit type D is added as a small hit type corresponding to "." 16(b)). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

The small hit type selection 3 table 202bd, when winning the small hit in the first special symbol (special figure 1), regardless of the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired, the first attacker (first variable winning A small hit game is defined in which the opening operation for opening the device 65) for 0.02 seconds is executed once. That is, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special drawing 1, the small hit game in which it is difficult for the player to obtain the prize ball in the small hit game is executed.

In other words, in the third embodiment, the small hit prize of the special map 1 is set as a trigger for setting the latent state as the game state, not for the purpose of giving the player a privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. It is an object. As a result, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won in the state where the probability variation state is set, the right-handed game is executed immediately after the effect (see FIG. 115(b)) for notifying that fact is executed. Even if you do, since the small hit game has already ended (because the time required for the ball fired by the right hitting game to reach the right area is longer than the small hit game period), the latent state is smooth A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

Further, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the small hit game can be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. In this embodiment, since the opening time of the first variable winning device 65 by the small hit game is set as short as 0.02 seconds, when the small hit of the special figure 1 is won in the normal state, the winning is achieved. Even if the game method is changed from the left-handed game to the right-handed game (at the time when the special symbol indicating the small hit winning is stopped and displayed), the ball is the first variable winning device 65 during the small hit game. Because it is difficult to win the prize, if you win the small hit of the special figure 1 in the normal state, an effect or a guide that emphasizes that you have won the small hit on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display area Dm3 is configured so that the display of "right hitting" for guiding the right hitting game is not executed.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from performing a troublesome game operation. It should be noted that in the normal state, a notification means may be provided for notifying that the small hit of the special figure 1 has been won, and when the small hit game based on the special figure 1 small hit win in the normal state is being played, the right hit display is performed. May be configured to execute.

The fluctuation pattern selection 3 table 202be is different from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above in that it is referred to when the probability variation state is set, instead of the time saving/probability variation table 202f2, the probability variation 3 table 202be1. Is different from the above in that a latent probability 3 table 203be2 is provided in place of the latent probability table 202f3 that is referred to when the latent probability state is set.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. FIG. 119(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be. As shown in FIG. 119(a), in the third embodiment, when the normal state is set as the game state, the same normal table 202f1 as in the above-described first embodiment is referred to, and the probability variation state is set. If it is set, the probability change 3 table 202be1 is referred to, and if the latent probability state is set, the latent probability 3 table 202be2 is referenced.

Note that, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118(a), the value of the hour/hour counter 203f and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa are the same after the jackpot is completed, and thus the probability variation Since the value of the counter 203aa becomes 0 and the gaming state (that is, the time saving state) in which the value of the time saving counter 203f becomes larger than 0 is not set, it is referred to when the time saving state is set. It does not have a variation pattern selection table.

Next, the contents of the probability change 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIG. 119(b). FIG. 119(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability change 3 table 202be1. As described above with reference to FIG. 118(a), the third embodiment is configured such that when the jackpot is won, the probability variation state is always set for the special symbol 4 variations. Then, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the variation pattern with reference to different variation pattern tables depending on the number of special symbol variations (number of special symbol variations) after the jackpot end and the lottery result of the special symbol ( (Variable time) is selected.

With such a configuration, the latent state is determined according to the timing (number of times the special figure changes) when the condition for setting the latent state as the game state (big win or small win in special figure 1) is satisfied. It is possible to change the period (special figure fluctuation time) in which is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention not only to the special symbol lottery result but also to the number of times of special symbol change, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Specifically, when the symbol type of the special symbol is the special symbol 1 and the lottery result is "big hit", when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the big hit is "1 to 2 times" , The "probability variation A table 202bea (probability variation A)" is referred to, in the case of "3 times", the "probability variation B table 202beb (probability variation B)" is referenced, and in the case of "4 times", the "probability variation C table" The table 202 bec (probability variation C)” is defined to be referred to. Also, if the lottery result is "small hit, miss", and if the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the big hit is "1 to 3 times", refer to the "probability variation A table 202bea (probability variation A)". In the case of "4 times", the "probability variation C table 202bec (probability variation C)" is referred to.

Further, when the symbol type of the special symbol is the special symbol 2, the “probability variation D table 202bed (probability variation D)” is referred to regardless of the lottery result and the number of variations of the special symbol after the jackpot. Stipulated in.

Next, the contents defined in the various probability variation tables (probability variation A table 202bea to probability variation D table 202bed) referred to in the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119(c) to 120. .. FIG. 119(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the probability variation A table 202bea, and FIG. 120(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the probability variation B table 202beb. 120(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation C table 202bec, and FIG. 120(c) is defined in the probability variation D table 202bed. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content typically.

As shown in FIG. 119(c), in the probability variation A table 202bea, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “0” as the variation pattern determined when the jackpot is hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). ~99" is associated with jackpot variation 1 (1 second), "100-197" is associated with jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and value "198" is assigned jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds). ) Is associated. In addition, when the small hit or miss is won in the lottery of Toku-zu 1, the small hit change 1 (1 second) or the deviation change 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1. Has been.

As shown in FIG. 120(a), in the probability variation B table 202beb, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when the jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1). ~99" is associated with jackpot variation 1 (1 second), "100-149" is associated with jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and "150-198" is associated with jackpot variation 3( (300 seconds) is associated.

As shown in FIG. 120(b), in the probability variation C table 202bec, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as the variation pattern determined when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol (special diagram 1). "1" is associated with jackpot variation 1 (1 second), "1" is associated with jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and "2" is associated with jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds). It is associated. In addition, when the small hit is won in the lottery of Toku-zu 1, the small hit change 2 (240 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1, and when the win is missed, the change type counter is The deviation variation 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of CS1.

As shown in FIG. 120(c), in the probability variation D table 202bed, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, as the variation pattern determined when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2). When the big hit variation 1 (1 second) is associated and the small hit is won, the small hit variation 4 (0.5 second) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. , The deviation variation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents defined in the latent probability 3 table 202be2 will be described. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the latent probability 3 table 202be2. As shown in FIG. 121, in the third embodiment, a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set is selected when the lottery of Toku-zu 1 is executed in the state where the latent state is set. Is configured.

Here, in the third embodiment, when the probability variation state is set, the latent probability state is set when the small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery, so the latent probability state is set. In order to select the variation pattern by referring to the work 3 table 202be2, it is necessary to win the small hit in the lottery of Toku-zu 1 during the probability variation state.

As described above, in the third embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is selected with reference to different tables according to the number of special symbol variations in the state where the probability variation state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to both the special symbol lottery result and the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of fluctuations since the probability variation state is set) that resulted in the lottery result.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the third embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. As shown in FIG. 122, the RAM 203 of the third embodiment has a special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba and a special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb added to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above. They differ in points. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is a flag for indicating that the small hit has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and by being set to ON, the special drawing 1 lottery It means that you won the small hit. The special map 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON for a period from when the small hit is won by the lottery of the special map 1 until the small hit game is executed.

The special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is a flag for indicating that the small hit game is executed based on the small hit winning of the first special symbol (special drawing 1), and is set to ON. , Shows that the small hitting game based on the small hitting prize of the special figure 1 is being executed. In the third embodiment, in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, when the small hit game based on the small hit winning of special figure 1 is started, the high probability state of the normal symbol is the low probability state It is configured to execute the process of shifting to.

The special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is determined when the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON in the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (see S871 in FIG. 128) (S3201 in FIG. 128). : Yes), it is set to ON (S3207 in FIG. 128), and in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129), when it is determined that it is the timing for starting the small hit (see S2503 in FIG. 129), the reference (S2551 of FIG. 129).

Next, in the processing of S2551 of FIG. 129, when it is determined that the setting is turned on (S2551 of FIG. 129: Yes), that is, the small hit game of this time is won as a small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 1. When it is determined that the small hit is executed based on this, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0. When it is determined in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 of FIG. 129) that it is the end timing of the small hit (S2511 of FIG. 129: Yes), it is set to OFF.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123(a). FIG. 123(a) shows the voice lamp control device of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of ROM222 of 113 typically. As shown in FIG. 123A, the ROM 222 of the third embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the second embodiment (first embodiment) described above in place of the additional effect selection table 222c, and the probability variation effect selection table 222ba. Is different in that it is provided. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the probability variation effect selection table 222ba will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation effect selection table 222ba. The probability variation effect selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting the final mode of the suggested effect (bingo game) described with reference to FIGS. 113(b) to 115(a), and wins the jackpot. The final mode is defined based on the number of changes (the number of changes in the special map after the end of the big hit) and the type of big hit that can be won.

Specifically, when the number of jackpot winning changes is "2", that is, when the jackpot is won again at the second special symbol change after the jackpot ends, the jackpot type to be won is "bonus A", "bonus B" ", the effect mode in which one row (line) is established in bingo is set, and in the case of "big hit C", the effect mode in which three rows (line) is established in bingo is set.

And, when the number of jackpot winning variations is “3”, that is, when the jackpot is won at the third special symbol variation after the jackpot ends, if the jackpot type to be won is “jackpot A” or “jackpot B” , It is defined that the effect mode in which two rows (lines) are established in bingo is set, and if "big hit C", the effect mode in which three rows (lines) are established in bingo is set.

Finally, if the number of jackpot win variations is "4", that is, if you win the jackpot at the 4th special symbol variation after the jackpot is over (the final variation of the special map where the probability variation state is set), the jackpot type to be won Is a "big hit A", a performance mode in which two rows (lines) are established in bingo is set, and if "big hit B", a performance mode in which three rows (lines) are established in bingo is set, and "big hit C" In that case, it is specified that a production mode in which all columns (lines) are established in bingo is set.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the first special symbol variation after the jackpot is over, the display screen at the end of the jackpot (normally, the bingo card The screen (see FIG. 113) on which 820 is displayed is configured to display a special display screen that guides that the latent state is set after the jackpot is over.

On this special display screen, an image celebrating the player is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "right hitting" for guiding the right hitting game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. As a result, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to perform a game (right hitting game) suitable for the game state (latent probability state) after the jackpot game is completed, so that the period in which the latent probability state is set is full. It is possible to utilize the lottery game of the second special symbol (special diagram 2).

In the third embodiment, the display screen at the end of the big hit is configured to display the special display screen in the case of winning the big hit at the first special symbol change after the end of the big hit. The timing for displaying the special display screen may be any timing as long as it is during the big hit game, may be the timing at which the big hit game is started, or may be the timing at which a predetermined round game in the big hit game is executed. In this case, in the case of winning the jackpot in the normal state, by the time the round game of the jackpot game is started, of the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b, the special symbol variation to be executed next is dealt with. Pre-determination means is provided to determine in advance whether or not the winning information (the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot) includes information indicating that the jackpot is won, and the prior determination means As a result, when the information indicating that the jackpot is won is included, “right hit” is displayed in the guide display area Dm3 in order to perform the jackpot game in the right hitting game, and the right hitting game is performed. It is configured to execute the effect mode for making it happen in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and when the information indicating that the jackpot is won is not included, the guidance display area Dm3 indicates "left". It may be configured to display "strike".

With such a configuration, when the jackpot is won in the normal state (the game state in which the left-handed game is played), the jackpot game is displayed according to the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 that guides the game method during the jackpot game. It is possible to predict the game content after the end. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the same configuration of the game board 13 as that in the first embodiment is used, when the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, a left-handed game is played. It is configured so that the ratio of balls winning in the second variable winning device 650 does not change between the case and the case where a right-handed game is played. Therefore, even if the configuration in which the playing method (right-handed, left-handed) during the jackpot game is changed based on the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223b, it is disadvantageous to the player during the jackpot game. Does not provide a good situation.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) that is executed when it is determined that the ending command is received in the jackpot related process 3 (see S4552 in FIG. 132) (S4605 in FIG. 132: Yes). In, in the jackpot game by determining whether there is winning information to win the jackpot in the winning information (winning information of special figure 1) stored in the winning information storage area 223b (see S5605 of FIG. 133) The winning information newly generated in the above is also targeted for determination, and it is configured to be able to determine more winning information. However, if the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b (the winning information of special figure 1) is The timing other than the present embodiment may be set as the timing for determining whether or not there is the winning information for the jackpot. For example, the timing when the jackpot game is started or a specific round number (for example, two rounds). The timing at which the determination is executed may be the timing at which the determination is reached or the timing at which the specific round game (round game of the first round) ends.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123(b). FIG. 123(b) shows the voice lamp control device of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM223 of 113. As shown in FIG. 123(b), the RAM 223 of the third embodiment is provided with a residual probability variation number area 223ba, a pre-reading permissible flag 223bb, and a residual variation number counter 223bc in addition to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment described above. They differ in points. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The remaining probability variation number area 223ba is a storage area for storing the number of variations for which new winning information can be set as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state. A value obtained by subtracting the number of winning information already stored in the winning information storing area 223b in the jackpot end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) is set in the residual probability variation number area 223ba (S5604 in FIG. 133). .. Then, in the prize information-related processing (see S4271 in FIG. 131), the set value is referred to (see S5504 in FIG. 131), and when the set value is larger than 0, that is, during the probability change state. When it is possible to newly receive the winning information corresponding to the executable special symbol variation (S5504 of FIG. 131; Yes), the pre-reading process as the special symbol variation executed during the probability changing state (the winning information is the winning information. The process of determining whether or not it is included) is executed (S5505 in FIG. 131), and then the set value is decremented by 1 (S5507 in FIG. 131).

In this way, by using the remaining probability variation number area 223ba, as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state, it is determined whether or not new winning information can be set, and thus the probability variation state is set. It is possible to determine whether or not the newly received winning information in the state corresponds to the special symbol variation executed in the probability changing state. Therefore, since the probability variation effect executed during the probability variation state can be set only based on the winning information corresponding to the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state, it is possible to enhance the effect.

The pre-reading hit flag 223bb is a flag for indicating that there is winning information that has been won as a jackpot of the special symbol, and when set to ON, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is a jackpot. It indicates that there is winning information indicating that the player has been won.

The pre-reading hit flag 223bb is determined in the jackpot end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) that the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b includes winning information indicating that the jackpot is won. If it does (S5605 of FIG. 133: Yes), it is set to ON (S5606 of FIG. 133). In addition, it is determined that the prize information received this time in the prize information-related processing (see S4271 in FIG. 131) corresponds to the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state (S5504: Yes in FIG. 131), Even when it is determined that the winning information includes the winning information indicating that the jackpot is won (S5505: Yes in FIG. 131), it is set to ON (see S5506 in FIG. 131).

Then, it is referred to in the variation display setting process for probability variation (see S5151 of FIG. 135), and the prefetching per-reading flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No of FIG. 135) and is set to ON ( The process is executed so that a different presentation mode can be set with S5702: Yes in FIG. 135.

The remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is for counting the number of remaining special figure fluctuations until the jackpot is won, and is stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot end process (see S4651 of FIG. 133). When the winning information includes the winning information for winning the jackpot (S5605 of FIG. 133: Yes), the value corresponding to the number of special symbol variations until the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot changes. Is set (see S5607 in FIG. 133). Then, in the fluctuation display setting process 3 (see S4173 in FIG. 134), when it is determined that the fluctuation display in the probability variation state is set (see S5103 in FIG. 134), the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151 in FIG. 135). In (), in the case where it is determined that the special symbol for which the variation display is set this time is the previous variation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information to win the jackpot (the next time will be the jackpot variation) (S5703: Yes in FIG. 135). ), the production mode using the probability variation production selection table 222ba is set.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 129. The control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment is the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) instead of the control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above. 1 special symbol big hit determination process 3 (see S376 in FIG. 125), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see FIG. 99) instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (see S277 in FIG. 127), small hit control The difference is that the small hit control process 3 (see FIG. 129) is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 55). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. Note that, in the above-described second embodiment, the same processing as that of the first embodiment is executed, and therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first embodiment, In the present embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the portions where the same processing as in the second embodiment described above is executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 125, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376). Since the third embodiment is configured to win the small hit in the lottery of the special figure 1, the first special symbol big hit determination process 3 (S376) is the first special in the second embodiment described above. Different from the symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 of FIG. 98), the contents of the process executed when the lottery result of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is determined not to be a jackpot are different. doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is executed, the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) described above is executed, and in the process of S406, the variation of this time is a jackpot. If it is determined that it is not (S406: No), the special figure 1 deviation process (S471) is executed, and this process is ended. The special figure 1 deviation process (S471) is executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is other than the big hit, and it is determined whether or not the small hit is won, and the determination is made. The processing corresponding to the result is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S471) which is one process in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. ) Will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S471). This special figure 1 deviation fluctuation processing (S471), is something which executes the processing in order to indicate the small hitting design and the deviation design in the 1st design indicator 37, the 2nd special design (special drawing 2) The processing contents of the special figure 2 deviation variation process (S1011 of FIG. 41) to be executed are different in that the special symbol to be targeted is changed from special figure 2 to special figure 1.

In the special figure 1 deviation process (S471), first, it is determined whether or not the execution data acquired from the first special symbol holding sphere storage area 203a is a small hit (S3101). When it is determined that the execution data is a small hit (S3101: Yes), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3102), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a small hit (S3103). ). Next, the small hit symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S3104), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the execution data is not a small hit (is out) (S3101: No), the out symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. (S3105), this processing is ended as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, a first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S277) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S277). If the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 3 (S277), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257 of FIG. 99) in the second embodiment described above, the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a big hit. That is, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off (S801: No), the special figure 1 disengagement stop process (S871) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 128, it is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (S871) which is one of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (S871). In the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (S871), when the lottery result of special figure 1 is a small hit, processing for starting a small hit game is executed.

In the special figure 1 disengagement stop processing (see S871 in FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201). If it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to ON (S3201: Yes), in order to forcibly stop and display the changing special figure 2 by the lottery result indicating the deviation, The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S3202).

Then, the special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S3203), and the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as an off symbol (S3204). Next, a small hit scenario based on the selected small hit type is set (S3205), the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is turned off (S3206), and the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is turned on. The setting is made (S3207), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is not set to ON (that is, the lottery result of the first special symbol is out) (S3201: No), the book is left as it is. The process ends.

With this configuration, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special map 1), it is possible to forcibly stop the changing special map 2 during the change, so the small hit game It is possible to facilitate the execution of a new fluctuation of special figure 2 during the latent state set at the timing of starting. In addition, in the third embodiment, when the small hit of the special map 1 is won, a process of forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special map 2 being executed in a display mode showing that the lottery result is out of alignment is used. Without being limited to this, for example, in order to prevent the variation time of the special figure 2 variation being executed during the period when the small hit game is being executed, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation is interrupted. You may do it.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129, this is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. The small hit control process 3 (S2255) will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit control process 3 (S2255). The small hit control process 3 (S2255) is different from the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes of S2551 and S2552 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 3 (S2255), when it is determined in the process of S2503 that it is the small hit start timing (S2503: Yes), that is, the small hit scenario updated by the process of S2502 starts the small hit. If it is the content indicating, the opening command is set (S2504), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551). If it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551: Yes), the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 (S2552), and this processing is ended.

The third embodiment is configured such that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) can win the small hit, among which, the small hit of special figure 1 Only when the winning is won, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set (cleared) to 0.

That is, as a condition to end the high probability state of the normal symbol (state where the value of the hour/hour counter 203f is greater than 0), the small hit prize of special figure 1 (start of the small hit game based on the small hit prize of special figure 1) Is set. With this configuration, the high probability state of the normal symbol can be ended under a condition other than the case of executing the variation of the special symbol a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in the state where the probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, at any timing (any special symbol lottery), the latent state becomes a game state that is advantageous to the player ( Since it is possible to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), it is possible to make the player always eager to play a game.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is configured so that the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (4 times). Therefore, the shorter the period from when the probability variation state is set to when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 1, the more the number of times the special symbol can be drawn during the latent probability state can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game more enthusiastically.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when the small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is not finished. As a result, even if the probability of winning the small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 2 is set higher than the probability of winning the small hit in the lottery of Special Figure 1, the special figure 2 is set in the state in which the probability variation state is set. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a right-handed game is performed to execute the lottery.

On the other hand, in the process of S2551, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is not set to ON (S2551: No), the present process is directly terminated.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot is won by the lottery of the special symbol, the sure change state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol) after the jackpot game is over. Is configured to be set for a predetermined period (4 special symbol variations), and various transition conditions (latency state transition state) to transition the high probability latent state of the normal symbol to the low probability state during the probability variation state By establishing the above, the latent state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set.

Then, in the third embodiment, as the latent probability state transition condition, during the probability variation state, the first latent probability transition condition that holds when a big hit is won, and a predetermined period in which the probability variation state is set (special symbol variation 4 2nd latent probability transition condition that is satisfied when the final fluctuation of (time) is executed, and in the case of winning a small hit in the lottery of a specific special symbol (first special symbol (special symbol 1)) in the probability variable state And a third latent probability transition condition that holds. In this way, by configuring the latent state to be set under various conditions, it is possible to provide the player with playability that is not tired.

Further, the plurality of latent probability transition conditions described above are configured such that the periods in which the latent probability state is set after establishment are different, and when the first latent probability transition condition is established, a big hit is shown. The latent state is set during the symbol determination period during which the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and if the second latent probability transition condition is satisfied, during the variation period of the target special symbol fluctuation, and during the symbol determination period If the certainty state is set and the third latent probability transition condition is satisfied, the certainty variation state is started from the timing when the target small hit game is executed (the timing when the first variable winning device 65 is opened as the small hit game). It is configured to be set until the timing when the symbol fixing period of the special symbol corresponding to the final fluctuation of.

By configuring in this way, in performing the game for setting the latent probability state during the probability variation state, not only aiming at the latent probability state, but also for the occasion when the latent state is set Since the person can be watched, the game can be more motivated.

Further, in the third embodiment, the symbol determination period of the special symbol is configured to be different depending on the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, the variable display period (fluctuation time) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol is configured to be different depending on the number of special symbol variations after the probability variation state is set.

Specifically, the special symbol lottery result that the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied, that is, when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, depending on the lottery result, the symbol confirmation period is 5 seconds to 300 seconds. It is configured to be set in the range of. With such a configuration, even if the player determines that the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied (even if the special symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed), the symbol fixing period set thereafter Since the length cannot be easily discriminated, it is possible to play the game while expecting that a long period is set as the period in which the latent state is continuously set.

In addition, when the above-mentioned second latent probability transition condition is satisfied, the latent state is set by the lottery result of the special symbol variation (final variation in the probability variation state) corresponding to the establishment of the second latent probability transition condition. Is configured so that the length of the period is significantly different, for example, in the final change in the probability variation state, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the length of the period set as the latent probability state, The variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed during the latent state is equal to or less than (including the same). With this configuration, when the final variation of the probability variation state is out of order, the latent state is temporarily set internally, but the special figure 2 variation is executed during the latent state, and It is possible to set a disadvantage latent probability state that is disadvantageous to the player who cannot (difficultly) win the winning game.

In addition, when the above-mentioned disadvantage latent certainty state is set, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, do not execute the effect mode for informing that the latent certainty state game (RUSH game) is executed. Therefore, it is preferable not to notify the player that the latent state is set.

In the present embodiment, as described above, if the special symbol lottery result is out of the final variation of the probability variation state, it is configured such that the disadvantage latent probability state is set, for example, the special symbol lottery result In a part of the case that is out, if a long symbol determination period (for example, 100 seconds that can be set when the lottery result is a big hit) is set, or if the special symbol lottery result is out As the variation pattern (variation time) selected for (3), 300 seconds which can be set when the lottery result is a big hit may be settable.

By configuring in this way, even if you do not win the big hit or the small hit during the probability variation state, you can set the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player, so you have to expect until the end of the probability variation state. You can play while playing. Also, by making the symbol-fixing period and the variation pattern to be set the same as the period (time) that can be set when a big hit is won, it is hoped that the big hit game will be executed after the latent state ends. be able to.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, when the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is performed by setting the length of the symbol fixed period to the same length as when the big hit is won, the lottery result of the special symbol is set. It is advisable to stop and display the special symbol (third symbol) in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp. As a result, the lottery result of the special symbol of this time is determined at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game motivation during the latent probability state game.

Further, in the third embodiment, the length of the period in which the latent probability state is set differs depending on the timing when the first latent probability transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is configured such that the latent probability state is easily set longer as the number of special symbol variations in the probability variation state increases. As a result, as the number of special symbol fluctuations in the probability variation state increases, that is, as the number of special symbol fluctuations that can be executed in the probability variation state decreases, the latent probability state that is advantageous to the player is likely to be set. It is possible to make you want to win the jackpot as soon as possible (to establish the first latent probability transition condition) or to make you want to win the jackpot just before the end of the probability variation state, so the enjoyment of the game is improved. Can be made. In addition, when the jackpot is won in the final variation of the probability variation state, that is, when the first latent probability transition condition and the second latent probability transition condition are both satisfied in one special symbol variation (lottery) Since the latent state is set from the period when the jackpot variation starts, the latent state can be provided for a longer period.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the later the establishment of the first latent probability transition condition is delayed, the easier it is to set the latent state for a long period of time. It may be configured such that the longest latent probability state period is set when the number of fluctuations is an even number or when the jackpot is won in the third time). The latent state may be easily set for a long period of time.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the third embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 135, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment is the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 105) in contrast to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the first and second embodiments described above. The difference is that instead of the command determination processing 3 (see FIG. 105) and the variable display setting processing (see FIG. 68), the variable display setting processing 3 (see FIG. 134) is executed. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. R. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 130, the command determination processing 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 3 (S4172). The command determination process 3 (S4172) is different from the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the above-described second embodiment in that the process of S4271 is executed instead of the process of S4214. Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4162) in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the winning information related process (S4271) which is one of the processes in the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S4271).

In the winning information-related process (S4271), first, the information indicating the game state stored in the state setting area 223j is read (S5501). Next, in the processing of S5501, it is determined whether the read game state (that is, the current game state) is in the process of probability change (S5502). When it is determined that the read game state is in the probability variation (S5502: Yes), the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223ba is read (S5503). Next, in the process of S5503, it is determined whether the value of the read residual probability variation number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504). When it is determined that the value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is larger than 0 (S5504: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning information received this time includes winning information (S5505). When it is determined that the winning information includes the winning information (S5505: Yes), the prefetching winning flag 223bb is set to ON (S5506). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information in the winning information (S5505: No), the process of S5506 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S5507.

Next, the value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is subtracted by 1 (S5507), the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storing area 223b (S5508), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the processing of S5502, when it is determined that the read game state is not in the probability change (S5502: No), or in the processing of S5504, it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223ba is 0. (S5504: No), the display winning command corresponding to the received winning information is set (S5509), the above-described processing of S5508 is executed, and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, a jackpot-related process 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the details of the big hit related process 3 (S4552). The big hit related process 3 (S4552) is different from the big hit related process (S4502) in the first embodiment described above in that a big hit end process (S4651) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, a jackpot end process (S4651) which is one of the jackpot-related processes 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot end process (S4651).

In the jackpot end time process (S4651), first, all the information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read (S5601). Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information (S5602). If it is determined that there is no winning information (S5602: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is winning information (S5602: Yes), the number of winning information determined in the processing of S5602 is subtracted from the probability variation setting number (n=4) (S5603). Next, in the processing of S5603, the subtracted value is set in the residual probability variation number area 223ba (S5604).

Next, it is determined whether the read information has hit information (S5605). When it is determined that the read information has the hit information (S5605: Yes), whether the winning information corresponding to the next change (that is, the first change executed after the jackpot game ends) includes the hit information. Is determined (S5606). In the processing of S5606, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next change includes the winning information (S5606: Yes), the player is informed that the latent state is set immediately after the big hit ends. The special effect mode for setting is set (S5607), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next variation does not include the winning information (S5605: No), the prefetching winning flag 223bb is set to ON (S5608), and the winning information including the winning information varies. The number of times of special figure change until it is set is set in the remaining change number counter 223bc (S5609), the ending command for display including the bingo game display mode is set (S5611), and this processing is ended.

Further, in the processing of S5605, when it is determined that there is no hit information in the read state (S5605: No), the number of probability variation setting (n=4) is set in the residual variation counter 223bc (S5610), and the above-described S5611 is set. The process is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the variable display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S4173). The variable display setting process 3 (S4173) is different from the variable display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above in that the variable display setting process for probability variation (S5151) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 135, regarding the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151) which is one process in the variation display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. explain. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probability change variable display setting process (S5151). In the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), when the current gaming state is a probability variation state, based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol Is set and the process of transmitting to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), first, it is determined whether the variation this time is a small hit (S5701). When it is determined that the variation this time is a small hit (S5701: Yes), an effect mode that makes all bingo, that is, an effect mode as shown in FIG. 114(b) is set (S5709), and S5710 is set. Move to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S5701, when it is determined that the current variation is not the small hit (S5701: No), it is determined whether the prefetch hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702). When it is determined that the prefetching hit flag 223bb is set to ON (S5702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining variation counter 223bc is 1 (S5703). When it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is 1 (S5703: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation is read from the winning information storage area 223b (S5704).

Next, an effect mode is set from the probability variation effect selection table 222ba based on the winning information read in the process of S5704 and the number of changes (S5705). Next, the prefetch hit flag 223bb is set to OFF (S5706), the residual probability variation number area 223ba and the residual variation number counter 223bc are reset (S5707), and the process proceeds to S5710. On the other hand, in the process of S5702, when it is determined that the prefetch hit flag 223bb is not set to ON (S5702: No), or in the process of S5703, it is determined that the value of the remaining variation counter 223bc is not 1. (S5703: No), an effect mode in which bingo cannot be established is set (S5708), the value of the remaining variation counter 223bc is decremented by 1 (S5711), and the process proceeds to S5710.

Next, the extracted variation pattern command and the variation pattern command for display corresponding to the effect mode set in any one of S5705, S5708, and S5709 are set (S5710), and this processing is ended.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 160. In each of the above-described embodiments, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to change at the same time (so-called simultaneous change type), and latent as a game state. State (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is executed by lottery (variation) of special diagram 2 during the period when it is set, so many small hit games (RUSH game) are executed It was configured to be possible.

And, the latent state once set, the first latent probability end condition that is established based on the jackpot game is started, or the number of times the special symbol has changed since the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set It is configured to end when any of the second latent probability end conditions that are satisfied based on the above is satisfied.

In the above-described first to third embodiments configured as described above, for example, when the first latent probability end condition is satisfied, the latent probability game state (as the first advantageous game which is advantageous to the player) ( (RUSH game) will be executed until immediately before the jackpot game which is the second advantageous game is started, so that it is possible to cause the player to successively execute a plurality of different advantageous games, Was able to give satisfaction.

However, in each of the above-described embodiments, the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols) is set, and then latent state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of ordinary symbols) A plurality of types of probability change end conditions to be changed to are configured so that they can be set. However, since only two types of the above-described latent probability end conditions for ending the latent probability state are used, the latent condition for the player is hidden. There was a problem that the period during which the certainty state continues was easily predicted.

Against such a problem, in the fourth embodiment, every time a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is executed, a high-probability state of the special symbol is shifted to a low-probability state (falling down). (Hereinafter, referred to as a falling lottery) is configured to be executed, and a low probability state of the special symbol is set when the falling lottery is won.

With this configuration, it is possible to solve the problem that the player easily predicts the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set, and it is an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player. A latent state game (RUSH game) can be played while expecting it to continue for a long time.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, during a period (special figure variation display period) in which a variation display (special figure variation display) for displaying that the jackpot is won in one special symbol is being executed, the other Even if the special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result of the falling lottery is invalidated.

As a result, if the latent probability state is set by the satisfaction of the first probability variation ending condition (the probability variation ending condition that is established based on the jackpot winning), the latent probability state game (RUSH) executed during the latent probability state is set. In the (game), since the fall lottery can be invalidated, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be an advantageous latent state game (super RUSH game) which can be executed for a long period of time.

On the other hand, when the latent probability state is set by the satisfaction of the second probability variation ending condition (the probability variation ending condition that is met based on the number of times of change of the special symbol), the falling lottery is executed during the latent probability state. Therefore, since the latent probability state may end early based on winning the fall lottery, the period during which the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is executed is the above-mentioned advantageous latent probability. It can be a normal latent state game that tends to be shorter than the state game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 136, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the probability variation state in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically showing four types of game state transition methods set in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the game state transition method in the pachinko machine 10 used in the above-described first embodiment, the content of the game state transition in the case of winning the falling lottery is added, and each transition. The difference is that the elements until the condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied are changed, and the transition ratio to be transferred at the time of jackpot winning is changed, and the other points are the same. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 136, in the fourth embodiment, the high-probability state of the special symbol is configured to execute the falling lottery for shifting to the low-probability state, and in the falling lottery during the probability change state. If the player wins, it shifts to the time saving state, and if he wins the falling lottery during the latent state, it shifts to the normal state.

With this configuration, in order to set the latent probability state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, a probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set. In the state, the condition to shift the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state (for example, short-time digestion) is more than the condition to shift the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state (winning of the lottery) It must be established first.

Therefore, whether or not the latent state is set is determined according to the timing of establishment of the transition condition of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol), so that the player can watch the game content, The interest of can be improved. Further, as will be described later in detail, in the fourth embodiment, in the probability variation state and the time saving state, the game method executed is the same (left-handed game), and the effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is also configured to be similar. Therefore, even if the transition condition of the normal symbol (the condition of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state) is established, even if the fall lottery is won, it is difficult for the player to grasp that fact. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the flow in which the latent probability state is set in the fourth embodiment and the flow of the game during the latent probability state will be described. FIG. 137(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the probability variation state (when the first probability variation ending condition is satisfied), and FIG. 137(b) is 9 is a timing chart schematically showing a flow when the number of time saving is 0 during the probability variation state (when the second probability variation ending condition is satisfied).

As shown in FIG. 137(a), in the fourth embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is a low probability state in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol (probability change state or latent state) is set. If the lottery for the transition to (Lottery lottery) is performed every time the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed, and if you win the jackpot during the probability variation state (the first probability variation end condition) In the latent probability state, which is set to (when is established), the falling lottery is set as an ineffective period during which the falling lottery is not executed.

On the other hand, when the latent probability state is set based on the satisfaction of the second probability variation ending condition, as shown in FIG. 137(b), the falling lottery is valid even during the latent probability state game (RUSH game). Since it is executed, the latent probability state is shifted to the normal state based on the fact that the falling lottery is won before the change of the special map 1 ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first probability variation ending condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a latent probability state game (RUSH game) which is more advantageous than when the second probability variation ending condition is satisfied.

<Regarding the effect display contents in the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the effect contents executed in the first embodiment described above as the effect contents executed during the probability changing state, the player is suggested (notified) for the opportunity to set the latent probability state. The effect is different from the effect for suggesting (notifying) that the player has won the falling lottery during the latent state game (RUSH game).

Here, with reference to FIG. 138 to FIG. 140, the effect contents added in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 138(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the effect contents for suggesting that the latent certainty state game (RUSH game) is set by the establishment of the second probability variation ending condition (reaching the number of time saved). FIG. 138(b) schematically shows the effect contents for suggesting that the latent certainty state game (RUSH game) is set by the establishment of the first probability variation ending condition (big hit). It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 138(a) and FIG. 138(b), in the present embodiment, the player is the opportunity to set the latent state by the display mode of the effect design 813 displayed when the treasure box 812 is opened. When the display form of "444" is displayed as the effect design 813, the fact that the second probability variation end condition (reduction of the number of shortened times) is satisfied is notified, and " When the display mode of "Super RUSH" is displayed, it is configured to notify that the first probability variation ending condition (big hit) has been established.

In the fourth embodiment, the display mode of the effect design 813 displayed as the effect result in the probability changing state is configured to notify the player of the opportunity to set the latent probability state. Other configurations may be used, and for example, a plurality of display modes may be provided in which the selection ratio is changed according to the type of the probability variation ending condition that has been established as the display mode of the effect symbol 813 to be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with enjoyment of predicting which probability variation end condition is satisfied.

Here, with reference to FIG. 139(a), the display contents when the falling lottery is won during the latent state game (RUSH game) will be described. FIG. 139(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display content when the falling lottery is won during the latent state game (RUSH game). In the fourth embodiment, the falling lottery is executed every time the special figure lottery start condition for executing the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) is satisfied, and the special figure lottery start condition is satisfied. It is configured to execute the falling lottery during the period from the start of the big hit lottery, that is, before the big hit lottery.

Therefore, when winning the falling lottery, as shown in FIG. 139(a), the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is displayed while the special symbol (special figure 1) corresponding to the winning of the falling lottery is being variably displayed. Is notified that the game has ended, and it is prevented that a new variation of Toku-zu 2 is executed after the winning of the falling lottery (after the game state transitions from the latent probability state to the normal state). In addition, by variably displaying the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 from “right hit” to “left hit” while the special symbol (special trick 1) corresponding to the winning of the falling lottery is variably displayed, After the falling lottery is won (after the game state transitions from the latent probability state to the normal state), it is suppressed that a new special map 2 variation is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139(b), description will be made of effect contents executed when a jackpot is won during the latent probability state game (RUSH game). FIG. 139(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the effect contents executed when a big hit is won during a latent state game (RUSH game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, description will be made of contents of production during an advantageous latent certainty state game (super RUSH game) which is advantageous to the player in the latent certainty state game (RUSH game). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the latent probability state is set on the basis of the satisfaction of the first probability variation end condition, the falling lottery is invalidated during the setting period of the latent probability state. The treasure box 812 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured such that the lottery invalid period is set, and that it is in the advantageous latent probability state game (super RUSH game). The number of displays is increased, and a comment of “during super RUSH” is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, which indicates that the game is in the advantageous latent probability state game.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 146. First, with reference to FIG. 141, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, in order to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, etc., the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. The present embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that a falling lottery counter C6 used when determining a lottery result of a falling lottery is added.

The falling lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of “0 to 239”, and is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). Some of the counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 52), and the updated values are stored in the counter buffer (falling lottery counter buffer) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

The value of the falling lottery counter C6 is referred to in the falling lottery executed when the high probability state of the special symbol is set (when the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON), and is acquired. When it is determined that the value of the falling lottery counter C6 is a determination value that is defined in advance in the falling lottery table 202ca, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to a low probability state (falls down).

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 142, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above in that a jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d, and a fall lottery. The difference is that a table 202ca is provided. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca will be described with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the fourth embodiment, the operation content (operation scenario) for opening the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) without fail when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. It is different from the above-described first embodiment in that it is set. Further, as the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, the operation content (operation scenario) is set so that the jackpot game of at least 5 rounds is executed. Are different.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, in order to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the special symbol big hit or the small hit has been won, the operation content executed during the small hit game The jackpot game in which the same operation content (concept including a difference that is difficult for the player to discriminate) as the (operation scenario) is executed is defined, and a latent state, which is a game state in which the player is advantageous, is set. While it was difficult to understand the timing and the timing to end, in the fourth embodiment, the player can easily determine whether the big hit or the small hit is won (the big hit game The operation content and the operation content of the small hitting game are made different from each other so that the player can easily discriminate them.

In this way, by easily allowing the player to determine whether the big hit game or the small hit game has been executed, the number of small hit games executed during the latent probability state game (RUSH game) can be easily made. Can be grasped.

Next, the falling lottery table 202cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 146(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the falling lottery table 202cb. The falling lottery table 202cb is a data table in which the judgment value of the falling lottery counter C6 described above is stored. The value of the falling lottery counter C6 acquired when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (at the time of starting winning) is defined in the falling lottery table 202cb. When it coincides with the judgment value of, it is set so as to shift (to fall) to the low probability state of the special symbol.

More specifically, four determination values of "43, 107, 195, 222" are defined as the determination values determined to fall in the high probability state of the special symbol. Here, the falling lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of “0 to 239”. Among the 240 possible values of the falling lottery counter C6, there are four determination values that are determined to be falling, so in the probability change state of the special symbol, the probability of falling (moving to a low probability state of the special symbol) Is 1/60 (4/240).

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol is set to be 6/480 (see FIG. 15(a)), and the small hit is won in the lottery of the special diagram 2. The probability is set to 221/480 (see FIG. 15B). That is, the probability of winning the falling lottery is slightly higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. That is, in the fourth embodiment, in the state in which the latent probability state is set, it is easy to win in the order of small hit, fall, and big hit.

It should be noted that the winning percentages of the big hit, the small hit, and the falling in the high probability state of the special symbol are not limited to those shown in the present embodiment, and the ease of winning may be different. For example, it is set so that the falling probability (probability of winning the falling lottery) is lower than the jackpot probability, and in the latent condition, it is configured to repeatedly enjoy the big hit game and the small hit game until the fall is won. May be set, so that the small hit probability and the falling probability are almost the same (for example, small hit probability 1/3, falling probability 1/4), the special symbol lottery is performed during the latent state. Each time the game is played, the game may be made to excite the player. Further, even if the falling probability is set high (for example, 1/2), and the special symbol lottery can be executed in the state where the latent probability state is set, only when the falling probability does not fall in the first falling lottery. good.

In addition, in the falling lottery table 202cb in the present embodiment, only the determination value for determining whether or not the special symbol has fallen in the high probability state is defined, and the determination value for the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. It has not been. This is because it is a waste of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol when it is already in the low probability state of the special symbol.

In the fourth embodiment, the falling lottery table 202cb is compared with the regularly falling falling lottery counter C6 to shift from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall it down). ) Is determined. That is, the timing of transition from the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) to normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) can be made random. .. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing when the latent probability state ends during the latent probability state game (RUSH game) that is performed during the period when the latent probability state is set.

In the present embodiment, a lottery (determination) has been made as to whether or not a transition (fall) from a high-probability state of the special symbol to a low-probability state of the special symbol is performed. ) May be. For example, whether or not to shift from a high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state of a normal symbol may be determined by a lottery (special diagram lottery) executed for each variation of the special symbol. This makes it possible to randomize how long the high probability state of ordinary symbols lasts, so the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of ordinary symbols) is the latent state (high probability state of special symbols) , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting to a normal symbol low probability state). Therefore, during the period when the probability variation state is set, it is possible to always play the game while expecting that the latent probability state is set. Further, for example, it may be possible to select whether or not to shift from a low probability state of special symbols to a high probability state of special symbols.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram shown typically. As shown in FIG. 144, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that a state update restriction flag 203ca is provided. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The state update restriction flag 203ca is a flag for indicating that the update of various parameters corresponding to various conditions for shifting the game state is restricted, and when set to ON, various This indicates that the update of the parameter is restricted. In the fourth embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is skipped.

This state update restriction flag 203ca, when it is determined that the jackpot is won by the lottery of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S386 of FIG. 147) (S406 of FIG. 147). : Yes), or when it is determined that the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S975 of FIG. 150) has won the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S1006 of FIG. 150: Yes) ) Is set to ON (S487 of FIG. 147, S1077 of FIG. 150).

Further, when the game state update processing 4 (see S388 in FIG. 149) is referred to (see S651 in FIG. 149) and it is determined that the game server is set to ON (S651 in FIG. 149: Yes), the time saving counter 203f is operated. The process of updating (subtracting) the value, that is, the process of updating the parameter (time saving number) corresponding to the condition for shifting the game state is skipped. Then, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see S287 of FIG. 148), when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S801: Yes of FIG. 148), set to off (See S871 in FIG. 148). Similarly, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see S293 in FIG. 151), when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1501: Yes in FIG. 151), it is also turned OFF. Is set.

In other words, in the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in any of the plurality of special symbols (Toku-zu 1, Toku-zu 2), the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, and the special symbol won in the jackpot. While the variable display is being executed, the game state is not shifted.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145(a). FIG. 145(a) shows the voice lamp control device of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM222 of MPU221 of 113. As shown in FIG. 145(a), the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above in that a latent mode selection table 222ca and a fall notification selection table 222cb are provided. doing. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The latent probability mode selection table 222ca is a data table that is referred to when selecting a production mode (latent probability mode) of an effect (latent accuracy effect) for notifying the player that the latent probability state has been set. .. In the latent probability mode selection table 222ca, a plurality of rendering modes (corresponding to a setting trigger of the latent probability state (a big hit winning trigger, a reduction in the number of shortened times (shortened time)) and a mode setting rendering counter 223ca described later ( The effect mode) is defined, and the opportunity for setting the latent probability state can be suggested to the player depending on the effect mode of the selected latent probability effect.

Next, detailed contents defined in the latent probability mode selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. 146(b). FIG. 146(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the latent probability mode selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 146(b), when the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 indicates that the current latent state is the big hit latent state, the obtained value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca. Is defined as "invincible mode" in the range of "0-49", "normal mode B" is defined as the range of "50-89", and "normal mode A" is defined as the range of "90-99". ing.

Then, when the information included in the state command received from the main control device 110 is the time delay missing latent state of the current latent state, the value of the obtained mode setting effect counter 223ca is "0 to 49". “Normal mode A” is defined in the range, “normal mode B” is defined in the range of “50 to 89”, and “normal mode B” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

The falling notification selection table 222cb is a data table for selecting a notification mode for notifying (suggesting) the player that the winning of the falling lottery has been won, and the time saving state (high probability state of ordinary symbols) continues. The notification mode is selected on the basis of the value of the remaining short time count area 223k indicating the remaining time set and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf.

The fourth embodiment is executed by the game method (left-handed game) and the third symbol display device 81 depending on whether the probability variation state is set as the game state or the time saving state is set. The various display modes described above are the same. With this configuration, the player cannot easily determine whether the current state is the probability change state or the time saving state. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, because the fall lottery is executed, in the state in which the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, it is possible to save time at random timing. The state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is configured to be set.

And, in the state where the probability variation state is set, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state, the game state shifts from the probability variation state to the latent probability state, which is advantageous to the player. While the certainty state game (RUSH game) is executed, in the state where the time saving state is set, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state, the game state changes from the time saving state to the normal state. Transition to the state.

Here, the specific contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. 146(c). FIG. 146(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb. As shown in FIG. 146(c), the fall notification selection table 222cb is associated with the remaining short time count (information of the remaining short time count area 223k) at the time of winning the fall and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223cf. Thus, the notification mode is defined.

Specifically, when the falling winning number is 0 when the remaining short time count is 0 (when the information stored in the remaining short time count area 223k indicates the remaining short time count 0), that is, a high probability of a normal symbol When the fall lottery is won due to a change in the state, the "determined notice" is defined regardless of the value of the obtained fall notice effect counter 223cf. And, when the timing of winning the fall is 1 to 49 in the remaining number of shortened working hours, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is half or more, the obtained fall notification effect counter 223cf is displayed. "Indication notification" is defined in the range of values "0 to 49" or "90 to 99", and "confirmation notification" is defined in the range of "50 to 89". Then, when the remaining time reduction number is 50 to 98, that is, when the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set remains for more than half, the value of the acquired fall notification effect counter 223cf is "0 to 89". The "indication notification" is defined in the range of, and the "determination notification" is defined in the range of "90 to 99".

Here, when "confirmed notification" is selected as the notification mode, the player can easily recognize that the winning of the falling lottery has been won, for example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has fallen. A notification mode is set such that a display (for example, "sorry") is displayed to that effect, and that the winning of the falling lottery is notified by the sound or the light emission color of the decorative member.

In addition, when "indication notification" is selected as the notification mode, a notification mode (for example, "pinch" display) is set to notify the player that the fall lottery may have been won. .. Although detailed description is omitted, the "indication notification" is configured to be set when the notification condition is satisfied even when the falling lottery is not won. With such a configuration, the "indication notification" is executed both when the player actually wins the falling lottery and when he does not win the falling lottery.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the aspect of the notification (indication) effect of whether or not the player has won the falling lottery is set as the remaining period (remaining time reduction) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set. It is configured to be set based on (period), and the longer the remaining short time period, the more difficult it is to set the “confirmation notification”. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player recognizes that he/she has won the falling lottery in a state where the remaining short time period is long and the player's willingness to play during the remaining short time period is lowered.

Also, the setting frequency of the "indication notification" that is set when not winning the fall lottery may be configured to be variable based on the length of the short-term remaining time. It is preferable to configure so that the “indication notification” can be set easily even when the lottery has not been won. As a result, it is possible to change the possibility of actually winning the falling lottery when the "indication notification" is executed, based on the length of the remaining short term, so that the "indication notification" is executed. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by allowing the player to play the game during the short remaining time while predicting whether or not the falling lottery will be won by distinguishing the frequency (number of times) and the short remaining time. it can.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 145(b). FIG. 145(b) shows the voice lamp control device of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of RAM223 of MPU221 of 113. As shown in FIG. 145(b), the RAM 223 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the first embodiment described above in that the mode setting effect counter 223ca, the latent mode storage area 223cb, and the number of small hits. The difference is that a counter 223cc, a fall flag 223cd, a time saving informed flag 223ce, and a fall notification effect counter 223cf are provided. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The mode setting effect counter 223ca is a counter used when the latent probability mode is selected using the latent probability mode selection table 222ca. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although illustration is omitted, the value is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The latent probability mode storage area 223cb is a storage area for storing the currently set latent probability mode, and the latent probability mode determined in the latent probability mode setting process (see S4451 in FIG. 154) is stored (set). (See S5804 of FIG. 154). Then, it is referred to in the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (see S5171 in FIG. 159) (see S5251 in FIG. 159), and the variation pattern command for display is set (see S5252 in FIG. 159). Similarly, the variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (see S5175 in FIG. 160) is referred to (S5351 in FIG. 160), and the variation pattern command for display is set (S5352 in FIG. 160). When the information (latent probability mode information) stored (set) in the latent probability mode storage area 223cb is determined by the state command process 4 (see S4281 in FIG. 153), the gaming state shifts to the normal state. Is cleared (see S4454 in FIG. 153).

The small hit number counter 223cc is a counter for measuring the number of small hits won in the latent probability state, and a small hit start command is issued in the small hit related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156) in the latent probability state. Upon reception, the value is incremented by 1 (see S4752 in FIG. 156). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of small wins won in the latent probability state (S4753 in FIG. 156). In the present embodiment, based on the value of the small hit number counter 223cc, the small hit number display 825 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the small hit is made during the period when the latent probability state is set. When the number of times of winning reaches a predetermined number (a multiple of 10), the remaining time of the latent state is displayed.

The falling flag 223cd is a flag for indicating that the falling lottery has been won during the probability change state, and is set to ON to indicate that the falling lottery has been won.

The time saving informed flag 223ce wins the falling lottery during the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), and saves time (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) Is a flag for indicating that the fall notification effect for notifying the player that the transition has been made (the effect executed when the confirmation notification is selected in the fall notification selection table 222cb) has been executed, When set to ON, the fall notification effect is set.

The fall notification effect counter 223cf is a counter used when selecting a fall lottery notification mode using the fall notification selection table 222cb. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although illustration is omitted, the value is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 151. The control process of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment is the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in place of the control process of the main controller 110 in the above-described first embodiment. Special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 147), the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38) instead of the first special symbol variation stop process 4 (see FIG. 148), game state update process (see FIG. 36) Instead of the game state update process 4 (see FIG. 149), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) instead of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 150), the second special symbol fluctuation stop process The difference is that the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (see FIG. 151) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45). Otherwise, the same processing is executed. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 147, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above, transition from the probability change state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol ( The difference is that a process of executing a lottery for determining whether or not to make it fall) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), first, the data of the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481). If it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481: Yes), since the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed, the process proceeds to S412.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is off (S481: No), it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g is on, that is, whether the probability variation is in progress (S482). When it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off, that is, the probability variation is not in progress (S482: No), the process proceeds to S404.

On the other hand, in the processing of S482, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is ON, that is, when it is determined that the probability variation is in progress (S482: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the falling lottery table 202m. (S483). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the falling lottery counter C5 coincides with any judgment value (random number value) defined in the falling lottery table 202m (that is, a value corresponding to the falling) (S484). ), if it is determined that the value does not correspond to the fall (S484: No), the process proceeds to S403.

On the other hand, in the processing of S484, when it is determined that the value of the falling lottery counter C5 matches any of the determination values (random number values) defined in the falling lottery table 202m (the value corresponds to the falling) ( (S484: Yes), by setting the probability variation flag 203g to OFF, it shifts (falls) from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol (S485). Then, the falling command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 that the special symbol has changed from the probability changing state to the low probability state of the special symbol (falling down) is set (S486), and the process proceeds to S404. Transition. Further, in the present embodiment, in the processing of S406, when it is determined that the data of the current execution area is a big hit (S406: Yes), the status update restriction flag 203ca is executed after the processing of S407 to S411 is executed. Is set to ON (S487), and this processing ends.

By executing the special symbol variation start process 4 (S386), the lottery whether to shift (fall) to the low probability state of the special symbol and the lottery whether the jackpot of the special symbol is easily executed. be able to. In the present embodiment, as a processing order in the probability change state of the special symbol, a lottery (falling lottery) is executed to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol first, and then the jackpot of the special symbol. Although it has been configured to execute the lottery of whether or not, the processing order is not limited to this. The jackpot lottery may be performed first and then the falling lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S287) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S287). The first special symbol variation stop process 4 (S287), in addition to the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) in the first embodiment described above, a process (S871) of setting the state update restriction flag 203ca to OFF is added. The difference is that Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, the game state update processing 4 (S388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of the game state update processing 4 (S388). The game state update process 4 (S388) is different from the game state update process (S308) in the above-described first embodiment in that a process (S651) for determining whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is turned on is added. Be different. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the game state update processing 4 (S388), first, it is determined whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S651). When it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S651: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S651, when it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S651: No), the process proceeds to S601.

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) in the first embodiment described above, transition from the probability change state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol ( The difference is that a process of executing a lottery for determining whether or not to make it fall) is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, with reference to FIG. 147, with respect to the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) described above, the process of changing the target of the symbol from the first special symbol to the second special symbol is changed. Since it is only executed, its detailed description is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the second special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S293) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S293). The second special symbol fluctuation stop process 4 (S293), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) in the first embodiment described above, the process of setting the state update restriction flag 203ca off (S1571) is added. The difference is that Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment is different from the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the first embodiment described above in that the command determination process (see FIG. 60) is replaced with the command determination process 4. (Refer to FIG. 152), except that the variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 157) is executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69), the other processes are the same. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 152, the command determination processing 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing 4 (S4182). The command determination process 4 (S4182) is different from the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment described above in that the state command process 4 (S4281) is executed instead of the state command process (S4204). Since other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the state command process 4 (S4281) which is one process of the command determination process 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of the state command process 4 (S4281). The state command process 4 (S4281) determines whether or not the latent probability mode setting process (S4451) is added to the state command process (S4112) in the above-described first embodiment, and whether or not a command regarding falling is received. The difference is that processing is added. The other processing is the same as the status command processing (S4112) in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description will be omitted.

In the status command process 4 (S4281), when it is determined that the command received this time is the status command indicating the transition to the latent probability state (S4403: Yes), the latent probability mode setting process (S4451) is executed. Details of the latent probability mode setting process (S4451) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the value corresponding to the game state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area (S4405), and the process proceeds to S4452. On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the command received from the main control device 110 this time is not the state command indicating the shift to the latent state (S4403: No), the fall command is issued from the main control device 110. It is determined whether it has been received (S4452). When it is determined that the falling command is received (S4452: Yes), the falling effect setting process is executed (S4453). Details of the falling effect setting process (S4453) will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. On the other hand, in the process of S4452, when it is determined that the falling command is not received from the main control device 110 (S4452: No), the process of S4453 is skipped and the process of S4406 is executed. Next, after executing the processes of S4406 to S4411, the latent probability mode storage area cb, the small hit number counter 223cc, the falling flag 223cd, and the time saving informed flag 223ce are cleared (S4454), and the present process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, a latent probability mode setting process (S4451) which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. .. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the latent probability mode setting process (S4451).

In the latent probability mode setting process (S4451), first, the type of the status command received from the main controller 110 this time is read (S5801). Next, based on the received state command and the value of the mode setting effect counter 223ca, the latent probability mode is determined using the latent probability mode selection table 222ca (see FIG. 146(b)) (S5802). Next, in the processing of S5802, a latent display mode command for display corresponding to the determined latent confirmation mode is set (S5803), and the determined latent confirmation mode is set in the latent confirmation mode storage area 223cb (S5804). Next, the latent probability notification effect for notifying the entry of the latent probability state is set (S5805), the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5806), and this processing is ended. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the falling production setting process (S4453) which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the falling effect setting process (S4453).

In the falling effect setting process (S4453), first, it is determined whether the current game state is the latent probability state (S5901). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent probability state (S5901: Yes), the latent state notification effect for notifying the end of the latent state is set (S5902), and the state command received from the main control device 110. The value corresponding to the game state notified by is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5903), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5901, when it is determined that the current game state is not the latent state (S5901: No), next, the remaining short time count is 99 or more, that is, the remaining short time count area 223k. It is determined whether or not the value stored in is greater than or equal to 99 (S5904). When it is determined that the number of remaining time saving is 99 or more (S5904: Yes), the time saving notification effect for notifying the entry of the time saving state is set (S5905), and the time saving notified flag 223ce is set to ON (S5908). .. On the other hand, in the processing of S5904, when it is determined that the remaining short time count is not 99 or more (S5904: No), the processing of S5905 and S5906 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S5908. Next, the fall flag 223cd is set to ON (S5907), the value corresponding to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5908), and this processing ends. To do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the small hit related process 4 (S4574) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hitting related process 4 (S4574). The small hit related process 4 (S4574) is different from the small hit related process (S4504) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for displaying the remaining time information is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

In the small hitting related process 4 (S4574), first, when it is determined that the small hitting start command is received from the main control device 110 (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether the current game state is the latent state. Yes (S4751). When it is determined that the current game state is the latent probability state (S4751: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small hit number counter 223cc (S4752). Next, it is determined whether the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753). When it is determined that the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753: Yes), the information stored in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read (S4754). A display time information command indicating the remaining time information is set (S4755), then a display small hit start command is set (S4702), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4751 that the latent state is not in progress (S4751: No), or if it is determined that the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is not a multiple of 10 in the processing of S4753 ( The processing of S4753: No) and S4702 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 157, the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 4 (S4183). The variable display setting process 4 (S4183) is different from the variable display setting process (S4104) according to the first embodiment described above in place of the variable display setting process (S5104) for Toku-zu 1 and the variable display setting process for Toku-zu 1 is performed. 4 (S5171), in that instead of the special figure 2 variable display setting process (S5109), the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S5175) is executed, and the fall notification process (S5173) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 4 (S4183), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is on (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current game state is the latent state (S5103). When it is determined that the current gaming state is the latent probability state (S5103: Yes), the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (S5171) is executed, and the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is displayed. The corresponding data is shifted (S5106). The details of the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (S5171) will be described later with reference to FIG. 159.

On the other hand, in the processing of S5103, when it is determined that the current game state is not the latent state (S5103: No), it is determined whether or not the fall flag 223cd is turned on (S5172). When it is determined that the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172: Yes), the fall notification process (S5173) is executed. Details of the fall notification process (S5173) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to S5106 described above. Next, the processing executed in S5171 to S5173 for Toku-zu 1 is changed to the processing for Toku-zu 2.

Here, with reference to FIG. 158, the fall notification process (S5173), which is one process in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall notification process (S5173).

In the fall notification process (S5173), first, it is determined whether or not the time-saving notified flag 223ce is on (S8001). When it is determined that the time saving informed flag 223ce is on (S8001: Yes), the latent latent fluctuation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is set based on the extracted fluctuation pattern (S8009), and this processing To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving notification flag 223ce is off (S8001: No), the information in the remaining time saving area 223k is read (S8002). Next, the fall notification mode is determined using the fall notification selection table 222cb based on the remaining time count read in the process of S8002 and the value of the fall notification effect counter 223ca (S8003). Next, in the process of S8003, it is determined whether the determined notification mode is the final notification mode (S8004). When it is determined that the confirmation notification mode is set (S8004: Yes), the time saving notification completed flag is set to OFF (S8005), and the falling flag 223cd is set to OFF (S8006). Next, the time saving notification effect for notifying the entry of the time saving state is set (S8007), the above-described processing of S8009 is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S8004 that the determined notification mode is not the final notification mode (S8004: No), the display fall notification command corresponding to the fall notification mode determined in the process of S8003 is set ( (S8008), the above-described processing of S8009 is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (one of the processes in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the fourth embodiment. S5171) will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (S5171). The variation display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (S5171) is different from the variation display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) in the first embodiment described above, in place of the process of S5206, in the latent probability mode storage area 223cb. The stored latent probability mode is read (S5251), and based on the extracted fluctuation pattern and latent accuracy mode, the processing for setting the latent latent fluctuation pattern command for display of the first special symbol (S5252) is executed. Differences in points. Since other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (one of the processes in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113 according to the fourth embodiment. S5175) will be described. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175). The variation display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5109) is different from the variation display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109) in the first embodiment described above, in place of the process of S5206, in the latent probability mode storage area 223cb. The stored latent probability mode is read (S5351), and based on the extracted variation pattern and latent probability mode, a process (S5352) of setting a latent latent variation pattern command for display of the first special symbol is executed. Differences in points. Since other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

As described above, the fourth embodiment has a configuration for performing the falling lottery for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state based on the lottery result in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, at which timing, time saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of ordinary symbol) It may be difficult for the player to predict whether or not to shift to.

Also, if you win the falling lottery during the probability change state and shift to the time saving state, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) is a game state that is advantageous to the player. Since it becomes difficult to transfer (difficult to transfer than the probability change state), once the probability change state is set, the latent probability state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set It is possible to play a game while being thrilled not to win the falling lottery.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the same game method (left-handed game) is performed when the probability variation state is set and when the time saving state is set, so that the present It is possible to make it more difficult to comprehend whether the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time saving state.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, immediately after the probability variation state is set (for example, the first special symbol variation), when the falling lottery is won, the player is notified that the probability variation state has been set. However, since it is configured to execute a production mode (time saving notification production) that makes it appear as if the time saving state has been set from the beginning (after the jackpot is over), the latent state may be set. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable that the probability change state higher than the game state ends in a short period of time.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, an effect that suggests to the player the possibility of winning the falling lottery during the probability change state (indication notification) and an effect that notifies the player that the falling lottery has been won (confirmation notification) ) And are made executable, and the selection ratio of the suggestion notification and the confirmation notification is made different based on the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol that can be continuously set in the probability variation state. Specifically, the greater the number of remaining fluctuations in the probability-changed state, the more difficult it is to execute the confirmation notification. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the probability variation state has transitioned to the time-saving state with a large number of remaining fluctuations remaining, and thus reducing the player's willingness to play. Further, the effect of giving the suggestion notification is configured to be executed even when the falling lottery is not won.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestion notification or confirmation notification is configured to allow the player to determine whether the current game state is the probability change state or the time saving state. Other configurations may be used, for example, a variation pattern of special symbols that can only be selected during the probability variation state (variation time), or a special symbol variation pattern that can be selected only during a time saving state (variation time). It may be provided and configured to allow the player to predict the current game state according to the variation pattern of the special symbol to be executed. In this case, the content of the variation pattern dedicated to the probability variation state and the content of the variation pattern dedicated to the time saving state are not significantly different, and for example, the variation time may be provided with an error of about 1 second. As a result, the player can be informed of the current game state due to an error in the variable display time that is slightly uncomfortable, so that the player can pay close attention to the variable display of the special symbol to be executed. Further, in this case, the error 1 second, for example, may be used in the period until the fluctuation of the third symbol is started on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, whereby the fluctuation start timing of the third symbol The player can be informed of the current game state by a slight discomfort that is slower or faster than usual, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the fourth embodiment, during a period when the jackpot variation is being executed in one special symbol, the lottery result of the falling lottery associated with the other special symbol variation (lottery) is invalidated. .. Thus, for example, during the period when the latent probability state is set, the second special probability is achieved without being won in the falling lottery because the first latent probability transition condition, which is established based on the jackpot win of the special map 1, is established. It is possible to continue to receive lottery for symbols (special figure 2). Therefore, it is possible to set a latent probability state that is more advantageous (easier to continue for a long time) than the latent probability state set by the satisfaction of other latent probability transition conditions.

In the fourth embodiment, when the special symbol variation (lottery) is executed, the falling lottery is also executed. That is, the falling lottery is configured to be executed when the execution condition of the special symbol variation (lottery) is satisfied, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, a specific entrance (for example, the first entry The ball has entered the ball opening 64, the second entrance 640, the general winning opening 63), that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, that the execution condition of the normal symbol fluctuation (lottery) has been established, , Special symbol, or the normal symbol stop display timing, or the timing of the symbol determination period may be used as a trigger for the execution of the falling lottery, if the execution condition of the special symbol fluctuation (lottery) is established, the falling lottery It may be configured to determine whether or not to execute, and to execute the falling lottery based on the determination result. This can make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the falling lottery will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily perceiving the timing of winning the falling lottery.

In the fourth embodiment, when the fall lottery is executed, the presence or absence of the fall is determined with the same probability every time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is easy to fall in the fall lottery. It may be configured to provide a high probability state that is easy) and a low probability state that is hard to fall (difficult to win). In this case, for example, based on the jackpot type, a high-probability variation state and a low-probability variation state are provided as the probability variation states set after the jackpot, and in the high-probability variation state, the low probability state of the falling lottery is set and the low-probability variation is set. In the state, the high probability state of the falling lottery may be set. Further, the state of the falling lottery (high-probability state, low-probability state) may be varied based on the number of special symbol fluctuations (lottery) executed after the probability change state is set, for example, the probability change A predetermined number of fluctuations after the state is set (for example, 10 times) is set so that a high probability state of the falling lottery that is easy to win in the falling lottery is set, and then a low probability state of the falling lottery is set. May be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to set a period in which the probability change state is likely to fall and a period in which it is difficult to fall, so that it is possible to provide the player with playability that is distinctive. Further, in the present embodiment, when winning the falling lottery, it is configured to execute the process of shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, but in addition to this, for example, of the normal symbol A process of shifting the high-probability state to the low-probability state may be executed. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the falling lottery is won, the high-probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low-probability state. For example, from the high-probability state of the special symbol to the medium-probability state (the jackpot probability is high. It may be configured such that the state shifts to a state lower than the probability state and higher than the low probability state, and that the medium probability state does not shift unless a falling lottery is won.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the contents of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 179. In the above-described fourth embodiment, the falling lottery for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state (for falling) is executed. By configuring in this way, depending on the lottery result of the falling lottery, it is possible to change the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues, so that the high probability state of the special symbol is long-term for the player. It was possible to let the player play the game while expecting to continue.

However, in the configuration of the fourth embodiment described above, since the falling lottery is executed every time the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is executed, the player determines whether or not the falling lottery is executed with his or her intention. It was not possible to make a selection, and there was a risk of a decline in game motivation. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, a prize winning device (variable winning for small hits) in which a ball can be won during a small hit game executed when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result (small hit) Device) 2650 is provided, and in the area (flow path) through which the winning ball for the small hitting variable winning apparatus 2650 can pass, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state when it is detected that the ball has passed. A fall gate 2650e3 (see FIG. 164) for shifting the above is provided.

By configuring in this manner, like the above-described embodiments, a latent probability state that a small hit game is frequently executed based on the special drawing 2 lottery (high probability state of special symbol, low probability of ordinary symbol) In (state), it is possible to select whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol falls depending on whether or not the player shoots during the small hit game.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed is configured to be different depending on the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. Depending on the opening operation pattern, the proportion of balls that have won the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game passing through the falling gate 2650e3 is different.

With this configuration, the contents of the small hit game to be executed are predicted so that the high-probability state of the special symbol does not fall, and in order to perform the game aiming to obtain the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. The player can be made to select a game while doing.

In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent probability state where one special symbol is set during the period of executing the big hit variation, the small hit is won in the other special symbol variation (lottery). Even if the ball passes through the falling gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured not to shift to the low probability state.

As a result, the state in which the latent probability state is set, the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (difficult) advantageous latent probability state, and the high probability state of the special symbol is easier to fall than the advantageous latent probability state The disadvantageous probability state can be set.

<About the structure of the game board in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the right side region of the game board 13 is different from the configuration of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and the first variable winning device 65 is replaced. The point where the small winning variable winning device 2650 is provided and the point where the winning device (small winning variable winning device 2650) that is opened during the small hitting game is provided on the upstream side of the second ball entrance 640. Are different.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the right side area of the game board 13, a small winning variable winning device 2650 is provided. This small winning variable winning device 2650 is a plurality of flow paths through which a winning ball flows down (a flow path for falling a high probability state of a special symbol into a low probability state, a high probability state of a special symbol is a low probability state). It has a flow path that does not cause the ball to fall down to a different direction, and is configured to flow down a flow path in which the winning balls are different depending on the timing at which the balls are won in the small winning variable winning device 2650.

The internal structure of the small winning variable winning device 2650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164. Next, the structure of the small hit variable winning device 2650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the small winning variable winning device 2650.

As shown in FIG. 162, the small winning variable winning device 2650 is combined with the opening forming member 2650b that is arranged so as to project to the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side of the opening forming member 2650b, and the small hit. Base member 2650c for screwing the variable winning a prize device 2650 to the game board 13, and the LED is turned on from the back side of the base member 2650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c. An LED board 2650d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 2650e that holds the LED board 2650d between the LED board 2650d and the base member 2650c, and a small hit winning opening (small hit) formed on the opening forming member 2650b. An opening/closing unit 2650f having an opening/closing door 2650f1 for opening and closing the winning opening 2650a, a flow path cover body 2650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 2650e to form a flow path, a back cover body 2650e and the flow path. A switching member 2650h that projects into the flow path formed by the cover body 2650g and switches the flow path of the game sphere, a link member 2650i that is locked to the switching member 2650h, and is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 2650g. Back cover body 2650j, a flow path solenoid 2650k fixed to the back surface side of the back cover body 2650j and actuating the link member 2650i, and the flow path solenoid 2650k is covered from the back side by a screw on the back cover body 2650j. It is configured with a fixing cover body 2650m for fixing.

FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view of the small hit variable winning device 2650. FIG. 163(c) is a top view of the small winning variable winning device 2650, and FIG. 163(b) is a sectional view of the small winning variable winning device 2650 taken along the line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 163(b), the small winning variable winning device 2650 has a small winning opening (small winning opening) 2650a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is guided leftward in FIG. 163(b). Thus, a bottom surface that is inclined to the lower left is formed. At the left end portion of the bottom surface, a detection opening 2650a1 configured by a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back surface side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 163(b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 163(b), the opening of the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a can enter the ball by the opening/closing door 2650f1 configured by the shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. The open state and the closed state where it is impossible to enter (difficult to enter) can be changed. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 2650f1 so that the ball can roll on the upper portion of the opening/closing door. Further, in the open state, the opening/closing door 2650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the small hit winning opening (small winning opening) 2650a by being retracted inside the base member 2650c (inside the game board 13). ing.

With this configuration, when the opening of the small winning variable winning device 2650 is closed, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the open/close door 2650f1 of the small winning variable winning device 2650, and the second winning ball It is configured to be guided to the mouth 640 side, and during the right-handed game (during the latent probability state), the ball can enter the second entrance ball 640 while the right-handed game is being performed. It becomes possible, and it is possible to reduce the time and effort to change the game method to the left-handed game during the latent state in which the small hit game is frequently executed. Therefore, the game can be played more easily.

Further, in the open state, the surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the small winning a prize variable winning device 2650, so that more game balls can be efficiently used for the small winning a prize hole (small. It is possible to win a prize in the winning prize hole 2650a. Therefore, the ball can be certainly won in the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 163(a) is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. 163(b). As shown in FIG. 163(a), the magnetic sensor 2650c1 having the detection port 2650a1 is fixed to the base member 2650c such that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 2650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a configuration will be described in which the spheres guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 2650e are distributed to the normal discharge channel 2650e1 and the special discharge channel 2650e2 described later.

FIG. 164(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is actuated so that the balls are distributed to the special discharge flow path 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 164(a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guiding piece 2650h2 that guides the sphere, and the switching member 2650h is provided in the flow path cover body 2650g. It is rotatably supported from the back side. Here, the flow path cover body 2650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650h is rotated from the rear side of the flow path cover body 2650g into the distribution flow path. It is configured so that it can be arranged.

As shown in FIG. 164(a), the sphere guided from the detection port 2650a1 into the distribution channel is guided to the upper surface of the guiding piece 2650h2 arranged diagonally leftward and to the special discharge channel 2650e2. .. The special discharge flow path 2650e2 flows down the falling route in which the inflowing balls pass through the falling gate (fall switch) 2650e3 and the second normal discharge flow path 2650e5 branched from the special discharge flow path 2650e2, and the second normal gate (second 2 normal switch) 2650e6, and a second normal route, and a fall switch 2650e3 or a second normal switch 2650e6 capable of detecting the passage of a ball flowing into the special discharge passage 2650e2. It is detected and then discharged as an out ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the above-mentioned fall switch 2650e3 detects a ball during a small hit game, that is, the ball passes through the fall route, a special symbol. The high-probability state of is transitioned (falls) to the low-probability state. That is, the falling gate (falling switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for shifting the special symbol from the high probability state to the low probability state. In addition, the switching member 2650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 2650e2) that can pass through the falling gate (fall switch) 2650e3 or a fall path as a flow path for a ball that has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 during a small hit. This is for setting one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot (difficultly) pass through the gate (fall switch) 2650e3, and by setting the flow path solenoid 2650k to ON. The flow is switched so that the ball that has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 164(a)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to OFF during a normal game, and a ball winning the small winning variable prize device 2650 has a special discharge flow path 2650e2. It is configured to flow down. Therefore, even if the small hitting game is not being executed, if the open/close door 2650f1 of the small hitting variable winning device 2650 is opened and the ball is prized, an illegally won ball is fallen down. It is configured to pass through 2650e3.

In this way, the state in which the flow passage solenoid 2650k is set to OFF is set as a state in which the pachinko machine 10 is maintained for a long period of time, and further, the flow passage configuration is disadvantageous to the player (the small winning variable winning device 2650 is By adopting a flow path configuration in which a winning ball can pass through the fall switch 2650e3), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed and a penalty can be imposed on a game in which an illegal game is played.

In this way, it is determined whether or not the high-probability state of the special symbol is ended by the flow-down route along which the balls that have won the small-winning variable winning device 2650 flow down during the small-hit game. People's interests can be improved. In addition, when passing through the entrance of the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 2650h2 of the switching member 2650h) from the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a of the small winning variable winning device 2650. The minimum required time is 1 second.

Further, a discharge confirmation switch (normal switch) 2650e4 constituted by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a sphere is provided at the end of the normal discharge channel 2650e1. This makes it possible to determine whether all the winning balls have been discharged into the small-hit variable winning device 2650 based on the total number of detected balls of the normal switch 2650e4, the second falling switch 2650e6, and the falling switch 2650e3. That is, the number of balls detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1 (the number of balls won in the small winning variable winning device 2650) and various switches (normal switch 2650e4, second falling switch 2650e6, falling switch) provided in the three discharge areas. 2650e3) compares each with the number of balls detected (the number of balls discharged from the small hitting variable winning device 2650) to determine whether or not the balls remain in the small hitting variable winning device 2650. can do.

The end timing of the small hit game (the end condition of the small hit game (when there is a predetermined number (10) in the small winning variable winning device 2650), or the opening scenario of the small winning variable winning device 2650 is At the timing when the small hit ending period executed after the (when finished) is established), if all the game balls entered in the small hit variable winning device 2650 have not been discharged, the small hit variable It may be configured to determine an abnormality inside the winning device 2650, notify the abnormality to the outside, or stop the game so that the big hit game and the normal game are not started. As a result, it is possible to prevent a secondary abnormality from occurring due to the progress of the game in a state where the abnormality occurs in a part of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, the ball winning the small hit winning opening (small hit winning opening) 2650a of the small winning variable winning device 2650 is detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1, and based on this, a ball is awarded as a privilege to the player. In the embodiment, 10 prize balls are paid out for each 1-ball winning, and the detected balls (passing the ball winning switch 2650c1) are used to pass the falling switch 2650e3. By configuring whether or not it can be distributed, it can be determined whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends during the small hitting game. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated area for shifting the high-probability state of the special symbol to the low-probability state separately from the small winning variable winning device 2650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166, a game flow in the fifth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 165, the flow of the game when the jackpot of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won in the state where the probability variation state is set as the game state will be described. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the probability changing state.

As shown in FIG. 165, in the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery of Toku-zu 1 in the state where the probability variation state is set as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the latent probability is found during the jackpot variation. The state is set (see FIG. 165(a)). Then, during the period when the latent probability state is set (special map 1 jackpot fluctuation), by performing a right-handed game to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special map 2), the small hit game is A latent state game (RUSH game) that is frequently executed is configured to be executed.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, one of the special symbols (for example, the special symbol 1) during the jackpot fluctuation period (after winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol, the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result. The period up to) is configured so that the jackpot is not won in the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special symbol 2). Thereby, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special map 1), the jackpot is won by the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special map 2), and based on the jackpot winning of the other special symbol. By starting the big hit game, it is possible to prevent the period in which the latent state is set from becoming short. In other words, in the fifth embodiment, the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is reliably performed during the latent probability state setting period (for example, the jackpot variation time of Toku-zu 1) set in advance when the latent state is set. ) Can be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special symbol 1) (after winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery , Period until the big hit game is executed based on the lottery result), even if the ball passes through the fall switch 2650e3 in the small prize winning variable winning device 2650, the high probability state of the special symbol becomes a low probability state The period is set so that it does not shift (falling invalid period).

Therefore, if the latent state is set during fluctuation of the special map 1 that has been won in the jackpot, the special symbol 1 fluctuation period becomes the fall invalid period, and the high probability state of the special symbol ends. The latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed without having to worry about it. Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the latent state is set based on the jackpot winning of Special Figure 1 (the latent state is set based on the establishment of the first latent probability transition condition). It is configured to determine whether or not to execute an invincible effect (see FIG. 169) that notifies the player.

By configuring this invincible effect (see FIG. 169) to be executed, it is possible to easily recognize that the falling ineffective period is set in the currently set latent probability state, and thus the player can Therefore, the latent state game (RUSH game) can be played with peace of mind. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, even in the latent state in which the fall invalidation period is set, the case where the invincible effect described above is not executed occurs. By configuring in this manner, in the latent probability state game in which the invincible effect (see FIG. 169) is not executed, the fall invalid period may actually be set, so the ball is small during the small hit game. When the winning variable winning device 2650 is won, the rate of falling can be reduced.

Then, when the variation time of the special figure 1 jackpot variation elapses (see FIG. 165(b)), the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. If the small hit game is not executed at this timing, the big hit game is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, if the small hit game is being executed at the timing when the variation time of the special figure 1 big hit change has passed, the start of the big hit game is postponed until the small hit game is finished. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with a game that is difficult to understand because the big hit game is started during the execution of the small hit game.

In the interruption period from the change time of the special figure 1 jackpot variation shown in FIG. 165 until the jackpot game is started, the same gaming state (normal state) as that of the jackpot game is set. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the small hit game is executed at the timing when the variation time of the special figure 1 big hit change has elapsed, the start of the big hit game is suspended (postponed) until the small hit game is finished. ) Is configured, but it may be controlled so that the small hit game and the big hit game are not executed at the same time, for example, the small hit game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation has elapsed. If there is, it may be configured to forcibly end the small hitting game that is being executed.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment as well as in each of the above-described embodiments, a small hit is won by one special symbol (special drawing 2), and a small hit game is executed. During the period, it is configured to interrupt the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol (special diagram 1).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the latent probability state (advantageous latent probability state) that is set based on the jackpot win of the special map 1 is set as the fall invalid period, so that a special symbol is given to the player. It is possible to entertain the latent probability state game (RUSH game) without worrying about the high probability state of being ended. Further, the small hitting game started during the latent state game (RUSH game) can be executed to the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, a description will be given of the flow of the game when the preset time saving times are exhausted in the state where the probability variation state is set as the game state. FIG. 166 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when all of the shortened times are exhausted during the probability changing state.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the fifth embodiment, the value of the counter (time saving counter 203f) for continuously setting the time saving state is because the time saving number is subtracted at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. When it becomes 0, the latent probability state is set from the variation in Toku-zu 1 that is executed (see FIG. 166(a)). Note that, as shown in FIG. 166, the latent probability state set by exhausting a predetermined number of shortening times is configured such that the falling lottery during the latent probability state period is effectively determined. Therefore, in the small hit game executed during the latent probability state game (RUSH), the high probability state of the special symbol may be ended by the ball that is won by the variable winning device (small winning variable winning device 2650). There is a certain potential disadvantage.

<Regarding effect contents executed in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, characteristic effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment will be described. In addition, the aspect of the effect executed during the probability variation state in order to suggest whether or not the latent probability state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is performed, the effects described in each of the above-described embodiments Since it is the same as the aspect, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 167(a), the effect contents displayed when a small hit is won in the state where the latent state is set will be described. FIG. 167(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents when a small hit is won in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167(a), in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, a display mode showing that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is variably displayed is displayed, and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Indicates a display mode (“341”) indicating that the second special symbol (special symbol 2) has been won as a small hit. In the guidance display area Dm3, "right hitting" for guiding the game method in the latent probability state is displayed.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode for notifying that the character 811 has won the small hit, and the character "GET" is displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "small hit game starts" indicating that the small hit game is started is displayed.

When the small hit game is started, the display screen of FIG. 167(b) is displayed. FIG. 167(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents during the small hitting game. According to the diagram shown in FIG. 167(b), in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, the same display mode as in FIG. 167(a) described above, that is, a display indicating that the special figure 1 is variably displayed. Although the mode is displayed, actually, during the small hit game, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 is suspended. Note that, unlike the display mode shown in FIG. 167(b), the state in which the special figure 1 is appropriately displayed in a variable state (the state in which the variation time is subtracted) and the variable display in the special figure 1 are suspended. The display mode displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 may be different between the state in which the change time is not subtracted (the state in which the variation time is not subtracted).

Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect mode in which the character 811 sprints from the left direction to the right direction and the treasure box 812 appears from the traveling direction is displayed. In the present embodiment, the effect of opening the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is executed during the small hit game, and the display mode of the effect pattern 813 that appears from the treasure box 812 causes the small prize of this time. The result of the winning game is configured to be notified to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 168(a) and FIG. 168(b), the display content for showing the game result of the small hit game in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 168(a) is a result of winning the ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, as a result, the fall switch 2650e3 detects the ball, and the display content when the high probability state of the special symbol ends FIG. 168(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example, and FIG. 168(b) is a display content when the falling switch 2650e3 does not detect the ball as a result of winning the ball in the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game. It is a schematic diagram showing an example.

In FIG. 168(a), the effect symbol 813 indicating "cross mark" is displayed from the treasure box 812, and the character 811 shifts the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state during the small hit game. It is displayed in the failure display mode shown. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment is displayed that guides that the latent state game (RUSH game) ends and the game method returns to the left-handed game. In other words, the latent state of the RUSH game is performed (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), by transitioning the high probability state of special symbols to the low probability state, the game state is latent Since the state shifts to a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol), a comment for the left-handed game to be executed is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

On the other hand, FIG. 168(b) shows a display pattern 813 indicating “V” from the treasure box 812, which is a display mode for informing the player that the RUSH game will be continuously executed (that is, the left side). The character 811 is displayed in a display form of sprinting from right to right.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the effect corresponding to the game result during the small hit game executed during the latent probability state game (RUSH game) is executed on the third symbol display device 81, The player can easily understand the progress of the latent probability state game (RUSH game) only by understanding the effect contents executed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in the present embodiment, according to the type of the small hit game executed during the latent probability state game (RUSH game), the ball winning in the small hitting variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game is the probability change switch 2650e3. The ratio (possibility) of flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 provided with is different.

Therefore, for example, on the display screen at the time of winning the small hit shown in FIG. 167(a), the player can select whether or not to let the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 win a ball in this small hit game. It is configured to display a comment (for example, “RUSH ends if you are unlucky due to small prize winning”, “Stop launching if uneasy”), and a character that is displayed when a small winning is won. The display mode of 811 may be configured to be variable depending on whether or not the small hit type that has been won this time is a small hit that is likely to end the latent probability state game (RUSH game).

With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to select whether or not the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 is allowed to win a ball during the small hitting game. In addition, in the fifth embodiment in which the latent state is set only for a predetermined period (special figure 1 variation time), the number of small hit games that can be executed during the latent state is limited, so the player In contrast, it is possible to let the player play the game while thinking about whether to acquire a privilege (prize ball) during the small hit game or avoid the end of the latent probability state game (RUSH game), which is a novel game. Sex can be provided.

Further, the display mode of the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen during the small hit game shown in FIG. 167(b) may be configured to notify the player of the type of the small hit game being executed. Good, for example, as the small hit type being executed is a small hit type that is more likely to end the latent state game (RUSH game), it is better to configure the old tattered treasure box 812 to be displayed. It is preferable to display the comment according to the display mode of the treasure box 812. Further, the display mode displayed during the small hit game is more specific than the content that suggests the small hit type (RUSH game continuation expectation degree) that is won this time to the player when the small hit is won. It is advisable to notify the player of such (highly reliable) contents.

With such a configuration, for the player who has selected whether or not to make a ball hit in the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 in the small winning game based on the display screen displayed at the time of winning the small hit. Since a more specific RUSH continuation expectation degree can be shown, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the selected game content is correct.

In this case, in particular, for the player who has selected not to win the ball in the small-winning variable winning device 2650, it is emphasized that even if the player wins the ball, the RUSH game is a small hit type that is difficult to finish. It should be configured so that it can be notified. Specifically, a small hit type determining means for determining the type of the small hit game of this time, and whether or not the ball has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 within a predetermined period from the start of the small hit game. And a means (or means for determining that a right-handed game has been executed after winning the small hit), and the result of the determination by the small hit type determining means is a small hit type in which the RUSH game is difficult to finish. In this case, if it is determined that the ball has not won in the small hitting variable winning device 2650 within a predetermined period after the small hitting game is started, it is better to shoot the ball for the small hitting game this time. It is advisable to provide a display means for displaying a flairing comment (for example, "I should have fired a ball" or "weakling") that indicates that the game has been acquired.

As a result, it is possible to clearly inform the player that a loss has occurred due to not winning the ball in the small-winning variable winning device 2650. The variable winning device 2650 can be prompted to win a ball. In other words, when the RUSH game is finished by winning the ball in the small-winning variable winning device 2650, the fact that the selection this time has failed with the game result without executing the instigation by the game Although the player can be aware, since the player who has selected not to win a ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650 cannot be aware of whether or not the selection result of this time is advantageous, the selection result is displayed by the display means. By displaying the evaluation of, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether or not the current selection is successful.

Further, a display mode for informing the player who has selected not to win a ball to the small winning combination variable winning device 2650, that the current small hit type is the small hit type in which the RUSH game is likely to end. (For example, "Stop firing, correct answer", "I feel good") may be displayed, even if the small hit type this time is the small hit type that the RUSH game is likely to end, this time In the small hit game, a flairing comment (for example, "I should have fired the ball", "Yowamushi") may be displayed indicating that the privilege was obtained by firing the ball.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the display content of the effect for notifying that it is the latent state (advantageous latent state) in which the fall ineffective period is set will be described. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed at the end of the small hit in the advantageous latent probability state. As shown in FIG. 169, when the currently set latent probability state is the advantageous latent probability state in which the fall invalidation period is set, the same latent probability mode setting process as in the above-described fourth embodiment (see FIG. 154). When the invincible mode is set as the current latent probability mode in S4451), the production mode indicating that the latent probability state currently set for the player is the advantageous latent probability state (“invincible mode”) Is displayed.

When the player enters the invincible mode, the display mode of the character 811 becomes a display mode dedicated to the invincible mode (a display mode in which an aura is surrounded). Then, “lucky point×0” is displayed as the cumulative display mode 819 for the number of balls that have passed through the falling gate 2650e3 during the invincible mode. This cumulative display mode 819 corresponds to a command indicating the number of balls detected by the fall switch 2650e3 output from the main control device 110 (a command indicating the number of falls if the fall invalid period is not set). The numbers are displayed. As a result, it is possible to easily inform the player of the situation in which the invincible mode has worked advantageously.

Although not shown in the drawing of FIG. 169, the small hit count display 825 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the above-described fourth embodiment may be displayed, or the small hit count display 825. And the cumulative display mode 819 may be displayed together. Further, the non-game number measuring means for measuring the number of small hit games in which the player did not win a ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650, and the number of times measured by the non-game number measuring means are displayed on the display means. It may be configured to do so.

With this configuration, for example, for all the small hit games executed during the latent state game (RUSH game), the number of small hit games executed by the player and the small hit game executed by the player. Since the number of small hit games that have not been executed can be easily grasped, it can be used as a reference for future RUSH games.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 170, the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above in that a small hit type selection 5 table 202da is provided in place of the small hit type selection table 202e. The difference is that an operation scenario storage area 202db is added. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the small hit type selection 5 table 202da will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small hit type selection 5 table 202da. The fifth embodiment is configured so that only the second special symbol (special figure 2) is won in the small hit, and when the small hit is won in the lottery of the special figure 2, the small hit type selection 5 table The small hit type is selected with reference to 202da.

In the small hit type selection 5 table 202da, a corresponding small hit type is defined for each value range of the small hit type counter C5, and as shown in FIG. 171(a), the value of the small hit type counter C5. In the range of “0 to 14”, “small hit A” is associated and defined. This "small hit A" is a small hit type that sets the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) to the open state for 1.5 seconds after the opening period of 1.5 seconds has elapsed during the small hit game. Note that after the open state for 1.5 seconds elapses, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set. Since this ending period is the same for all the small hit types, in FIG. 171(a) Omit it.

Further, "small hit B" is defined in association with the range of the small hit type counter C5 being "15 to 59". This "small hit B" is set after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.1 seconds after the opening period of 0.5 seconds has passed during the small hit game. This is a small hit type that sets an open state for 1.4 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. Although the ending period of 0.5 seconds is set after the setting of the second opening, the ending period is the same for all the small hit types, and therefore omitted in FIG. 171(a).

In the range of the small hit type counter C5 of "60 to 79", "small hit C" is defined in association with each other. This "small hit C" is set after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has passed during the small hit game. It is a small hit type that sets an open state for 0.1 second (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. Although the ending period of 0.5 seconds is set after the setting of the second opening, the ending period is the same for all the small hit types, and therefore omitted in FIG. 171(a).

In the range of the small hit type counter C5 of "80 to 99", "small hit D" is defined in association. This "small hit D" is set after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has passed during the small hit game. , Is a small hit type that sets an open state for 1 second (second open setting) after an interval period of 0.3 seconds. Although the ending period of 0.5 seconds is set after the setting of the second opening, the ending period is the same for all the small hit types, and therefore omitted in FIG. 171(a).

The operation scenario storage area 202db is a data area in which an operation scenario of the passage solenoid 2650h during a small hit game is stored in advance, and the passage solenoid 2650h performs the same operation regardless of the small hit type to be executed. One operating scenario is set to execute.

Here, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 202db will be described with reference to FIG. 171(b). FIG. 171(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the operation scenario defined in the operation scenario storage area 202db. As shown in FIG. 171(b), in the operation scenario storage area 202db, the operation scenario set in accordance with the start timing of the small hit game is defined.

Specifically, it is stipulated that the flow path solenoid 2650h be set to OFF until 1.4 seconds elapse from the small hit start timing, and from 1.4 seconds after the small hit start to the small hit end. It is regulated to turn on the flow path solenoid 2650h for the period. The operation scenario in which the operation content of the flow path solenoid 2650h is defined is a loop counter in which a value is incremented by 1 every time the main processing of the main controller 110 is executed every 4 milliseconds. It is managed by a counter (not shown).

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, it is determined whether the ball won in the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2, the small hit type selected, and the flow path solenoid. It is configured to variably set according to the operation scenario of 2650h. Further, the balls flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 are branched into a ball passing through the falling gate 2650e3 and a ball not passing through (the second normal switch 2650e6) by the internal structure of the small hitting variable winning device 2650. Is configured.

Specifically, in the small hit game in which "small hit A" is set as the small hit type, the opening period (1.5 seconds) is a period in which the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to OFF (1 from the start of the small hit. .4 seconds), the ball does not pass through the falling route, and the small win game that is most advantageous to the player for which the opening period is set long is executed.

In the small hitting game in which “small hitting B” to “small hitting D” are set as the small hitting type, the first opening period is a timing at which the winning ball can pass the falling route. Furthermore, the “small hit C” and “small hit D” have short opening periods of 0.1 seconds (shorter than “small hit B”), and. Since the first opening period is 0.5 seconds long (because it is longer than "small hit B"), the small hit game is easy for the ball to easily pass the falling route.

In addition, "small hit C" is the shortest period for which the first attacker (first variable winning device) 65 is opened by one opening operation, which is 0.6 seconds, which is the most disadvantageous to the player. It becomes a winning game. In the fifth embodiment, it takes about 0.5 seconds for a ball fired by a right-handed game to enter the small winning variable winning device 2650 and reach a distribution channel distributed by a channel solenoid 2650h. It is so configured that the symbol fixing period of the special symbol at the time of winning the small hit is 0.5 seconds.

Therefore, immediately after the third symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a small hit is stopped (see FIG. 167(a)), by stopping the right-handed game, the small hit game is started. At this point, it is possible to prevent the situation in which the ball shot before stopping the right-handed game wins the small hitting variable winning device 2650.

Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the RAM 203 of the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment described above in that a small hit prize counter 203da, a fall pass counter 203db, and a pass flag 203dc are added. doing. The other elements are the same, the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The small hit prize counter 203da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game, and in the small hit entrance passage process (see S171 in FIG. 174), the ball is passed. When it is determined that the timing at which the sensor (sphere detection switch 2650c1) is on is during the opening period for the small hit winning hole 2650a (S3302: Yes in FIG. 174), the value is incremented by 1, and after the addition The winning number command corresponding to the information indicating the value of is set (S3305 in FIG. 174). Then, in the small hit control process 5 (see S2271 of FIG. 176), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511: yes of FIG. 176), the value of the counter is cleared.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the fifth embodiment, the latent state is maintained on the side of the voice lamp control device 113 based on the winning number command set corresponding to the value of the small hit prize counter 203da. It is configured to accumulate the number of balls won in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the set period. As a result, the number of balls won in one latent state game (RUSH game) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, as described above, whether or not the player has the game characteristic of selecting whether or not to cause the ball to win the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small hitting game, Depending on the selection contents of the person, the cumulative value of the number of balls won in the small winning combination variable winning device 2650 may be significantly different even if the number of small winning games is the same. Therefore, it is possible to provide a detailed game result by displaying the number of balls won in the small hitting variable winning device 2650, not the number of times the small hitting game is executed.

It should be noted that both the number of balls won in the variable winning device 2650 for small hits and the number of times the small hit game is executed are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the prize is awarded during one small hit game. It may be configured to display the average value of the number of balls, or to display the number of winnings as a winning history for each small hit type of the executed small hit game.

The falling pass counter 203db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the falling gate 2650e3 during the small hit game, and the falling switch 2650e3 detects the ball in the falling gate passing process (see S172 of FIG. 175). In that case (S3402 of FIG. 175: Yes), 1 is added to the value (S3403 of FIG. 175), and the passage number command is set with information corresponding to the value after the addition (S3404 of FIG. 175). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit game (S2511: YES in FIG. 176), the value of the counter is cleared.

In the present embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, that is, when the advantageous latent probability state is set, the number of balls passing through the falling route is always counted. .. As a result, if the "invincible mode" is set as the latent probability mode, the high probability state of the special symbol will pass through the route (falling route) that transitions to the low probability state when there is no advantageous latent probability state The player can be notified of the number of balls played (see cumulative display mode 819 in FIG. 169).

The passage flag 203dc indicates that the falling switch 2650e3 has detected a ball when the detection of the ball by the falling switch 2650e3 is effectively processed (when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to OFF). The flag is for indicating that the falling switch 2650e3 has detected a sphere when set to ON.

This passage flag 203dc is determined when it is determined in the fall gate passage process (see S172 in FIG. 175) that the ball has passed through the fall gate 2650e3 and the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to OFF (S3405 in FIG. 175). : No) Set to on. When the passing flag 203dc is set to ON, the process of determining whether or not a new ball has passed the falling gate 2650e3 in the falling gate passing process (see S172 of FIG. 175) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process for causing the high-probability state of the special symbol to fall during one small hit game is executed multiple times.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the above-described fourth embodiment in the winning number counter 223da and the passing number counter 223db. And are added, and the other points are the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The winning number counter 223da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during a small hit game, and in the ball passing related process (see S4582 of FIG. 179), the main controller 110. When it is determined that the winning number command is received from (S8101: Yes in FIG. 179), the value is incremented by 1, and the winning information for display is displayed in order to display the information corresponding to the value after the addition on the third symbol display device 81. A number command is set (see S8106 in FIG. 179).

Then, when the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state, the value of the counter is cleared. In other words, the winning number counter 223da, once the latent state is set, a ball that has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 in a small number of small hit games executed until the latent state ends. It is configured so that the numbers can be accumulated and measured.

The passage number counter 223db is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the falling gate 2650e3, and determines that the passage number command has been received from the main control device 110 in the ball passage-related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179). If so (S8107 of FIG. 179: Yes), the value is incremented by 1 when the current latent probability state is the advantageous latent probability state (see S8110 of FIG. 179).

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 to 175. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment is similar to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above, instead of the small hit control process (see FIG. 55). 176), the small hit entrance passage process (see FIG. 174), and the falling gate passage process (see FIG. 175) are different. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 174, the small hit entrance passage process (S171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit entrance passage processing (S171).

In the small hit entrance passage process (S171), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor is on (S3301). When it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not on (S3301: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball passage sensor is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the small hit winning opening is being opened (S3302). When it is determined that it is during the opening period of the small hit winning opening (S3302: Yes), a small hit entrance passage command is set (S3303). The small hit entrance passage command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. Sent. 1 is added to the value of the small hit prize counter 203da (S3304). Next, in the process of S3304, a prize number command is set based on the value of the small hit prize counter 203da after the addition (S3305), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, when it is determined that it is not during the opening period of the small hit winning opening (S3302: No), an error command is set (S3306), and the flow path solenoid is turned off (S3307). , This process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the falling gate passage processing (S172) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the falling gate passage processing (S172).

In the falling gate passage process (S172), first, it is determined whether or not the passage flag 203dc is on (S3401). When it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is turned on (S3401: Yes), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the passage flag 203dc is not on (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not there is a passage at the falling gate (S3402). When it is determined that there is no passage through the falling gate (S3402: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a passage through the fall gate (S3402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fall passage counter 203db (S3403), and the number of passages is calculated based on the value of the fall passage counter 203db after the addition. A command is set (S3404). Next, it is determined whether or not the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405). When it is determined that the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the state update restriction flag is not on (S3405: No), it is determined whether the falling gate passage valid period is in progress (S3406). When it is determined that the falling gate passage valid period is in progress (S3406: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF (S3407), and the passage flag 203dc is set to ON (S3408). Next, a fall command is set (S3409), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3406, when it is determined that the falling gate passage is not valid (S3406: No), an error command is set (S3410), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176, the small hit control process 5 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the content of the small hit control process 5 (S2271). The small hit control process 5 (S2271) is different from the small hit control process (S2205) in the above-described first embodiment in the process of S2511, when the small hit end timing is determined (S2511: No). The difference is that the values of the small hit prize counter 203da and the fall pass counter 203db are cleared (S2571), and the pass flag 203dc is set to OFF (S2572). Since the other processes are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. The control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is a state command process (see FIG. 62) in contrast to the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first to fourth embodiments described above. Instead, the state command processing 5 (see FIG. 177) and the hit-related processing 5 (see FIG. 178) instead of the hit-related processing (refer to FIG. 63) are executed. Otherwise, the same processing is executed. The same processes are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 177, the state command process 5 (S 4291) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the status command process 5 (S4291). The state command process 5 (S4291) is different from the state command process 4 (S4281) in the above-described fourth embodiment in that the winning number counter 223da and the passing number counter 223db are cleared (S4471) instead of the process of S4454. The difference is in the addition. Other processes are the same as the state command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the hit related process 5 (S 4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related process 5 (S 4292 ). The hit related process 5 (S4292) is different from the hit related process (S4216) in the above-described first embodiment in that a process related to passing a ball is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

In the hit related process 5 (S 4292 ), if it is determined in the process of S 4505 that the prize ball command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S 4505: No), it is determined whether the ball passing related command has been received. (S4581). When it is determined that the ball passage related command has been received (S4581: Yes), the ball passage related processing (S4582) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball passage related command has not been received (S4581: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a ball passing related process (S4582), which is one process in the hit related process 5 (S4922) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ball passing related process (S4582).

In the ball passing related process (S4582), first, it is determined whether or not a prize number command has been received from the main controller 110 this time (S8101). When it is determined that the prize number command has been received (S8101: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the prize number counter 223da (S8102), and the latent mode stored in the latent mode storage area 223cb is read. It executes (S8103). Next, it is determined whether the latent probability mode read in the process of S8103 is the invincible mode (S8104). When it is determined that the mode is not the invincible mode (S8104: No), a suggestive effect that suggests the end of the latent state is set (S8105), a display winning number command is set (S8106), and this processing is ended. .. On the other hand, in the process of S8104, when it is determined that the read latent probability mode is the invincible mode (S8104: Yes), the process of S8105 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S8106.

On the other hand, in the processing of S8101, when it is determined that the winning number command is not received from the main control device 110 (S8101: No), it is determined whether or not the passing number command is received (S8107). If it is determined that the passing number command is received (S8107: Yes), the value stored in the state setting area 223j is read (S8108). Next, in the process of S8108, it is determined whether or not the read value is a value indicating the time-saving missing latent probability (S8109). When it is determined that the read value is the value indicating the time-saving miss probability (S8109: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the passage number counter 223db (S8110). On the other hand, in the processing of S8109, when it is determined that the read value is not the value indicating the time-shortage latent probability (S8109: No), the processing of S8110 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S8111.

Next, the latent probability mode stored in the latent probability mode storage area 223cb is read (S8111). Next, it is determined whether the latent probability mode read in the processing of S8111 is the invincible mode (S8112). When it is determined that the mode is not the invincible mode (S8112: No), a suggestive effect that suggests the end of the latent state is set (S8113), a display passage number command is set (S8114), and the process is finished. .. On the other hand, in the process of S8112, when it is determined that the read latent probability mode is the invincible mode (S8112: Yes), the process of S8113 is skipped, the process of S8114 is executed, and the present process is ended.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the operation contents (opening operation pattern) of the small hit game to be executed are configured to be different depending on the type (small hit type) when the small hit is won. The proportion of balls that have won the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small hit game passing through the falling gate 2650e3 is different depending on the opening operation pattern that is executed.

With this configuration, the contents of the small hit game to be executed are predicted so that the high-probability state of the special symbol does not fall, and in order to perform the game aiming to obtain the privilege (prize ball) by the small hit game. The player can be made to select a game while doing.

In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, in the latent probability state where one special symbol is set during the period of executing the big hit variation, the small hit is won in the other special symbol variation (lottery). Even if the ball passes through the falling gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured not to shift to the low probability state.

As a result, the state in which the latent probability state is set, the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (difficult) advantageous latent probability state, and the high probability state of the special symbol is easier to fall than the advantageous latent probability state The disadvantageous probability state can be set.

In each of the above embodiments, the process of updating the value of the hour/hour counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of hour/hour reductions) is the timing to start the variation of the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 of FIG. 33)). ), the first special symbol variation (lottery) and the second special symbol variation (lottery) can be executed simultaneously in a gaming machine, a predetermined number of times Although it is configured to execute a time saving game (a game in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set), for example, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 100 (when the time saving time is set to 100 times) ), there is a problem that the period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change becomes a non-time saving state (a low probability state of a normal symbol).

During the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, even in the lottery (variation) of the normal symbol different from the special symbol, it is a period in which the lottery (variation) advantageous to the player can be executed, The period from the start of the 100th special symbol change to the start of the 101st special symbol change, that is, the period until the number of times the special symbol change exceeds a predetermined time saving number is executed However, there is a problem that the player is uncomfortable when the non-time saving state is set.

However, if the process of updating the value of the hour/hour counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of hour/hour reductions) is configured to be updated at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends (timing at which the symbol fixing period ends), A variation of the first special symbol (lottery) and a variation of the second special symbol (lottery) can be executed at the same time in the gaming machine. A special symbol variation (lottery) with a preset number of hour-shorter times is set to a time saving state. There was a problem that it was executed in the state where it was.

In order to solve the problem described above, the time saving end condition for the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) corresponding to the special symbol lottery (100 time saving) executed when the value of the time saving counter 203f becomes 0. (1st time saving end condition) is set, the time saving end condition (second time saving end condition) is also set for the other special symbol (for example, the second special symbol), and the set two time saving end conditions are set. Of these, the time saving state may be ended based on the time saving end condition that is established first.

Specifically, when a predetermined period (for example, 100 hour-shortening) is set as the period for which the time-saving state is set, the special symbol variation corresponding to the final variation of the time-saving state (for example, 100 hour-shortening) ends. The first time-saving end condition that is satisfied by that, and the second time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the condition for starting a special symbol change (for example, 101st special symbol change) that is newly executed after the lapse of a predetermined period is satisfied And, when the first time saving end condition is established first, that is, by the time the 101st special symbol fluctuation is started, the 100th special symbol fluctuation period (or the symbol fixing period) has ended. In that case, the time saving state is terminated at that time.

On the other hand, prior to the satisfaction of the first time saving end condition, when the second time saving end condition is satisfied, that is, before the 100th special symbol variation period (or symbol fixing period) ends (special (During symbol change), if the start condition of the 101st special symbol change is satisfied, it may be configured to end the time saving state before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed.

With such a configuration, in the state where the time saving state is set as the game state, while preventing the special symbol fluctuation (lottery) from being executed a predetermined number of times or more, the maximum period is set. It can be set as a time saving state. Therefore, as a normal symbol lottery (fluctuation), a state advantageous to the player can be set as long as possible.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, there is a probability variation counter 203aa for measuring a period in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set, and a time saving counter 203f for measuring a period in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set. The value of each counter is decremented and interrupted. However, in each of the above-described embodiments, the time saving counter is replaced by a process of interrupting the subtraction of the probability variation counter 203aa (a process of interrupting (skipping) measurement). A process of interrupting the subtraction of 203f may be applied, or the opposite process may be executed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of reserved balls is changed every time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, when the value is increased or decreased). The case of transmitting from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d in the main control device 110 increases, the holding number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b is decremented by 1. As a result, the number of times main controller 110 transmits the hold number command to voice lamp controller 113 and the number of times voice lamp controller 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced, respectively. It is possible to reduce the control load of the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the winning in the first ball entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are configured to be reserved up to four times each, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of balls to be held for variable display based on winning in the first ball entrance 64 is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four is the number of balls to be held. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the symbol as the identification information on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbols may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbols, and, for example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed together with the symbols, or may be displayed in a variety of motions or changed separately from the symbols. It also includes the presentation display that is said. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for showing the result of lottery of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. Alternatively, for example, among the third symbols, different display units may be provided for the main symbol that is emphasized and displayed on the player and for the sub symbols. Further, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game is executed aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 in the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in the normal game state, the left side area of the game board 13 is executed. Although the left-handed game aiming at is executed, the target area of the game board 13 may be changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state, while in the normal state. The right-handed game may be executed. Further, it may be configured such that games in different game states can be executed while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 that determine that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation are used as the operating means that the player can operate, but other than that. The configuration described above may be used, and the lever-shaped operation means that allows the player to determine that the player has operated by tilting left or right or front and back, and the fact that the player has operated due to contact or proximity It is also possible to use a touch-sensitive operation means that can be discriminated, a wireless operation means that can discriminate that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not by the main control device 110 but by the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the process for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is the voice lamp. Although the main control device 110 different from the control device 113 is configured to execute, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects. The processing may be configured to be executed by the same control device. With this configuration, one control device can execute a plurality of different processes.

The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right property, a 3rd right property, etc.) that can increase the expectation value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Alternatively, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, and game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, two types of special symbols, that is, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more. The special symbol type may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the game property in which a lottery (variation) is performed in accordance with a rule in which a plurality of special symbols are predetermined, and the game property in which a lottery (variation) is independently performed are described. However, the game characteristics described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever with a coin inserted and a symbol effective line is determined, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that “a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is specific".In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, or due to, for example, the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is caused to do so. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Small hits are possible during specific special map changes)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. Is dynamically displayed, a dynamic display period setting unit that sets a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the first identification information by the dynamic display unit, and the second determination can be executed. Second determining means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determining means, and the first display means for indicating a specific first determining result on the first displaying means. When the first identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is displayed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing the above, a first game state in which the second determination is easier to be performed than the first determination, and the first determination is performed more than the second determination. A second game state for facilitating, and a game state setting means capable of setting the game state setting means, wherein the game state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set in a dynamic display period.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probably changed state) that is advantageous to the player until the next big hit is won after the bonus game is finished according to the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set is variable by the lottery that is executed after the advantageous game state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous game state. When the next winning is immediately won by the lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set becomes short, and when the winning is not immediately won next time by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state Will be set longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state provided to the player is set varies depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Further, there is a problem that the privilege granted to the player is significantly different if the gaming machine has a gaming property of granting the privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous game state is set. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine A1, since it is possible to set the first game state in which the second determination is easily executed during the period in which the first determination is dynamically displayed, the length of the period in which the first game state is set. Can be set in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1, the second determination means is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine A2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are produced. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed more than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Since it can be easily played, the first gaming state can be made a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with the desire to set the first game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering A third ball entering means different from the means, a first state in which a game ball can be guided to the second ball entering means, and a ball entering the second ball entering means is more difficult than the first state There is a variable means that can be changed to two states, and the first determination means is based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. The second determination means is configured to be executable, and the second determination means is configured to be able to execute the second determination based on a game ball entering the third ball entering means. In the second game state, The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be easily changed to the first state rather than the first game state.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, it is possible to make it more difficult to execute the first determination in the first game state than in the second game state. Therefore, in the state where the first game state is set, it is possible to facilitate the game in which the ball is inserted into the third ball entering means, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. ..

In the gaming machine A3, it is possible to set a high probability that the probability of being determined to be the specific first determination result by the first determination after the first privilege game is executed is set to a higher probability than in a normal case. The game state setting means has a setting means, and when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the game state setting means is displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. A gaming machine A4, wherein the first gaming state is set based on the start of the dynamic display of the first identification information.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means, a dynamic display of the first identification information that is displayed as the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result by the first determination is displayed. Since the first game state is set based on the start, the process until the first game state is set can be set in stages. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily continue to play the game.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second privilege game is set to have fewer privileges that can be given to the player than the first privilege game. Machine A5.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A4, the following effect is achieved. That is, in the second privilege game, since the privilege that can be given to the player is set to be smaller than that in the first privilege game, the privilege is excessively provided to the player during the period when the first game state is set. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving.

<Characteristic B group> (Game contents and special 1 and special 2 are set at once)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information, first dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination And a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the second determination means, and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the second display means. Second dynamic display means to be displayed, second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result on the second display means. When is displayed, in a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game, it is displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. Period determination means for determining a dynamic display period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means. A gaming machine B1 characterized by having an effect determining means for determining an effect corresponding to, and an effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probably changed state) that is advantageous to the player until the next big hit is won after the bonus game is finished according to the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set is variable by the lottery that is executed after the advantageous game state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous game state. When the next winning is immediately won by the lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set becomes short, and when the winning is not immediately won next time by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state Will be set longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state provided to the player is set varies depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Further, there is a problem that the privilege granted to the player is significantly different if the gaming machine has a gaming property of granting the privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous game state is set. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the game machine B1, since the effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means is determined by the effect determination means, the first identification information Since it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information in association with the dynamic display period, it is possible to provide the player with enjoyment for predicting a future game based on the effect performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B1, the effect determination means determines the effect based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means and the game content of the first privilege game. Characteristic game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, by grasping the effect executed by the effect executing means, the dynamic display period of the currently executed first identification information and the game of the first privilege game are executed. It is possible to predict the content and Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a first gaming state in which the second determination is more likely to be performed than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination. There is a game state setting means that can be set, and the game state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. A gaming machine B3 for executing the first gaming state during the dynamic display period.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the first game state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result that the first privilege game is to be executed, the period until the first privilege game is executed is set. A game aiming at the second privilege game can be performed using the game. Furthermore, by grasping the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to predict the period in which the first game state is set, so that it is possible to enthusiastically play the game during the first game state. effective.

In the gaming machine B2 or B3, a normal first privilege game as the first privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, and a small first privilege game with less privilege to be given to the player than the normal first privilege game. And a first privilege game setting means capable of setting, and the first dynamic display period determination means can determine a first period and a second period longer than the first period. , The effect determining means, when the small first privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, and the second period is determined by the period determining means, and the normal game by the privilege game executing means. A gaming machine B4, which determines an effect in the same manner as when one privilege game is executed and the first period is determined by the period determining means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the effect determination means is a combination in which the advantageous states of the two elements for determining the effect content are different, the effect determination means provides the same aspect. Since the effect is determined, by grasping the content of the effect executed by the effect executing means, it is possible to make the player predict a plurality of patterns of future game situations. Then, depending on the progress of the first gaming state, it is possible to gradually improve the accuracy of the prediction. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the enjoyment of prediction to the player and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B4, the effect determination means determines a specific effect when the bonus game execution means executes the normal first bonus game and the period determination means determines the second period. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the following effect is achieved. That is, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to notify the player that the most advantageous game content has been set, so that there is an effect that the player can be given a sense of superiority.

<Characteristic C group> (Inrush notification)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information, first dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second determination And a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the second determination means, and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the second display means. Second dynamic display means to be displayed, second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means, and the first display means When the first identification information for indicating the first determination result is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when is displayed, a first game state that makes it easier to execute the second determination than the first determination, and the first game state. A second game state that allows the first determination to be executed more easily than the second determination, and a game state setting means that can set the second game state when the first game state is set by the game state setting means Notification timing determining means for determining notification timing for notifying the player of the notification that the first gaming state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of identification information. A gaming machine C1 characterized by.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, according to the result of the lottery, the advantageous game state (probability change state) that is advantageous to the player is set until the next jackpot is won after completion of the bonus game, and the player is informed that the game state has changed. There has been proposed a game machine that executes the effect (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to execute an effect that informs that fact based on the setting of the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, for example, the advantageous game state is set. However, even if the new lottery cannot be executed, the fact that the gaming state is set is notified and the player feels uncomfortable. was there. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine C1, it is possible to determine the notification timing for notifying that the first game state in which the second determination is easily executed is set, based on the dynamic display situation of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with respect to the notification timing for notifying that the first game state has been set.

In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine C2, wherein the game state setting means sets the first game state based on a result of the first determination by the first determining means.

The gaming machine C2 has the following effect in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1. That is, when the first game state is set which is set based on the determination result of the first determining unit which is executed separately from the second determining unit, the notification is made based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. Timing is determined. Therefore, there is an effect that the first identification information and the second identification information that can be dynamically displayed at the same time can be combined to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

In the gaming machine C2, the gaming machine C2 has a dynamic display discriminating means for discriminating whether or not the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the time when the first game state is set, and the notification timing determining means is the dynamic When it is determined by the dynamic display determination means that the second identification information is not dynamically displayed, the notification timing is determined based on the time when the first game state is set. A gaming machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2. That is, when the second determination can be executed immediately after the first gaming state is set, the fact that the first gaming state has been set is immediately notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in the first gaming state for a longer time.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the notification timing determination means ends the dynamic display of the second identification information when the dynamic display determination means determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine C4, characterized in that the notification timing is determined based on the timing.

According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3. That is, even if the first game state is set, during the period when the second determination cannot be executed, the fact that the first game state has been set is not notified and the second determination can be executed. In this case, it is notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the second determination cannot be executed despite being notified that the first game state has been set, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. There is an effect that you can.

The gaming machine C4 has a remaining period determination means for determining a period from the timing at which the dynamic display of the second identification information ends until the first gaming state ends, and based on the determination result by the remaining period determination means. A gaming machine C5 having a notification determination means for determining whether or not the notification timing is determined by the notification timing determination means.

According to the gaming machine C5, it is determined whether or not the notification timing is determined based on the period during which the second determination can be performed during the first gaming state, so that, for example, the second determination is performed during the first gaming state. When the executable period has become extremely short, it is possible not to notify the player that the first game state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first gaming state from ending in a short period of time and giving the player uncomfortable feeling even though the player is informed that the first gaming state has been set. There is an effect that you can.

<Characteristic D group> (Simultaneous fluctuation destroys big hits, interrupts small hits)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. A first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a predetermined period, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and second identification information for displaying a determination result by the second determination means. Two display means, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period, and the first for displaying a specific first determination result on the first display means. When the identification information is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means to be executed and a second privilege game type setting means for setting the contents of the second privilege game from a plurality of privilege contents, the second dynamic display means is the first (1) The second identification information can be dynamically displayed while the first identification information is being dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. When the second identification information indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed, based on the privilege content set by the second privilege game type setting means, the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means is performed. A gaming machine D1 characterized by having stop control means for executing stop control.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a gaming property (so-called simultaneous variation type) in which a plurality of lotteries are simultaneously executed. In the gaming machine having such a gaming property, if the lottery result of one lottery is a win, the privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed and the other lottery game being executed is forcibly missed. There has been proposed a method of terminating automatically (for example, JP-A-2005-319221). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine, regardless of the type of privilege game, forcibly causes other lottery to be stopped and displayed based on that the result of the lottery in which the privilege game is executed is stopped and displayed. There was a problem of giving a person a discomfort. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to set the stop control content for the first dynamic display according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed, so that it is possible to suppress the situation that gives the player discomfort. The effect is that you can.

In the gaming machine D1, the stop control means performs forced stop control to stop and display the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means with the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. The gaming machine D2 is capable of executing a temporary stop control for stopping the measurement of the period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the following effect is achieved. That is, it is possible to set whether to forcibly stop the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means or temporarily stop the dynamic display according to the content of the second privilege game to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the excessive privilege from being given to the player, and the privilege game to which the large privilege is given is canceled by executing the privilege game to which the small privilege is given. This has the effect of suppressing this.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second privilege game type setting means can set the first privilege type and the second privilege type that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege type, and the stop is performed. The game machine D3, wherein the control means executes the forced stop control when the second special type is set by the second privilege game type setting means.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine D1 or D2, the following effect is produced. That is, when the second privilege type that is advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display means, so that an excessive privilege is given to the player. This has the effect of suppressing this.

In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display means ends, and the specific first determination Until the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed on the first display means, an invalidating means for invalidating the setting of the second privilege type by the second privilege game type setting means is provided. A gaming machine D4 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D3, the following effect is achieved. That is, when the determination result of the first determination unit is the specific first determination result, the setting of the second privilege type is invalidated by the invalidation unit during the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first privilege game and the second privilege game in which the second privilege type is set from being continuously executed, and it is possible to provide an excessive privilege to the player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second privilege game type setting means sets the first privilege type and the second privilege type based on the determination result of the second determining means, and A gaming machine D5, which makes it easier to set the first privilege type than the second privilege type.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the following effects are produced. That is, since the first privilege type is more easily set than the second privilege type, it is possible to suppress the excessive privilege from being given to the player even if the second privilege game is executed many times. There is.

<Other thoughts 1> (You can set the latent state before and after the big hit game)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. A dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second determination means, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means. When the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the first privilege game is executed, and the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In the gaming machine having the privilege game executing means for executing the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating is displayed, the second judgment is made easier to be executed than the first judgment. There is a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state in which the first determination is easier to be executed than the second determination, and the game state setting means is a predetermined first When the condition is satisfied, the first game state is set in the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and when the predetermined second condition is satisfied, the first privilege game ends. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the first gaming state is set later.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probably changed state) that is advantageous to the player until the next big hit is won after the bonus game is finished according to the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set is variable by the lottery that is executed after the advantageous game state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous game state. When the next winning is immediately won by the lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set becomes short, and when the winning is not immediately won next time by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state Will be set longer. As described above, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state provided to the player is set varies depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Further, there is a problem that the privilege granted to the player is significantly different if the gaming machine has a gaming property of granting the privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous game state is set. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine E1, the timing at which the first gaming state is set can be divided into before and after the first privilege game, so that it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic G group> (Small winning RUSH during symbol confirmation period)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. Stop display means for stopping and displaying, stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period for stopping and displaying the first identification information by the first stop display means, and second determination capable of executing the second determination. Means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means, a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be performed than in the first determination, and a first gaming state in which the second determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination. 2 game states, and has a game state setting means capable of setting, the game state setting means, in the stop display period in which the first identification information is stop-displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, A gaming machine G1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probably changed state) that is advantageous to the player until the next big hit is won after the bonus game is finished according to the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the period during which the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set is variable by the lottery that is executed after the advantageous game state is set, that is, it is executed during the advantageous game state. When the next winning is immediately won by the lottery, the period in which the advantageous gaming state is set becomes short, and when the winning is not immediately won next time by the lottery executed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period for which was set was long. That is, there is a problem that the period in which the advantageous game state is set varies depending on the result of the lottery executed after the advantageous game state is set. Further, there is a problem that the privilege granted to the player is significantly different if the gaming machine has a gaming property of granting the privilege to the player during the period in which the advantageous game state is set. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the stop display period can be set in advance as the period in which the first gaming state is set, there is an effect that the period in which the first gaming state is executed can be appropriately managed. .. In addition, since the first game state is set during the period in which the identification information for indicating the determination result of the first determination is stopped and displayed, the game content after the first game state is finished is given to the player in advance. Can be grasped. With such a configuration, for example, when the first gaming state is set in the state where the specific determination result is displayed as the determination result of the first determination, after the first gaming state ends, It is possible to know in advance that the first privilege game will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G1, the stop display period setting means sets a stop display period having a different length based on the determination result of the first determining means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G1, the stop display period is set based on the determination result of the first determining means, so the first privilege game is determined based on the determination result of the first determining means. Is executed and the length of the stop display period is determined. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2, the stop display period setting means, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, a longer stop display than in cases other than the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G3 characterized by facilitating setting of a period.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the stop display period is longer than in the case other than the specific first determination result. Since it becomes easier to set, it is possible to execute the first gaming state in which a longer period is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the stop display period setting means makes it possible to set stop display periods of different lengths when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. Gaming machine G4 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, the length of the stop display period can be made different even in the case of the specific first determination result. Therefore, even in the case of the specific first determination result, since the period in which the first game state is set is different, the player is motivated to play the game so that the longer first game state is set. The effect is that it can be done.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second determination means determines the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determination means determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G5 characterized by being configured as follows.

The gaming machine G5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4. That is, the second privilege game executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is executed more than the first privilege game executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Since it can be easily played, the first gaming state can be made a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with the desire to set the first game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic H group> (Small hit RUSH when big hit wins when time saving ends change)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of performing the second determination. And second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the first display means. The privilege to execute the first privilege game when displayed, and the privilege to execute the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means In a gaming machine having a game execution means, a first game state in which the second determination is easier to be performed than the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is easier to be performed than the second determination. There is a game state setting means capable of setting a game state, and the game state setting means can execute the second determination when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set during a first period.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (probably changed state) that is advantageous to the player until the next big hit is won after the bonus game is finished according to the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the above-described gaming machine, whether or not the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set is set by only one lottery result, so the process until the advantageous game state is set is set for the player. There was a problem that the game could not be played while entertaining. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine H1, since the first gaming state can be set for the first period when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied, the second determination is made during the first gaming state. Can be surely executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first gaming state ends without the second determination being executed despite the setting of the first gaming state, which gives the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. No games can be offered.

The gaming machine H1 has a first determination number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times of the first determination executed by the first determining means, and the first determination number of the first determination measured by the first determination number measuring means. The gaming machine H2, wherein the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of times reaches a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, when the number of times of the first determination reaches a predetermined number, the first predetermined condition is satisfied, and therefore the first determination by the first determination means is executed. By doing so, the game content can be reliably advanced toward the establishment of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a state in which the first predetermined condition is not satisfied when a game is played for a long time, and it is possible to prevent a player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2, the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the first determining means is the specific first determination result, and the gaming machine H3.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the first determining means is the specific first determination result, so that the player can understand. There is an effect that an easy game can be provided.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the game state setting means sets the first game state even when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game state setting means is When the first game state is set based on the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition, the first game state is set during the second period when the second determination is difficult to execute. A gaming machine H4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set only for the second period in which the second determination is difficult to execute. As a result, the first game state set when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied can be a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are both satisfied.

In the gaming machine H4, the game state setting means is shorter than the first period when the first game state is set on the basis of the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition, and the first period is shorter than the first period. A gaming machine H5, wherein the first gaming state is set for a third period longer than two periods.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H4, if only the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set for the third period. There is an effect that a game can be motivated to first establish the second predetermined condition.

<Characteristic I group> (Small hit RUSH rush expectation degree can be changed by shortened times)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of performing the second determination. And second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the first display means. The privilege to execute the first privilege game when displayed, and the privilege to execute the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means It is possible to set a game execution means, a first game state in which the second determination is easier to execute than the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is easier to execute than the second determination. In a gaming machine having a different game state setting means, the game state setting means can set a third game state in which the first game state is easier to set than the second game state for a predetermined period. There is a third game state period setting means capable of setting a first period and a second period longer than the first period as a period in which the third game state is set, and the third game state. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that setting the first period by the period setting means makes it easier to set the first gaming state than setting the second period.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a game in which a plurality of game states are gradually shifted according to a lottery result is set, and an advantageous game state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to a player can be set (for example, JP-A-2005-058267). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine aims to set the advantageous gaming state because the advantageous gaming state is easy to set in the gaming state where the advantageous gaming state is easily set (semi-advantageous gaming state). There was a problem that the contents of the game performed as a result became monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine I1, the degree of expectation that the first game state is set in the state in which the third game state is set by changing the period for setting the third game state in which the first game state is easily set Can be different. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the setting contents of the third game state, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game process until the first game state is set. The effect is that it can be done.

The gaming machine I1 has progress determination means for determining the progress of the predetermined period set by the third game state period setting means, and the game state setting means has the progress determination means for the predetermined period elapsed. The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set on the basis of the satisfaction of a first setting condition that is satisfied when the determination is made.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1, the first gaming state is set when the period in which the third gaming state is set has elapsed, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the game state setting means is in a state where the third game state is set, and when the first determination result by the first determining means is the specific first determination result. A gaming machine I3 for setting the first gaming state based on the satisfaction of a second setting condition.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, even when the third gaming state in which the first setting condition is difficult to be established, that is, the third gaming state for a long time is set, During the third gaming state, the first gaming state can be set based on the determination result of the first determining means. Therefore, depending on the period of the third gaming state to be set, different transition conditions can be aimed at in order to set the first gaming state, so that the game motivation depends on the length of the period of the third gaming state to be set. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the third gaming state period setting means can set a third period longer than the second period, and the progress determining means determines the progress of the third period. In this case, the gaming machine I4 has a condition limiting means that does not satisfy the first setting condition.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the elapse of the third period is determined, the condition setting means does not satisfy the first setting condition, and thus the first gaming state is set. Can be surely restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

Any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4 has a first game state period setting means for setting a period during which the first game state is set, and the first game state period setting means, by the progress determination means, The gaming machine is characterized in that when the first period has been determined, the period in which the first gaming state is set is set to be longer than when the second period has been determined to have elapsed. I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4, it is determined that the determination that the second period has elapsed is longer than the determination that the second period has elapsed, the first period. The game state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be watched for the determination result of the progress determination means.

<Characteristic J group> (Surely small hit RUSH for a predetermined period)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and second determination capable of executing the second determination Means, second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. Is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second privilege game is executed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means, a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be performed than in the first determination, and a first gaming state in which the second determination is more likely to be performed than the second determination. 2 game states, a game state setting means capable of setting, an advantageous period setting means for setting an advantageous period during which the first game state can be continuously set by the game state setting means, and an advantageous period setting means A first ending condition that is satisfied when the set advantageous period has elapsed, or ending means that ends the first gaming state when a second ending condition different from the first ending condition is satisfied, A gaming machine J1 having an end restricting means for restricting the establishment of the second end condition when a predetermined continuation condition is established.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a game in which a plurality of game states are gradually shifted according to a lottery result is set, and an advantageous game state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to a player can be set (for example, JP-A-2005-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the period during which the advantageous game state is set is variable based on the result of the lottery executed during the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is provided to the player for a predetermined period. However, there is a problem in that the advantageous game state ends in a short period of time even though the advantageous game state is set with difficulty and the motivation for the game is lowered. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine J1, when the predetermined continuation condition is established, the establishment of the second termination condition can be limited by the termination limiting means. Therefore, there is an effect that the first game state can be continuously set during the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine J1, the game state setting means can set an advantageous first game state in which the predetermined continuation condition can be established and a disadvantageous first game state in which the predetermined continuation condition cannot be established. A gaming machine J2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, it is possible to set the advantageous first gaming state and the disadvantageous first gaming state by the gaming state setting means, which is advantageous by the gaming state setting means. There is an effect that a game can be motivated so that the first game state is set.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the predetermined continuation condition is met when the result of the first determination by the first determining means is the specific first determination result. J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, so the first determination means There is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game so that the determination result of 1 becomes the specific first determination result.

In the gaming machine J2 or J3, a gaming machine J4 having a notifying means for notifying that the advantageous first gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J2 or J3, the notification means notifies that the advantageous first gaming state is set, so that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, there is a determination means for determining that the satisfaction condition of the second ending condition is satisfied during the period when the advantageous first game state is set, A gaming machine J5, characterized by having a second notifying means for notifying that the satisfaction condition of the second ending condition is satisfied based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the second notification means that the satisfaction condition of the second ending condition is satisfied during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set. Therefore, if it is assumed that the first game state set this time is not the advantageous first game state but the disadvantageous first game state, it is determined whether the first game state has ended. It can be discriminated by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can experience the superiority of the advantageous first game state set this time.

<Characteristic K group> (In the time saving state, a period in which the number of time saving is not subtracted is provided)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. Is displayed dynamically for a predetermined first period, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the first determination is made. , A game state setting means capable of setting an advantageous game state for a predetermined period of time, a period measuring means for measuring a period of the advantageous game state set by the game state setting means, and the predetermined period by the period measuring means Termination means for ending the advantageous gaming state when a period is measured, and measurement limiting means for limiting the measurement of the advantageous gaming state period by the period measuring means when a predetermined limiting condition is satisfied, A gaming machine K1 characterized by having:

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine that sets an advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player until the next big hit is won after the bonus game is finished according to the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, since the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured to set the period until the number of times of lottery reaches a predetermined number as the period in which the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous game state is set. There was a problem that it was possible to easily predict the period of time. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine K1, since it is possible to limit the measurement of the predetermined period in which the advantageous game state is set by the measurement limiting means, it is possible to extend the period in which the advantageous game state is set. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is surprising and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K1, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means for displaying the second identification information indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means are provided. Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. A privilege game executing means for executing the second privilege game when the first privilege game is executed and the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, And a configuration in which the second identification information can be dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that the predetermined limiting condition is satisfied when the determination result of the second determination means is the specific second determination result.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine K1, the second determination means is configured in such a configuration that the second identification information can be dynamically displayed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed. When the determination result of is the specific second determination result, the predetermined limiting condition is satisfied. Thereby, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state where the measurement of the period of the advantageous game state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K2, the measurement limiting unit displays the advantageous game state by the period measuring unit while the second dynamic display unit is executing the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result. A gaming machine K3 characterized by limiting measurement of a period.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1, measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state while the dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result is being executed by the second dynamic display means. Is limited. Therefore, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed in a state where the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is limited. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, it is provided with an informing means for informing that the measurement limiting means limits the measurement of the period of the advantageous game state by the period measuring means. Gaming machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the notification means informs that the measurement of the period is limited by the measurement limiting means, so that the player can easily understand the game. There is an effect that it can be provided.

<Feature L group> (Small hit RUSH with different end conditions)
First determination means capable of performing the first determination, first display means displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means, and second determination means capable of performing the second determination. And second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the first display means. The privilege to execute the first privilege game when displayed, and the privilege to execute the second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means In a gaming machine having a game executing means, a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than in the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination A game state and a game state setting means capable of setting the game state, and the game state setting means, when a predetermined first condition is satisfied, or when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. The first game state is set to, and the first condition is set based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied, as compared to the case where the first game state is set based on the first condition being satisfied. A gaming machine L1 characterized in that setting the gaming state makes it easier for the first gaming state to continue.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a game in which a plurality of game states are gradually shifted according to a lottery result is set, and an advantageous game state (latent probability state) that is advantageous to a player can be set (for example, JP-A-2005-058267). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the end condition of the advantageous game state is single, it is not possible to vary the ease of continuation of the set advantageous game state, and to the player in the advantageous game state, There is a problem that the game provided by the user becomes monotonous and the motivation for the game decreases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine L1, the first game state can be set by the game state setting means, because it is possible to set the first game state that is easily set continuously and the first game state that is difficult to set continuously. Even after being played, there is an effect that the game can be played while expecting that the first game state continues for a long time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine L1, the game state setting means sets a game state different from the first game state when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied in the state where the first game state is set, The predetermined end is set when the first game state is set based on the second condition being satisfied, rather than when the first game state is set based on the first condition being satisfied. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that the conditions are difficult to be met.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L1, the first game state is set based on the establishment of the second condition, rather than the case where the first gaming state is set based on the establishment of the first condition. When the gaming state is set, it is more difficult to end the first gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to set the first game state that is easy to end and the first game state that is hard to end to the player, and thus the first game state that is hard to end even after the first game state is set. There is an effect that the game can be played while the player desires that the game state is set, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L2 has an end condition setting means capable of setting a first end condition and a second end condition different from the first end condition as the predetermined end condition, and the second condition is satisfied. Based on that, when the first gaming state is set, the first ending condition is not satisfied, the gaming machine L3.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L2, when the first gaming state is set based on the fact that the second condition is met, the first ending condition is not met, and thus it is difficult to end. The first gaming state can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game to establish the second condition.

In the gaming machine L3, the ending condition setting means sets the second ending condition when the judgment result of the first judging means is the specific first judgment result. L4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L3, the second ending condition is set when the determination result of the first determining means is the specific first determination result. Thereby, when the first game state is ended based on the satisfaction of the second end condition, the bonus game can be provided. Therefore, even if the first gaming state ends, the player can be provided with a privilege, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine L3 or L4, a gaming machine L5 having a notifying means for notifying that the first game state is set based on the satisfaction of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine L5, since the notification means notifies that the first ending condition is not satisfied, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Characteristics M group> (Set a fall invalid period with high accuracy of special maps)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and first determination specific to the first display means When the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed, the privilege game executing means for executing the first privilege game, and the first determining means for executing the predetermined setting condition are satisfied. In a gaming machine having a game state setting means capable of setting the advantageous game state in which the result of the first determination is more likely to be the specific first determination result than the normal game state, the advantageous game state is set by the game state setting means. In the state where is set, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the game state transition means for transitioning the game state from the advantageous game state to the normal game state, and the establishment of the predetermined transition condition are restricted. A game machine M1 characterized by having a transition condition limiting means.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Further, according to the result of the lottery, it is configured to set an advantageous game state (probability variation state) that is advantageous to the player until the next big hit is won after the bonus game is finished, and in addition, a predetermined lottery ( There has been proposed a gaming machine that ends the advantageous gaming state when winning the falling lottery). (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-152). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured so that the falling lottery is executed based on the fact that the winning/non-winning lottery of the game is executed, so that the player always has a sense of danger that the advantageous gaming state ends. There was a problem that it was not possible to play the game with confidence. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the player can play a game with peace of mind and the interest of the gaming machine is improved.

According to the gaming machine M1, the transition condition limiting means can limit the transition of the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state, so that the gaming state transitions from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. You can set the game period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a period in which the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine M1, the first determination means executes the first determination when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined first determination condition is satisfied, the first determination means It has a special judgment means capable of executing a special judgment different from the one judgment, and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the judgment result by the special judgment means is a specific special judgment result. Characteristic gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M1, a special determination is executed when the first determination condition is satisfied, and when the determination result is a specific special determination result, a predetermined transition condition is set. Is established. Therefore, the determination made by the first determination means and the determination made by the special determination means can be set in association with each other, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided.

In the gaming machine M1, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result, a second bonus game different from the first bonus game is executed. A second privilege game executing means, and a variable ball entering means that is variably operated to an open state in which a game ball can enter inside when the second privilege game executing means executes the second privilege game. , A variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entering means, and a specific area through which the game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entering means. The game machine M3, wherein the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the game machine M3 passes.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M1, a predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, since the transition condition can be satisfied at a timing different from the determination timing of the first determination means, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player shoots a game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

In the gaming machine M3, the variable control means has a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entering means easily passes through the specific area, and a first variable control which is less likely to pass through the specific area than the first variable control. A game machine M4 characterized by being capable of setting two variable controls.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M3, the variable control means allows the first variable control in which the ball entering the variable ball entering means easily passes through the specific region, and the second variable control in which it hardly passes through. Since it is possible to set and, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game. Further, since it is possible to determine whether or not the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player shoots a game ball, there is an effect that the player's willingness to participate can be increased.

In the gaming machine M4, the gaming machine M5 has an informing means for informing that the second variable control is set by the variable control means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M4, the notification means informs that the second variable control is set, so that an easy-to-understand game can be provided to the player. is there.

<Characteristic N group> (Game selection of small hit game)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means, and first determination specific to the first display means When the first identification information for displaying the result is displayed, a bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game, and a determination result of the first determination means different from the specific first determination result When it is the second determination result of No. 2, the second privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, and the second privilege game is executed by the second privilege game executing means. In this case, the game ball has a variable ball entering means which is variably operated to an open state in which the ball can enter the inside, and a variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entering means, Provided with a specific area through which the game ball can pass inside the variable ball entering means, and having a game state setting means capable of setting a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine N1 characterized in that.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result of the game is a win, There has been proposed a gaming machine capable of setting an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to a player when a privilege game that is advantageous is executed and a game ball passes through a specific area during the privilege game (for example, 2013-152). Since the advantageous game state is set by the game ball passing through the specific area, the above-mentioned gaming machine is to pay attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine N1, since a disadvantageous gaming state is set when the game ball passes through the specific area, it is possible to provide the player with a novel gaming property.

In the gaming machine N1, the variable control means has a first variable control in which a ball entering the variable ball entering means easily passes through the specific area, and a first variable control which is less likely to pass through the specific area than the first variable control. A game machine N2, which is capable of setting two variable controls.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1, the variable control means makes it easier for the ball entering the variable ball entering means to pass through the specific region, and the first variable control. Since either the second variable control that does not easily pass through the specific area is set, when the game ball is shot, the shot game ball can pass through the specific area depending on the contents of the variable control that is executed. You can have different sex. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment in which the player decides whether or not to shoot the game ball.

In the gaming machine N2, the second privilege game executed by the second privilege game executing means has an informing means capable of informing that the second variable control is set by the variable control means. A gaming machine N3 characterized by the above.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N2, the notification means informs that the second variable control is set. Therefore, when the player decides whether or not to shoot a game ball. Can provide useful information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the enjoyment in which the player decides whether or not to shoot the game ball.

In any one of the gaming machine N1 to the gaming machine N3, it has a detecting means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the specific area, and an invalidating means for invalidating the detection result by the detecting means, and the invalidating means. The game machine N4 is characterized in that the detection result of the detection means is invalidated based on the determination result of the first determination means.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the detection result of the detection means can be invalidated by the invalidation means, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine N4, the measuring means for measuring the number of gaming balls detected by the detecting means and the measuring result of the measuring means during the period in which the detecting result by the detecting means is invalidated by the invalidating means. A gaming machine N5, comprising: a measurement result notifying means for notifying information based on the information.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N4, the information based on the measurement result of the measuring means is notified by the measurement result notifying means during the period in which the detection result of the detecting means is invalid, so that it is invalid. The player can grasp the number detected by the detection means during the period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily feel the superiority.

<Characteristic O group> (End of time saving based on the condition that is met first among the multiple conditions)
First determination means capable of executing the first determination, first display means for displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information on the first display means. And a privilege to execute a first privilege game when the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying and the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result are stopped and displayed on the first display means. A game execution means, a first game state in which the first determination is easily executed, a second game state in which the first determination is less likely to be executed than the first game state, and a game state setting means that can be set. In the gaming machine, the game machine has an end means for ending the first game state when a predetermined first end condition is satisfied or when a second end condition different from the first end condition is satisfied. The game machine is characterized in that the ending means ends the first gaming state based on the one of the first ending condition and the second ending condition that is satisfied first. O1.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, An advantageous privilege game was being executed. Furthermore, the game machine which can change the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol simultaneously was proposed (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-12907). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, the subtraction of the period in which the advantageous game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set is the change start timing of the special symbol, so the advantageous game state is set to the maximum. However, there is a problem that the player is uncomfortable. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of playing the game is further improved.

According to the gaming machine O1, a first ending condition and a second ending condition are provided as conditions for ending the first gaming state, and the first gaming state ends when any of the ending conditions ends. , There is an effect that the first gaming state can be surely ended.

In the gaming machine O1, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination, the second display means for displaying the second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means, and the second display means are provided. A second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, and the privilege game execution means is for displaying a specific second determination result on the second display means. A second privilege game is executed when the second identification information is displayed, and the second motion is performed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. Is configured to be able to dynamically display the second identification information by the dynamic display means, and the first determination condition is satisfied by the execution of the first determination means, and the second determination means is executed. As a result, the game machine O2 is characterized in that the second ending condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O1, the first termination condition is satisfied based on the first determination by the first determination means, and the second termination condition is based on the second determination by the second determination means. Therefore, the gaming machine is capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information by the second dynamic display means while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. Even so, there is an effect that the first gaming state can be appropriately ended.

In the gaming machine O2, a first execution count measuring means for measuring the execution count of the first determining means, a second execution count measuring means for measuring the execution count of the second determining means, and the first execution count measuring means. And the number of executions of the first determining means as a first period in which the first game state is continuously set, and a summing means for adding the measurement result of the second execution number measuring means. A first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times that is the sum of the number of times of execution of the second determination means, and execution of the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of times of execution of the first determination means is the predetermined number of times. And an execution determination unit that determines that the second determination is performed by the second determination unit in a state where the state determination unit determines that the dynamic display is being performed. In this case, the gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the second end condition is satisfied before the second determination is executed.

According to the game O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O2, the second end condition can be satisfied even during the dynamic display in which the first end condition can be satisfied, so that the first game state is appropriately performed. There is an effect that can be ended.

In the gaming machine O3, the first end condition is that the number of executions of the first determining means is the number of executions of the first determining means after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determining means reaches the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine O4, which is established at any time until the first determination corresponding to a case where the number of times is greater than a predetermined number is executed.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O3, the first determination is made after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the first determination condition is the predetermined number of times of execution of the first determination means is finished. Since it is established until the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the means becomes larger than the predetermined number of times is executed, it is possible to set the predetermined first period to be long. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine O4, the third determination means capable of executing the third determination, the third display means for displaying the third identification information for showing the determination result by the third determination means, and the third display means When the third dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the third identification information and the third identification information for indicating the specific third determination result are stopped and displayed on the third display means, the third privilege is displayed. A third privilege game executing means for executing a game, and the third determining means sets the second game state when the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The game machine O5 is characterized in that it is executed more easily than if it is.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O4, the first gaming state is set because it has the third determining means that is easily executed when the first gaming state is set. By increasing the period of time during which the third determining unit is executed, the period during which the third determining unit is easily executed can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In any of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine, and the gaming machine γ1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then fixedly displaying the identification information is provided to operate a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It becomes a gaming machine provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, on condition that the final identification information is specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

In any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine γ2. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is actuated to a working opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift sphere but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused game machine is "provided with a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is provided. The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the game board surface, the game is randomly selected, and if the result is a win, There is one in which an advantageous privilege game is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-217766 A).
However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the enjoyment of games.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 displays the first determination means capable of executing the first determination and the first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means. 1 display means, 2nd determination means capable of executing the 2nd determination, 2nd display means for displaying 2nd identification information for showing the determination result by the 2nd determination means, and said 1st display means When the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification for indicating the specific second determination result on the second display means. A first game state having a privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game when information is displayed, and a second game state in which the second determination is more easily performed than the first determination, and the second determination. The second game state that makes it easier to execute the first determination than, has a game state setting means, the game state setting means, the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are both satisfied When it is, the first game state can be set during the first period during which the second determination can be executed.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, which has a first determination number measuring means capable of measuring the number of times of the first determination executed by the first determining means. The first predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of times of the first determination measured by the one-determination-number-of-times measuring unit reaches a predetermined number.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, and the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the result of the determination by the first determining means is the specific first determination result. To do.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 or 3, in which the game state setting means sets the first condition even when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied. The game state is set, and the game state setting means makes it difficult to execute the second determination when the first game state is set based on the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition. During the second period, the first gaming state is set.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 5 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, wherein the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition. Is for setting the first gaming state during a third period that is shorter than the first period and longer than the second period.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first determination means capable of executing the first determination, and the first display means displaying the first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means. A second determination means capable of executing the second determination, a second display means displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and a first specific to the first display means. When the first identification information for indicating the determination result is displayed, the first privilege game is executed, and the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. A first game state that has a privilege game execution means for executing a second privilege game, and that makes it easier to execute the second judgment than the first judgment; and the second game state rather than the second judgment. 1 has a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state that facilitates execution of the determination, and the game state setting means, when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied. During the first period in which the second determination can be executed, the first game state can be set.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exhibited. That is, it has a first determination number measuring means capable of measuring the number of the first determination executed by the first determining means, and the number of the first determination measured by the first determination number measuring means is a predetermined number. When the number of times is reached, the first predetermined condition is satisfied.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 or 3, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the game state setting means sets the first game state even when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game state setting means sets the first game state. When the first game state is set based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, the first game state is set during the second period in which the second determination is difficult to execute.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game state setting means is shorter than the first period and is longer than the second period when the first game state is set based on the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition. The first gaming state is set for a long third period.
Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
S306 first determination hand stage S308 gaming state setting means
S504 First dynamic display period setting means
S508 first dynamic display unit S905 second determination hand stage
S1205 Second dynamic display period setting means
S1209 second dynamic display hand stage
S5203 notification timing determination means

Claims (1)

First determining means capable of executing the first determination,
First display means for displaying first identification information for indicating the determination result by the first determination means,
First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information on the first display means,
First dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means,
Second determining means capable of executing the second determination,
Second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means,
Second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means,
Second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means,
When the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the first privilege game is executed, and the specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. A game machine having a privilege game executing means for executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for displaying is displayed,
A game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination and a second game state in which the first determination is more easily performed than the second determination. And
When the first game state is set by the game state setting means, a notification for indicating to the player that the first game state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. gaming machine, characterized in that is to chromatic and notifying timing determining means for determining a notification timing to notify the embodiments, the.